RetailRevive

KPI Customization

Empower retail managers to tailor their dashboard by selecting specific key performance indicators (KPIs) that are most relevant to their operational goals. This customization ensures that managers focus on metrics that drive their success, providing a more user-centric approach to monitoring store performance and allowing for quicker, data-informed decisions.

Requirements

KPI Selection Interface

"As a retail manager, I want to customize my dashboard by selecting specific KPIs so that I can focus on the metrics that are most relevant to my goals and make quick, informed decisions based on real-time data."

Description

The KPI Selection Interface requirement involves the creation of an intuitive user interface that allows retail managers to easily select and customize their key performance indicators (KPIs) for the dashboard. This interface should provide a user-friendly experience by utilizing drag-and-drop functionality, checkboxes, and search capabilities to streamline the selection process. The ability to filter and sort through available KPIs ensures that managers can focus on metrics relevant to their specific operational goals, enhancing their ability to monitor store performance. This feature is essential for providing tailored insights that drive data-informed decisions, ultimately contributing to improved operational efficiency and effectiveness.

Acceptance Criteria

KPI Selection by Retail Manager during Monthly Review

Given the retail manager accesses the KPI Selection Interface, when they select KPIs using drag-and-drop functionality and checkboxes, then the selected KPIs should be displayed on the dashboard accordingly, with the ability to save their selection.

Searching for Specific KPIs in the Interface

Given the retail manager is on the KPI Selection Interface, when they use the search bar to find a specific KPI by its name, then the interface should return the relevant KPI in the results without errors.

Filtering KPIs Based on Categories

Given the retail manager is utilizing the KPI Selection Interface, when they apply filters to view KPIs based on categories such as 'Sales', 'Customer Engagement', or 'Inventory', then only the KPIs relevant to the selected category should be displayed.

Saving Customized Dashboard KPIs

Given the retail manager has selected their KPIs and customized the dashboard, when they click the 'Save' button, then their selections should be stored and retrievable upon next access to the dashboard interface.

Sorting Available KPIs by Performance Metric

Given the retail manager is on the KPI Selection Interface, when they choose to sort available KPIs by performance metrics, then the system should sort and display the KPIs in the selected order without lag.

Dashboard Rendering of Selected KPIs

Given the retail manager has successfully saved their selected KPIs, when they return to the dashboard, then the dashboard should display all saved KPIs accurately, reflecting any updates in real-time.

KPI Visualization Options

"As a retail manager, I want to choose different visualization formats for my KPI data so that I can analyze the information in a way that is most understandable and meaningful to me."

Description

The KPI Visualization Options requirement entails the implementation of diverse visualization formats for displaying selected KPIs on the dashboard. These visualization formats can include bar charts, line graphs, pie charts, and numerical displays to cater to different user preferences and enhance data comprehension. By allowing managers to customize how they view their KPI data, this requirement seeks to improve the overall user experience and facilitate quicker understanding and analysis of important metrics. Integration with existing reporting tools will provide managers with a comprehensive overview of their store's performance in a clear and engaging manner.

Acceptance Criteria

User selects multiple KPIs to display on the dashboard

Given the user is on the KPI customization page, when they select multiple KPIs from the list and save their preferences, then those KPIs should be displayed on their dashboard in the chosen visualization formats.

User changes the visualization format of a KPI

Given the user has added a KPI to their dashboard, when they select a different visualization format (e.g., changing from a bar chart to a line graph), then the KPI should update to reflect the new format immediately without requiring a page refresh.

User removes a KPI from the dashboard

Given the user has KPIs displayed on their dashboard, when they choose to remove a specific KPI, then that KPI should no longer be visible on the dashboard without affecting the rest of the KPIs.

User applies default settings for KPIs

Given the user is on the KPI customization page, when they select the default settings option, then the KPIs should revert to the pre-defined default KPIs and visualization formats set by the system.

User integrates the dashboard with a reporting tool

Given the user has completed the KPI visualization setup, when they export or integrate their dashboard data with an existing reporting tool, then the data should accurately reflect the KPIs and visualizations as displayed on their dashboard.

User adjusts the size of a visualization on the dashboard

Given the user has a KPI visualization on their dashboard, when they drag to resize the visualization, then the size should adjust in real-time while maintaining the aspect ratio of the graph or chart.

User accesses help documentation for KPI customization

Given the user is on the KPI customization page, when they click on the help icon, then they should be directed to a relevant help document that explains how to customize KPIs and select visualization formats.

Real-time KPI Updates

"As a retail manager, I want my KPI data to update in real time so that I can react promptly to changes in store performance and make informed operational decisions."

Description

The Real-time KPI Updates requirement involves the development of a system that automatically refreshes KPI data in real time, ensuring that retail managers have access to the most current information on their dashboard. This capability is vital for enabling quick decision-making and responsiveness in a changing retail environment. To achieve this, the system must be connected to live data sources, allowing seamless updates without requiring manual input. This feature enhances the reliability of performance measurement and fosters a proactive approach to operations management.

Acceptance Criteria

Real-time KPI Updates in Live Environment for Retail Managers

Given the retail manager is logged into the RetailRevive platform, when they navigate to the KPI dashboard, then the KPIs should automatically refresh every 30 seconds, displaying the most current data without any manual intervention.

Integration of Live Data Sources for KPI Updates

Given the system is connected to live data sources, when an update occurs in inventory or sales metrics, then the KPI dashboard should reflect these changes immediately, ensuring the data is real-time and accurate.

User Notifications for KPI Significant Changes

Given the retail manager is viewing the KPI dashboard, when there is a significant change (greater than 10%) in any selected KPI, then the system should send a notification alerting the user of this change instantly.

Data Accuracy Verification for Real-time Updates

Given real-time KPI data is being displayed, when the retail manager cross-references this data with the source data, then at least 95% of the KPI values should match the source data within a 10-minute window.

Performance of KPI Dashboard Under Load

Given multiple retail managers are logged in and monitoring KPIs simultaneously, when they access the dashboard at peak times, then the system should maintain functionality with less than 2 seconds response time for updates.

User Customization for KPI Display Preferences

Given the retail manager is on the KPI dashboard, when they select their preferred KPIs from a list, then those selected KPIs should be displayed in their dashboard with real-time updates reflecting the current metrics.

Cross-device Accessibility of KPI Dashboard

Given the retail manager accesses the RetailRevive platform on a mobile device, when they open the KPI dashboard, then the KPIs should display correctly and consistently as they do on a desktop, ensuring user experience across devices.

Custom KPI Alerts

"As a retail manager, I want to set custom alerts for my KPIs so that I can be immediately notified of important changes without needing to constantly monitor my dashboard."

Description

The Custom KPI Alerts requirement focuses on providing retail managers with the ability to set personalized alerts for their selected KPIs. These alerts can be configured to notify users when certain thresholds are met or trends are detected, allowing for timely interventions and decisions. The alerts should be delivered via email or in-app notifications, ensuring that managers are always informed about critical changes in performance metrics. This feature is crucial for maintaining a proactive management approach, helping retailers to swiftly address issues and capitalize on opportunities as they arise.

Acceptance Criteria

Retail manager wants to set up a KPI alert for low inventory levels for a specific product to ensure timely restocking.

Given the retail manager selects a low inventory KPI, when they set the threshold to 10 units and save the alert, then the alert should be successfully created and visible in their dashboard.

A retail manager has configured a daily sales KPI alert to notify them when sales drop below a specified threshold.

Given the manager sets the sales threshold to $500, when daily sales reports are generated, then an email notification should be sent if the sales amount is below $500 on that day.

The retail manager changes the threshold for an existing KPI alert from 10 units to 5 units for low inventory notifications.

Given the manager updates the low inventory alert threshold to 5 units and confirms the change, then the system should save this new threshold and send alerts accordingly.

Retail manager wants to receive alerts for specific KPI trends such as increasing customer returns.

Given the manager selects the customer returns KPI, when the trend exceeds 15% over a week, then the manager should receive an in-app notification and an email alert about the increase.

A retail manager checks their alert configurations after having added multiple custom alerts.

Given the manager navigates to the alert configuration page, when they view their alerts, then all previously created alerts should be listed with the correct thresholds and notification settings.

The retail manager needs immediate notification for a financial KPI such as daily revenue exceeding a set goal.

Given the manager sets the daily revenue goal to $1,000, when revenue exceeds $1,000 on any day, then the manager should receive an immediate in-app notification and a follow-up email alert.

Configuration of alerts should include options for various delivery methods such as SMS, email, and in-app.

Given the manager creates a new KPI alert, when they select their preferred notification method as SMS, then the alert should be scheduled to send via SMS according to the selected threshold.

KPI Comparison Tool

"As a retail manager, I want to compare my selected KPIs over different time periods so that I can identify trends and make informed decisions to improve my store’s performance."

Description

The KPI Comparison Tool requirement allows retail managers to compare selected KPIs over specified time periods or against industry benchmarks directly from their dashboard. This feature facilitates deeper insights into performance variations and trends, supporting strategic planning and operational adjustments. Users should be able to easily select multiple KPIs for comparison and visualize them side by side, providing a clear view of areas needing attention or improvement. This capability enhances the strategic management of retail operations and informs performance enhancement initiatives.

Acceptance Criteria

Retail manager accesses the KPI Comparison Tool from their dashboard to analyze the performance of multiple selected KPIs over the last quarter.

Given a retail manager is on the dashboard, when they select multiple KPIs and specify the time period of the last quarter, then the KPI Comparison Tool displays a side-by-side visual comparison of the selected KPIs.

A retail manager compares the KPIs of sales growth and customer retention against industry benchmarks to identify areas for improvement.

Given a retail manager selects the KPIs of sales growth and customer retention, when they choose to compare these KPIs against industry benchmarks, then the system displays the comparison clearly, highlighting any discrepancies.

The retail manager wants to save a specific KPI comparison setup for future reference.

Given the retail manager is in the KPI Comparison Tool, when they save the current selection of KPIs and time period, then the tool should allow them to retrieve this setup easily in future sessions.

The retail manager wishes to determine if the KPI Comparison Tool provides any actionable insights based on the current KPI comparisons.

Given the retail manager has compared selected KPIs, when the comparison is viewed, then the system should provide at least three suggested actions based on performance trends observed in the data.

A retail manager finds that the comparison visualization is unclear and difficult to interpret.

Given a retail manager uses the KPI Comparison Tool, when they visualize the data, then the visual representation should adhere to standard design principles, ensuring clarity, color differentiation, and easy digestibility of information.

A retail manager wants to receive alerts when certain KPIs drop below industry standards during comparison.

Given the retail manager uses the KPI Comparison Tool, when a selected KPI falls below the defined industry standard during the comparison, then the system should generate an alert to notify the manager.

Dashboard Performance Analytics

"As a retail manager, I want analytics on how I use my KPI dashboard so that I can provide feedback for future enhancements and ensure the tool meets my needs effectively."

Description

The Dashboard Performance Analytics requirement involves incorporating analytics that provide feedback on user interactions with the KPI dashboard. This feature would track how often managers view specific KPIs, which KPIs are most frequently altered, and overall engagement levels. By analyzing this data, the platform can be enhanced to better meet user needs and improve the overall experience. This continuous improvement based on user behavior ensures that the dashboard remains relevant and valuable for retail managers as their operational goals evolve.

Acceptance Criteria

As a retail manager, I want to view detailed analytics on how often I access the KPI dashboard so that I can identify which KPIs require more attention.

Given that I have logged into the RetailRevive platform, when I access the KPI dashboard, then I should see a usage metric displaying the frequency of my interactions with each KPI over the past month.

As a retail manager, I want the ability to customize my dashboard by selecting my preferred KPIs, so that I can focus on the metrics that matter most to my operations.

Given that I am on the dashboard customization page, when I select my preferred KPIs from the available options and save the configuration, then my dashboard should reflect the selected KPIs immediately.

As a retail manager, I want to analyze which KPIs I frequently modify, so I can streamline my reporting and decision-making processes.

Given that I have accessed the KPI dashboard, when I review the analytics, then I should see a report listing the KPIs that have been altered most frequently in the past month, sorted from most to least adjusted.

As a retail manager, I want real-time feedback on my KPIs so that I can make informed decisions quickly.

Given that I am viewing my customized KPI dashboard, when any KPI reaches a threshold value (e.g., below 10% sales target), then I should receive a real-time alert highlighting this KPI and recommending actions.

As a retail manager, I want to receive insights on overall dashboard engagement so I can assess the effectiveness of the tools provided.

Given that I have accessed the performance analytics section, when I review the engagement report, then I should see metrics on total dashboard views, unique users, and average session duration over the past week.

Visual Analytics Tools

Integrate advanced graphical elements such as charts, graphs, and heatmaps to represent data visually. This feature allows retail managers to quickly interpret complex information, track trends, and spot anomalies at a glance, enhancing their analytical capabilities and accelerating decision-making processes.

Requirements

Real-time Data Visualization

"As a retail manager, I want to visualize key performance indicators through interactive graphs and charts so that I can quickly assess trends and make data-driven decisions to improve store performance."

Description

The Real-time Data Visualization requirement focuses on developing intuitive and interactive graphical representations of data, such as charts, graphs, and heatmaps, ensuring that retail managers can visualize important metrics at a glance. This feature will enhance users' ability to analyze sales trends, inventory levels, and customer interactions, ultimately supporting informed decision-making. By integrating seamlessly with existing data sources within RetailRevive, this function will provide retailers with immediate insights, allowing them to respond proactively to market changes and optimize their strategies accordingly.

Acceptance Criteria

Retail manager opens the dashboard of RetailRevive to visualize sales trends for the current month, aiming to identify peak sales days and areas for improvement.

Given the manager is logged into the RetailRevive platform, when they access the dashboard, then they should see a graphical representation of sales trends, including a line graph illustrating daily sales figures for the current month.

A retail manager wants to quickly assess inventory levels across multiple product categories using visual data representations.

Given the manager navigates to the inventory analytics section, when they select a specific product category, then they should see a heatmap displaying inventory levels, color-coded from low to high stocks for immediate insight.

During a weekly performance review, the retail manager needs to compare customer interaction metrics with sales figures to determine the effectiveness of marketing strategies.

Given the manager is viewing the performance review report, when they select the 'Customer Interaction vs. Sales' option, then they should see a bar graph comparing the two metrics side-by-side for the last six weeks.

A retail manager requires real-time updates on customer engagement metrics to make informed decisions during a flash sale event.

Given that a flash sale is in progress, when the manager views the dashboard, then they should see updated customer engagement metrics, including total visitors, conversion rates, and average order value updated in real-time.

A user wants to identify trends in customer purchasing behavior over the last quarter to adjust stock levels accordingly.

Given the user selects the 'Customer Purchasing Trends' report, when they access the data visualization, then they should be able to view a trend line chart that displays purchasing patterns over the last three months with interactive filters for product categories.

The manager needs to analyze the effectiveness of different pricing strategies adopted over the past month and their impact on sales.

Given the manager accesses the 'Pricing Strategy Impact' section, when they view the corresponding data visualization, then they should see a dynamic graph that showcases sales figures before and after the implementation of various pricing strategies, clearly indicating the changes.

Customizable Dashboard

"As a retail manager, I want to customize my analytics dashboard with the metrics that are most relevant to my role so that I can focus on critical data points that drive my decisions."

Description

The Customizable Dashboard requirement enables users to tailor their analytics experience by selecting which key metrics, graphs, and data visualizations they want to display. By providing a drag-and-drop interface, users will have the flexibility to prioritize the information that matters most to them, enhancing their engagement with the data. This feature integrates with User Profiles, allowing dashboards to be saved and retrieved based on specific user roles, thus catering to various managerial needs within RetailRevive.

Acceptance Criteria

User customizes their dashboard to include sales trends, customer engagement metrics, and inventory levels for better decision-making.

Given the user has accessed the customizable dashboard, when they drag and drop 'Sales Trends', 'Customer Engagement Metrics', and 'Inventory Levels' into their dashboard, then these elements should be displayed correctly without errors.

User decides to save a customized dashboard for later use, allowing them to quickly access their preferred metrics upon next login.

Given the user has arranged their dashboard, when they click the 'Save Dashboard' button, then their layout and metrics should be saved under their user profile and retrieve correctly on the next login.

An admin identifies that different user roles require different dashboard setups based on their specific needs.

Given multiple user roles exist, when an admin edits permissions for 'Manager' role to access a 'Sales Overview' dashboard, then all users with the 'Manager' role should see this customized dashboard upon logging in.

User wants to remove a metric from the dashboard to declutter their view and make it more efficient.

Given the user is viewing their dashboard, when they click 'Remove' on the 'Customer Engagement Metrics' widget, then that widget should be removed from their dashboard immediately without need for a page refresh.

User wants to revert their dashboard to the default settings after making changes they no longer wish to keep.

Given the user has customized their dashboard and decides to revert to default settings, when they click the 'Revert to Default' button, then their dashboard layout should reset to the original default configuration.

User accesses their dashboard on a mobile device to check metrics while on the go.

Given the user is using a mobile device, when they access the dashboard, then all elements should be displayed responsively without layout issues and retain full functionality.

User wants to share their dashboard layout with a colleague for collaborative decision-making.

Given the user has created a customized dashboard, when they click the 'Share Dashboard' option and input a colleague's email, then the colleague should receive an email with a link to view the shared dashboard configuration.

Anomaly Detection Alerts

"As a retail manager, I want to receive alerts when data anomalies occur in sales or inventory so that I can address issues promptly and minimize their impact on the store's performance."

Description

The Anomaly Detection Alerts requirement aims to implement an automated system that identifies unusual patterns or outliers within the retail data. By setting predefined thresholds or utilizing machine learning algorithms, this feature will notify users when specific metrics deviate significantly from standard performance levels. This capability will allow retailers to act swiftly to address potential issues such as overstock, stockouts, or sudden drops in sales, thus enhancing overall operational efficiency and risk management.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives an alert when a metric exceeds the predefined threshold for stock levels, indicating a potential overstock situation.

Given a predefined threshold for stock levels is set, when the stock quantity exceeds this threshold, then an alert notification should be sent to the user via email and in-app notification.

User is notified when sales data shows a sudden drop compared to historical trends, prompting investigation.

Given historical sales data is available, when there is a drop in sales of more than 20% compared to the weekly average, then the system should trigger an alert to the user.

User receives an alert for unusual spikes in customer returns that exceed a specified threshold.

Given a threshold for customer returns is established, when the number of returns in a week exceeds this threshold by 30%, then an alert notification should be sent to the user.

User can customize the alerts for various metrics according to their business needs.

Given a customization interface is available, when the user sets or modifies alert thresholds for specific metrics, then the new thresholds should be saved and reflected in the alert system without errors.

User benefits from machine learning algorithms that improve anomaly detection over time.

Given machine learning algorithms are implemented, when new data is analyzed, then the algorithm should correctly identify at least 85% of anomalies compared to previous manual detection methods.

User can review alert logs to analyze past anomalies and responses.

Given alert history functionality is implemented, when the user accesses the alert log, then they should see a complete record of all alerts triggered, including the timestamp and the metric involved.

User receives an alert for stockouts based on real-time inventory data.

Given that real-time inventory tracking is enabled, when stock levels reach zero for any item, then the system should send an immediate alert to the user to prompt reordering actions.

Performance Trend Analysis

"As a retail manager, I want to analyze performance trends over time so that I can make informed decisions on product offerings and marketing strategies based on historical data."

Description

The Performance Trend Analysis requirement enables users to examine historical data over specific time periods to identify and analyze trends. This feature will provide comparative analytics, allowing retailers to evaluate performance metrics against previous sales data and customer engagement levels. By integrating advanced statistical methods, users can gain insights into seasonality, promotional effectiveness, and other temporal impacts, enabling proactive business planning and strategy adjustments within RetailRevive.

Acceptance Criteria

Retail manager wants to analyze sales performance over the last quarter to understand seasonal trends and promotional effectiveness.

Given the manager has selected the Performance Trend Analysis tool, when they choose a specific time period (last quarter), then the system should display historical sales data as well as relevant comparative metrics with clear visualizations such as graphs and charts.

A retail manager is preparing for an upcoming promotional event and needs to assess past performance during similar events to predict outcomes.

Given that the manager is using the Performance Trend Analysis feature, when they filter data by previous promotional events, then the system should present side-by-side analytics of sales metrics from past events, highlighting key differences and trends.

The manager suspects a decline in customer engagement over the past month and aims to analyze the trend to understand underlying issues.

Given the manager accesses the Performance Trend Analysis tool, when they select the past month as a time frame, then the system should provide insights into customer engagement metrics alongside sales data, displayed through interactive heatmaps and trend lines.

Retail managers want to evaluate the success of their inventory management by comparing stock levels with sales data over time.

Given the manager employs the Performance Trend Analysis, when they choose to analyze inventory alongside sales over a specified period, then the tool should deliver visual representations of stock levels in relation to monthly sales performance, enabling easy identification of correlations.

A retail manager is interested in identifying anomalies in sales data to make informed business decisions.

Given the manager utilizes the Performance Trend Analysis, when they activate the anomaly detection feature, then the system should automatically highlight any significant deviations in sales performance with visual cues within the graphical data representation.

A retailer wants to track the effectiveness of different pricing strategies across various product categories to maximize profits.

Given the manager is using the Performance Trend Analysis tool, when they filter the data based on specific pricing strategies and product categories, then the system should generate comparative graphs illustrating performance metrics, enabling a comprehensive view of pricing effectiveness.

A manager seeks to provide a quarterly report to stakeholders summarizing performance trends and metrics.

Given the manager uses the Performance Trend Analysis feature, when they generate a report for the selected time frame, then the system should compile relevant visual data and insights into a formatted report that can be exported or shared, ensuring clarity and professionalism in communication with stakeholders.

Interactive Heatmaps for Customer Behavior

"As a retail manager, I want to see interactive heatmaps of customer movements in the store so that I can optimize store layout and improve customer engagement."

Description

The Interactive Heatmaps for Customer Behavior requirement will visualize customer interactions within stores by displaying areas of high traffic and engagement. Using tracking data from POS systems and customer interactions, these heatmaps will help retailers understand foot traffic patterns and optimize store layout and staff allocation. This feature will be essential for enhancing the customer experience and improving operational efficiency in physical retail spaces.

Acceptance Criteria

Retail managers want to analyze customer interactions during peak store hours to optimize staff allocation and enhance customer engagement.

Given that customer interaction data has been collected during peak hours, When the manager accesses the interactive heatmap, Then the heatmap displays real-time areas of high and low traffic, with clear visual indicators for immediate analysis.

A retailer needs to track the effectiveness of promotional displays by analyzing customer foot traffic patterns before and after placements.

Given prior customer behavior data and the newly placed promotional displays, When the manager compares the heatmap data before and after the placement, Then the system shows a noticeable increase in foot traffic around the promotional areas, quantifying the impact of the display.

Store personnel require insights into customer engagement levels across different sections of the store to improve layouts and merchandising strategies.

Given that the heatmaps have been generated from the tracking data, When personnel review the heatmap results, Then they can identify sections with low engagement and initiate layout redesign strategies based on this data.

A retail manager is preparing for a major sale event and wants insights into customer behavior to maximize sales opportunities during the event.

Given historical customer behavior data, When the manager accesses the interactive heatmap prior to the sale event, Then they see predicted high-traffic areas and time slots, allowing them to adjust staffing and inventory accordingly.

A retail manager needs to present findings on customer behavior patterns to the executive team during a quarterly review.

Given the generated heatmap data, When the manager creates a presentation including visual heatmaps, Then the presentation clearly illustrates key insights on customer behavior and areas for improvement, backed by data visualizations.

Store managers want to understand seasonal changes in customer foot traffic to prepare better for upcoming seasons.

Given that the interactive heatmaps display historical data over several seasons, When the store manager analyzes the data, Then they can identify trends and anomalies in customer foot traffic changes with corresponding recommendations for seasonal adjustments.

Real-Time Alerts

Implement a notification system that provides instant alerts for significant changes in performance metrics, such as stock levels or sales drops. These proactive notifications enable retail managers to address issues as they arise, ensuring that they can react swiftly to maintain optimal store operations.

Requirements

Performance Metric Monitoring

"As a retail manager, I want to monitor key performance metrics in real-time so that I can swiftly adjust operations and product availability to meet customer demand and improve sales."

Description

This requirement involves implementing a comprehensive system to monitor key performance metrics in real-time, including stock levels, sales figures, and customer engagement metrics. It will provide valuable insights that allow retailers to make informed decisions on inventory management and customer interactions. The system will be integrated with existing sales and inventory modules within the RetailRevive platform, facilitating seamless data flow and enabling timely adjustments to operations based on performance trends. Benefits include enhanced decision-making, increased agility in responding to market changes, and improved customer satisfaction as stock levels are maintained at optimal levels.

Acceptance Criteria

Real-time stock level alert for low inventory.

Given that the stock level of any item falls below the pre-defined threshold, when the threshold is crossed, then an alert notification is sent to the retail manager's dashboard and via email.

Sales drop alert for specific product categories.

Given that the sales figures for any product category have decreased by 20% compared to the previous week, when this drop is detected, then an alert notification is generated and sent to the retail manager's dashboard and via email.

Customer engagement metric monitoring for loyalty program effectiveness.

Given that the customer engagement metrics indicate a drop of 15% in loyalty program sign-ups, when this drop is registered, then an alert notification is prompted to the retail manager's dashboard and via SMS.

Daily summary alerts for key performance metrics.

Given it is the end of the business day, when performance metrics for that day are compiled, then a daily summary alert is sent to the retail manager's email, including stock levels, sales figures, and engagement metrics.

Real-time alert for website performance issues affecting online sales.

Given that the website's downtime exceeds 5 minutes, when this condition is met, then an alert is sent immediately to the IT team and retail manager via email and SMS.

Stock replenishment alerts based on sales trends.

Given that the sales of a particular item are trending upward over two consecutive weeks, when this trend is detected, then an alert is generated to notify the retail manager to consider stock replenishment.

Inventory audit alerts based on performance anomalies.

Given that there is a discrepancy greater than 10% between reported stock levels and physical stock counts, when this discrepancy is identified, then an alert is dispatched to the inventory manager and retail manager's dashboard.

Customizable Alert Settings

"As a retail manager, I want to customize my alert settings for performance metrics so that I only receive notifications that are relevant to my operations and can respond effectively without being overwhelmed by alerts."

Description

This requirement focuses on allowing users to customize the alert settings for different performance metrics, enabling them to choose the types of notifications they wish to receive and set thresholds for alerts. Users will be able to prioritize alerts and select the communication channels through which they receive notifications, such as email, SMS, or in-app messages. This feature enhances user experience by reducing notification fatigue and ensuring that users are only alerted about the changes that are most critical to them. The customization options will be integrated within the user settings interface of RetailRevive, ensuring a user-friendly experience.

Acceptance Criteria

User Customizes Alert Settings for Low Stock Notifications

Given a user is logged into RetailRevive, when they navigate to the alert settings, then they should be able to customize the alert threshold for low stock notifications between 1 and 100 units.

User Selects Communication Channels for Alerts

Given a user is on the alert settings page, when they select their preferred communication channels, then they should be able to choose from email, SMS, and in-app notifications, and save their selections successfully.

User Prioritizes Different Alert Types

Given a user is on the alert settings interface, when they set priority levels for different alert types (low stock, sales drop, etc.), then the system should allow them to assign a priority level of high, medium, or low to each alert type and confirm the changes.

User Receives Alerts Based on Customized Settings

Given a user has customized their alert settings, when an alert condition is met (e.g., stock falls below threshold), then they should receive the alert through their selected communication channels without delay.

User Changes Alert Settings and Saves Changes

Given a user has modified their alert settings, when they click the save button, then their changes should be successfully saved and reflected in the alert settings interface without errors occurring.

User Views Previous Alerts and Notifications

Given a user has received alerts, when they navigate to the notifications history section, then they should be able to view all past alerts along with timestamps and details of the notifications received.

Historical Data Analysis

"As a retail manager, I want to analyze historical performance data so that I can identify trends and adjust my inventory strategy proactively to meet future customer needs."

Description

This requirement aims to develop a feature that enables users to analyze historical data related to performance metrics over defined periods. It will allow retailers to generate reports that compare past and present performance, helping them identify trends, seasonal patterns, and other critical insights. By integrating this analysis with predictive analytics capabilities, retailers can better anticipate future stock needs and customer behavior. This feature will add significant value by equipping managers with the knowledge to make proactive decisions, align inventory with predicted demand, and optimize overall store operations.

Acceptance Criteria

Historical data analysis for sales trends over the last quarter.

Given the historical data analysis feature is implemented, when the user selects a date range of the last quarter and requests a report, then the system should generate a comparative report showing sales trends, including total revenue, average transaction values, and percentage changes from previous quarters.

Integration of predictive analytics with historical data analysis.

Given the historical data analysis and predictive analytics features are implemented, when the user views the historical data report, then the system should provide predictive insights, such as expected sales for the next quarter based on previous trends with an accuracy rate of at least 85%.

User accessibility for generating reports using historical data.

Given the historical data analysis feature is present, when a user with standard permissions accesses the report generation tool, then they should be able to create and download reports within 5 minutes without encountering errors.

User interface for selecting historical data parameters.

Given the historical data analysis feature is available, when a user navigates to the report generation page, then the UI should allow them to select parameters such as date ranges, performance metrics to analyze, and download formats with clear tooltips for guidance.

Real-time notifications based on historical data insights.

Given the real-time alerts feature is integrated with historical data analysis, when a significant drop in sales is detected in comparison to historical averages, then the system should send an immediate notification to the manager's mobile device or email.

Instant Alert System

"As a retail manager, I want an instant alert system for performance metric changes so that I can react quickly to issues and maintain store effectiveness without delay."

Description

This requirement focuses on creating an instant alert system that rapidly notifies users of any significant changes in key performance metrics. In scenarios such as stock depletion or dramatic sales drops, alerts will be triggered in real-time, allowing retail managers to take immediate corrective actions. This real-time capability ensures that retailers do not miss critical opportunities to address issues as they arise, ultimately leading to improved customer satisfaction and fewer lost sales. The alert system will be designed to integrate seamlessly with existing notification frameworks in the RetailRevive platform.

Acceptance Criteria

Emergency Stock Depletion Alert Scenario

Given that the stock level of a high-demand product falls below the predefined threshold, when the depleting stock situation arises, then the instant alert system should notify retail managers via push notification and email within 30 seconds.

Sales Drop Notification Scenario

Given that the sales metrics indicate a drop of more than 20% compared to the average sales of the previous week, when this sales drop occurs, then the system should trigger an alert to retail managers with actionable insights within 1 minute.

Inventory Replenishment Alert Scenario

Given that inventory data shows that items are reaching below the reorder level, when the inventory levels are critically low, then the instant alert system must notify the inventory management team to initiate replenishment within 2 minutes.

Performance Metrics Monitoring Scenario

Given that the retail manager is logged into the RetailRevive dashboard, when the performance metrics indicate any anomalies (e.g., sudden increase in returns), then the system should ensure that alerts are visible on the dashboard in real-time and prompt immediate action recommendations.

Multiple Alerts Handling Scenario

Given that there are multiple alerts triggered within a short timeframe, when these alerts are generated, then the instant alert system should aggregate them into a single notification to avoid alert fatigue while ensuring that all pertinent information is conveyed clearly.

Integration with External Notification Systems Scenario

Given the requirement to integrate with existing notification frameworks, when the alert system is implemented, then it should successfully send notifications through integrated channels (like SMS or third-party applications) as confirmed by testing communications to these platforms within the first 5 attempts.

Feedback Loop for Alerts Scenario

Given that a user dismisses an alert, when this occurs, then the system should prompt the user to provide feedback on the relevance and effectiveness of the alert within the next 24 hours to improve future alert precision.

Performance Dashboard Integration

"As a retail manager, I want a performance dashboard that visually represents key metrics so that I can quickly assess store performance and make informed decisions without digging through multiple reports."

Description

This requirement entails the integration of a real-time performance dashboard that displays key metrics visually. The dashboard will provide an interactive and easy-to-understand interface, allowing users to monitor performance at a glance. Key performance indicators (KPIs) such as current stock levels, sales trends, customer visits, and alert statuses will be featured prominently. This integration will enhance user engagement with the RetailRevive platform, providing quick access to critical information that supports data-driven decision-making and operational efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria

As a retail manager, I want to view real-time stock levels on the performance dashboard so that I can make informed decisions about restocking my inventory.

Given that the performance dashboard is open, when I navigate to the stock levels section, then I should see the current stock levels for each product displayed visually and updated in real-time.

As a retail manager, I want to receive instant alerts for significant stock level drops, so that I can quickly react to potential stockouts.

Given that stock levels are monitored, when a product's stock level falls below the predefined threshold, then an instant alert should be sent to my dashboard and via email.

As a retail manager, I want to see sales trends over the past month on the performance dashboard, so that I can identify patterns and make strategic decisions.

Given that the performance dashboard is open, when I access the sales trends section, then I should see a visual representation of sales data for the past month, including daily sales numbers and trend lines.

As a retail manager, I want the performance dashboard to display customer visit counts, so that I can evaluate store traffic and staffing needs.

Given that the performance dashboard is open, when I view the customer visits section, then I should see the total customer visits for the current day compared to the same day last week, presented in a chart format.

As a retail manager, I want to ensure that alert statuses are clearly represented on the performance dashboard, so that I can prioritize my responses to issues.

Given that the performance dashboard is open, when I check the alert statuses, then I should see all alerts listed with clear indications of 'Resolved', 'Pending', or 'Critical' for each alert, with timestamps for easy tracking.

As a retail manager, I want to customize the KPIs displayed on my performance dashboard, so that I can focus on metrics relevant to my business.

Given that I have access to the customization settings, when I select or deselect KPIs from the list, then the dashboard should update automatically to reflect my preferences without requiring a refresh.

User Training and Support

"As a retail manager, I want access to training and support resources for the real-time alerts feature so that I can maximize its use and ensure my team can respond effectively to notifications."

Description

This requirement includes providing comprehensive training and support materials for users to effectively utilize the real-time alerts feature. This will encompass user guides, video tutorials, and dedicated support channels to assist with system navigation and alert configuration. The training will ensure that users are confident in leveraging the alert capabilities and can utilize the feature to its full potential. Enhancing user proficiency leads to better engagement with the RetailRevive platform and maximizes the effectiveness of the real-time alert system in optimizing store operations.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the training materials for the real-time alerts feature through the RetailRevive platform.

Given the user is logged into RetailRevive, when they navigate to the training section, then they should see a list of training materials including user guides and video tutorials specifically for real-time alerts.

User attempts to set up a notification for low stock levels using the provided training materials.

Given the user has accessed the training materials, when they follow the instructions to set up low stock alerts, then they should successfully configure an alert that triggers when stock levels fall below the specified threshold.

User engages with the dedicated support channels to resolve an issue with alert configuration.

Given the user has contacted support through the designated channel, when they submit a query about alert configuration, then they should receive a response within 24 hours addressing their concern.

User successfully utilizes the alerts in a real store setting post-training.

Given the user has completed the training, when they receive an alert about a sales drop, then they should be able to identify the issue and respond accordingly within 10 minutes.

User rates the training materials on effectiveness after utilizing them for 2 weeks.

Given the user has completed the training, when they are asked to rate the training materials, then they should provide a score of 4 out of 5 or higher based on their confidence in using the feature.

User watches a video tutorial on configuring alerts and demonstrates the ability to set one up without further assistance.

Given the user has accessed the video tutorial, when they attempt to configure an alert, then they should successfully set it up on the first attempt without additional help.

User accesses a FAQ section related to real-time alerts and finds the information they need.

Given the user is searching for specific information regarding alert customization, when they navigate to the FAQ section, then they should find relevant answers in less than 3 minutes.

Collaboration Center

Create a shared workspace within the dashboard for team collaboration, allowing retail managers to annotate insights, share comments, and assign tasks related to specific performance metrics. This feature fosters teamwork, enhances communication, and ensures that everyone is aligned towards common operational goals.

Requirements

Real-time Collaboration

"As a retail manager, I want to collaborate with my team in real-time on performance metrics so that we can swiftly address issues and leverage insights together."

Description

The Collab Center should facilitate real-time collaboration among team members, allowing them to view changes, comments, and annotations instantly. This requirement ensures that team communication remains seamless and efficient, enabling members to respond to insights and tasks without delays. It integrates with the existing dashboard functionalities, allowing users to work on the same metrics simultaneously and elevating overall team productivity and alignment on objectives.

Acceptance Criteria

Managers and team members collaborate on sales performance metrics during a weekly review meeting using the Collaboration Center.

Given the team is logged into the Collaboration Center, when one team member adds a comment or annotation, then all other team members should see the change in real-time without needing to refresh the page.

A retail manager assigns tasks based on insights shared in the Collaboration Center during a real-time discussion with team members.

Given a task is created by a team member, when it is assigned to another team member, then the assignee should receive a notification in their dashboard and via email as soon as the task is assigned.

Multiple team members are viewing the same sales metrics report in the Collaboration Center simultaneously.

Given multiple users are editing the same report, when one user makes changes to the report, then all other users should see the updated report in real-time without any noticeable delay.

A team member annotates a metric in the Collaboration Center that requires follow-up discussion.

Given an annotation is made on a performance metric, when a team member clicks on the annotation, then they should be able to view the details and add replies to that annotation seamlessly.

During a critical sales analysis session, the team uses the Collaboration Center to simultaneously access, edit, and comment on various reports.

Given the Collaboration Center is used during the analysis, when changes or comments are made by any team member, then the activity feed should log these changes along with timestamps for transparency and tracking purposes.

Task Assignment and Tracking

"As a team leader, I want to assign tasks to my colleagues within the Collaboration Center so that we can clearly delineate responsibilities and deadlines for our operational goals."

Description

This feature will enable users to assign specific tasks to team members directly within the Collaboration Center. It should include functionality for tracking the status of these tasks, ensuring that everyone is aware of their responsibilities and deadlines. This requirement enhances accountability within the team, allowing for better monitoring of progress and effective delegation of duties to ensure operational goals are met.

Acceptance Criteria

Task Assignment in the Collaboration Center

Given a retail manager is in the Collaboration Center, when they assign a task to a team member, then the assigned team member should receive a notification of the new task with the details provided (title, deadline, and description).

Task Status Tracking

Given a task has been assigned to a team member, when the team member updates the status of the task, then this status should be reflected in the Collaboration Center for all team members to view in real time.

Deadline Reminders for Tasks

Given a task that is nearing its deadline, when the deadline is within 24 hours, then all team members assigned to the task should receive a reminder notification indicating the approaching deadline.

Task Completion Confirmation

Given a team member has completed a task, when they mark the task as complete, then the task should be visually updated in the Collaboration Center and the original assigner should receive a confirmation notification.

Filtering Tasks by Status

Given multiple tasks have been assigned in the Collaboration Center, when a user applies a filter to view tasks by status (e.g., 'Completed', 'In Progress', 'Not Started'), then only tasks that meet the selected criteria should be displayed.

Commenting on Tasks

Given a task in the Collaboration Center, when a team member leaves a comment on the task, then the comment should be visible to all assigned team members in real time and should include timestamps.

Commenting and Annotation Tools

"As a team member, I want to annotate performance metrics with comments so that I can provide insights that will inform our collective decision-making process."

Description

The Collaboration Center must provide robust commenting and annotation tools that allow users to leave insights and feedback on specific performance metrics. This functionality will foster informative discussions among team members and enhance knowledge sharing within the organization. By retaining a contextual history of conversations around insights, it will create a more informed workspace that supports strategic decision-making.

Acceptance Criteria

User comments on a performance metric in the Collaboration Center to discuss sales trends with team members.

Given a user is logged into the RetailRevive platform, When they select a specific performance metric, And they input a comment in the designated commenting section, Then the comment should be visible to all team members with access to that metric.

A user assigns a task based on insights shared in the comments section of a performance metric.

Given a user is viewing the comments on a performance metric, When they select the option to assign a task, And specify a team member and a due date, Then the assigned task should be sent to the specified team member with the details of the originating comment.

Users can annotate a performance metric to provide additional context or insights.

Given a user is logged into the Collaboration Center, When they select the annotate option on a performance metric, And they enter their annotation, Then the annotation should be saved and displayed alongside the performance metric for other users to see.

Users want to view the history of comments and annotations on a performance metric over time.

Given a user accesses the comment and annotation history for a performance metric, When they request the history, Then the system should display a chronological list of all comments and annotations associated with that metric.

A user deletes a comment that they previously added to a performance metric.

Given a user has added a comment to a performance metric, When they opt to delete that comment, Then the comment should be removed and no longer visible to any users accessing that metric.

Integration with Performance Metrics

"As a retail analyst, I want to interact with the performance metrics in the Collaboration Center so that I can provide data-driven insights that align with our operational goals."

Description

The Collaboration Center should seamlessly integrate with existing performance metrics and dashboards, allowing users to interact with data live and provide inputs directly. This requirement ensures that the tools used for collaboration are intrinsically linked to performance data, thereby maintaining relevance in discussions and enhancing data-driven decision making.

Acceptance Criteria

Integration of performance metrics into the Collaboration Center for live data interaction.

Given a user is logged into the Collaboration Center, when they navigate to the performance metrics section, then they should be able to see live data updates corresponding to the selected metrics.

User annotation and task assignment related to specific performance metrics.

Given a user views a performance metric in the Collaboration Center, when they select the annotation option, then they should be able to add a comment and assign a task to another user.

Real-time notifications for team members when comments or tasks are added in the Collaboration Center.

Given a user adds a comment or assigns a task in the Collaboration Center, then all relevant team members should receive a notification in real-time.

Accessing performance metrics from various devices within the Collaboration Center.

Given a user accesses the Collaboration Center from a mobile device or tablet, when they view performance metrics, then the layout should be responsive and maintain usability.

User security permissions related to performance metrics in the Collaboration Center.

Given a user is assigned a specific role, when they try to access performance metrics, then they should only see data allowed by their permission settings.

Exporting performance metrics and comments for external reporting.

Given a user is in the Collaboration Center, when they select the export option for performance metrics and comments, then they should receive a downloadable file in the specified format (CSV/PDF).

Collaborative editing of insights related to performance metrics.

Given multiple users are viewing the same performance metric, when one user edits insights, then all other users should see the changes reflected in real-time without needing to refresh the page.

User Permissions and Roles

"As a system administrator, I want to set user permissions within the Collaboration Center so that I can safeguard sensitive information and ensure appropriate access for team members."

Description

Implementing a permissions and roles management system is essential for the Collaboration Center. This requirement should allow for different access levels based on user roles, ensuring that sensitive information can only be accessed by authorized personnel. This feature enhances security and helps maintain the integrity of the data being discussed and collaborated upon within the workspace.

Acceptance Criteria

Access Levels for Different User Roles in the Collaboration Center

Given a user with a Manager role, when they access the Collaboration Center, then they should have full access to all features including annotating insights, sharing comments, and assigning tasks. Given a user with a Staff role, when they access the Collaboration Center, then they should have limited access, only able to view comments and insights but not assign tasks or annotate. Given a user with an Admin role, when they access the Collaboration Center, then they should have access to manage user roles and permissions.

Audit Trail for User Activities in the Collaboration Center

Given any user activity in the Collaboration Center, when the activity occurs, then it should be logged in an audit trail that captures the user's identity, the action performed, and the timestamp. The audit trail should be accessible only to users with Admin permissions.

Role-specific Notification Settings in the Collaboration Center

Given a user with a specific role in the Collaboration Center, when a task is assigned or commented on, then the user should receive notifications based on their role's notification settings. For example, Managers should receive immediate notifications, while Staff should receive daily summaries.

Implementation of Password Protection for Sensitive Data

Given a user with access privileges, when they attempt to open sensitive documents in the Collaboration Center, then they must enter a password to access those documents. Users without the correct access level receive an appropriate error message.

Customization of User Role Profiles in the Collaboration Center

Given an Admin user, when they create or modify a user role in the Collaboration Center, then they can customize permissions for tasks such as viewing, commenting, annotating, and task assignment. The customizations should be applied successfully without errors.

User Training and Support Accessibility for Collaboration Center Roles

Given a user with a specific role, when they access the training resources provided for the Collaboration Center, then they should see relevant training materials and support resources tailored to their role immediately upon logging in.

Integration with Existing User Management Systems for Role Assignment

Given the existing user management system, when a user is assigned a role in the Collaboration Center, then their permissions must be automatically synchronized with the existing user management system without manual input required.

Notification System

"As a team member, I want to receive notifications for updates in the Collaboration Center so that I am always aware of essential changes and can engage promptly with my colleagues."

Description

A notification system should be established to alert users to new comments, task updates, or changes made in the Collaboration Center. This requirement enhances user engagement and ensures that team members are kept up-to-date on discussions and responsibilities without needing to constantly monitor the workspace. By fostering responsive teamwork, this feature will drive productivity and collaboration.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives a notification when a new comment is added to a task in the Collaboration Center.

Given a user is actively monitoring the Collaboration Center, when a new comment is added to any task, then the user receives a real-time notification alerting them of the new comment.

User receives a notification when a task is updated in the Collaboration Center.

Given a user has tasks assigned in the Collaboration Center, when any task assigned to the user is updated, then the user receives a notification about the task update.

User receives a notification when a task is assigned to them in the Collaboration Center.

Given a user is part of a team working in the Collaboration Center, when a new task is assigned to the user, then the user receives a notification indicating the task assignment.

User receives a summary of notifications related to their activities in the Collaboration Center.

Given a user has multiple notifications, when the user accesses the notification section, then the user sees a consolidated summary of all their recent notifications, including comments, task updates, and assignments.

User can view the timestamp of when notifications were triggered.

Given a user opens a notification, when they check the notification details, then they can see the timestamp of when the notification was triggered for better context.

User can customize their notification settings in the Collaboration Center.

Given a user is in their account settings, when they access notification preferences, then the user can adjust which notifications they wish to receive and set their preferred alert methods.

User receives notifications for comments made on tasks related to their department in the Collaboration Center.

Given a user belongs to a specific department, when comments on any task associated with their department are made, then the user receives notifications about those comments.

Goal Tracking Progress

Introduce a feature to set, monitor, and evaluate performance against predetermined business goals. Retail managers can visualize progress towards sales targets and inventory turnover rates, motivating teams and focusing efforts on achieving strategic objectives.

Requirements

Goal Setting Interface

"As a retail manager, I want to set specific sales and inventory goals so that my team can stay focused and aligned on achieving those objectives."

Description

The Goal Setting Interface allows retail managers to define specific business goals, such as sales targets and inventory turnover rates, within the RetailRevive platform. This feature will enable users to set measurable and time-bound objectives, facilitating better performance tracking. By providing an intuitive and user-friendly interface, managers can easily input goals and adjust them as needed, ensuring alignment with overall business strategies. The implementation of this requirement is crucial for empowering retailers to adopt a proactive approach towards their performance metrics, ultimately leading to more organized efforts in achieving targets.

Acceptance Criteria

Retail managers access the Goal Setting Interface to define a new sales target for the upcoming quarter, ensuring it aligns with broader business objectives.

Given that a retail manager is logged into the RetailRevive platform, when they navigate to the Goal Setting Interface and input a new sales target, then the system should save this target and display it in the list of active goals with the correct details.

A retail manager revisits the Goal Setting Interface to view and analyze the performance against previously set inventory turnover rate goals to make data-driven adjustments.

Given that a retail manager is using the Goal Setting Interface, when they select a past inventory turnover goal, then they should see the current performance metrics displayed visually and the completion percentage calculated accurately.

The retail manager receives notifications from the platform to remind them of goal deadlines as they approach, ensuring timely performance evaluations and adjustments.

Given that a goal is nearing its deadline, when the set time frame reaches 10 days remaining, then the system should automatically send a notification to the retail manager's dashboard and registered email address about the impending deadline.

The manager wants to edit a previously set sales target due to changes in market conditions, requiring them to adjust the goal in the system.

Given that a retail manager is viewing the list of active goals, when they select a sales target to edit, then they should be able to modify the target details and save the changes successfully, with the updated goal reflecting in their active goals list.

The retail manager wants to create multiple goals for different product categories to better track performance and strategy effectiveness across segments.

Given that a retail manager is on the Goal Setting Interface, when they input separate goals for multiple product categories, then the system should allow the creation of these distinct goals and categorize them correctly in the system.

At the end of a defined period, the retail manager wants to evaluate the completion status of their set goals to determine team performance and areas for improvement.

Given that the defined period for a goal has ended, when the retail manager accesses the Goal Setting Interface, then they should see a summary of completed and incomplete goals along with insights and recommendations for future objectives.

Progress Visualization Dashboard

"As a retail manager, I want to see a visual representation of our sales and inventory goals progress, so that I can quickly assess our performance and course-correct when necessary."

Description

The Progress Visualization Dashboard is designed to provide retail managers with a clear and dynamic overview of their performance against the set goals. This feature will utilize visual aids like graphs, charts, and KPI indicators to display real-time progress tracking. The dashboard simplifies complex data into easily digestible formats, allowing managers to quickly assess team performance and make informed decisions. Incorporating this requirement will significantly enhance the users' ability to monitor progress, enabling timely interventions when targets are not being met, thus improving operational efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria

Retail manager accesses the Progress Visualization Dashboard to review current performance metrics against the set sales targets.

Given the retail manager is logged into the RetailRevive platform, when they navigate to the Progress Visualization Dashboard, then the dashboard should display updated performance metrics including sales targets, actual sales, and the percentage of target achieved within the last month.

A retail manager observes KPIs related to inventory turnover rates through the dashboard visualization.

Given the retail manager is viewing the Progress Visualization Dashboard, when they select the 'Inventory Turnover Rate' KPI, then the dashboard must show a graphical representation of turnover rates for the past 30 days, along with a comparison against the previous month’s data.

The retail manager receives alerts when sales performance metrics fall below a predetermined threshold.

Given the retail manager has set a minimum sales target within the dashboard settings, when the actual sales metrics drop below this threshold, then the dashboard should trigger an alert notification to the manager’s account and via email.

The user exports progress data from the Progress Visualization Dashboard for an external report.

Given the retail manager is on the Progress Visualization Dashboard, when they select the 'Export Data' option, then the system should allow the manager to download a CSV file containing the last three months of performance data, including sales and inventory metrics.

The manager customizes the dashboard to display specific metrics relevant to their goals.

Given the retail manager is logged into their account, when they access the dashboard settings, then they should be able to add, remove, or rearrange at least five different metrics displayed on the dashboard according to their strategic needs.

The retail manager compares current performance metrics with preset benchmarks directly on the dashboard.

Given the retail manager has benchmark performance data available, when they view the Progress Visualization Dashboard, then there should be a side-by-side comparison of current metrics against these benchmarks, clearly indicating any areas that require attention.

Goal Evaluation Reports

"As a retail manager, I want to receive detailed reports on our goal performance so that I can understand what’s working and what needs improvement in our strategies."

Description

Goal Evaluation Reports will generate insights into the performance outcomes against the predetermined goals. By analyzing various performance metrics, these reports highlight areas of success and opportunities for improvement. Users will benefit from automated reporting that presents data in a structured format, allowing for easy identification of trends and anomalies. This requirement is essential for fostering a data-driven culture within RetailRevive users, as it underscores accountability and encourages continuous improvement by providing detailed feedback on goal attainment.

Acceptance Criteria

Retail manager accesses the Goal Evaluation Reports section to review the performance outcomes for the current sales period.

Given the user is logged into RetailRevive, when they navigate to the Goal Evaluation Reports section, then they should see a report that includes sales totals, comparison to set targets, and graphical representation of progress.

A retail manager receives a notification about the completion of the automated report for the previous quarter.

Given the reporting process is completed, when the report is generated, then the system should send an automatic email notification to the retail manager with a link to access the report PDF.

The retail manager analyzes the Goal Evaluation Reports to identify trends over multiple periods.

Given the user is viewing the Goal Evaluation Reports, when they select different time frames (weekly, monthly, quarterly), then the report should update to reflect the selected period's performance metrics and trends accurately.

User interacts with the report to delve into specific areas of performance and improvement.

Given the user is on the Goal Evaluation Reports page, when they click on a specific metric (like inventory turnover), then they should see detailed insights and suggestions for improvement related to that metric.

The retail manager uses the report for team assessments and strategy formulation in a meeting.

Given the Goal Evaluation Reports are saved in a structured format, when the user exports the report, then they should be able to download it in PDF and CSV formats without any data loss or formatting issues.

Two users compare their performance evaluations using the Goal Evaluation Reports feature.

Given multiple users are analyzing their respective reports, when they select the comparison option, then the system should display a side-by-side comparison of key metrics and achievements.

Team Motivation Alerts

"As a retail team member, I want to receive alerts about our progress toward goals, so that I can stay motivated and know how I contribute to the team's success."

Description

The Team Motivation Alerts feature will provide timely notifications and reminders to retail teams regarding their progress towards goals. These alerts can be customized and triggered based on specified criteria, such as when performance milestones are achieved or when a target is at risk. By integrating motivational touchpoints, this capability aims to enhance team engagement and focus, fostering a competitive spirit. Implementing this requirement will positively affect team performance by ensuring that individuals feel recognized for their contributions and remain motivated to reach collective objectives.

Acceptance Criteria

Retail team members receive alerts to notify them of reaching sales milestones during a busy seasonal sale period, encouraging them to maintain high performance levels and motivating them to reach the next target.

Given the sales target is set, When the sales milestone is reached by the team, Then the alert notification is sent to all team members' devices with motivational messaging.

A retail manager sets up customizable alerts for their team to be notified when they are at risk of falling behind on inventory turnover rates, enabling timely intervention or support to enhance team performance.

Given the inventory turnover threshold is defined, When the turnover rate falls below the specified threshold, Then an alert is triggered and sent to the retail manager and relevant team members.

In the context of end-of-month performance reviews, team members receive alerts congratulating them for achieving their sales objectives, fostering a culture of recognition and accomplishment.

Given the end of the month is approaching, When a team member achieves or exceeds their sales goal, Then a congratulatory alert is sent to the team member and the entire team to promote a positive work environment.

During a mid-quarter evaluation, the retail manager reviews team performance and receives an alert when significant discrepancies from the sales goals arise, prompting a team meeting for strategy adjustments.

Given the mid-quarter check-in is scheduled, When performance data indicates a significant drop in sales figures compared to the goal, Then an alert is generated for the retail manager to schedule a strategy meeting with the team.

A newly hired employee is integrated into the team and receives alerts to motivate them towards achieving their initial sales milestone within their first month, helping them acclimatize to the company goals.

Given the new hire has started their first month, When they achieve their first sales milestone, Then an alert is triggered to congratulate them and remind them of the next goal, promoting engagement from the start.

During a significant promotional event, team members receive alerts whenever a sales target is reached in real-time, enhancing excitement on the sales floor and encouraging competition.

Given a promotional event is in progress, When a sales target is reached, Then an immediate alert is sent to all team members on the sales floor detailing the success and encouraging further sales efforts.

Goal Adjustment Functionality

"As a retail manager, I want to adjust our business goals when necessary, so that we can remain agile and responsive to changes in the market."

Description

The Goal Adjustment Functionality allows retail managers to modify existing goals based on changing market conditions or business priorities. This feature will enable users to reassess targets in real-time and adjust them accordingly without losing historical data. With this requirement, management can maintain flexibility in their operations, ensuring that goals remain realistic and attainable. The ability to adjust goals dynamically is critical for retailers aiming to keep pace with an ever-evolving market and strategically align their teams for optimal performance.

Acceptance Criteria

Retail managers need to adjust sales targets for the upcoming quarter due to an unexpected drop in market demand. They access the Goal Adjustment Functionality within RetailRevive to modify existing goals seamlessly.

Given a retail manager is using the Goal Adjustment Functionality, when they input a new sales target and confirm the adjustment, then the new target should be saved and reflected in the system without losing previous target data.

A retail manager identifies that the inventory turnover rate goal needs to be increased after a successful promotion. They navigate to the Goal Adjustment Functionality to update the goal accordingly.

Given the goal for inventory turnover rate is currently set, when the retail manager adjusts the goal to a higher rate and submits it, then the system should reflect the updated goal and display a notification confirming the change.

Middle of the fiscal year, a retail manager notices a trend indicating an increase in sales. They want to adjust the existing sales goal to capitalize on this trend using the Goal Adjustment Functionality.

Given that a real-time sales trend analysis is available, when the retail manager reviews the current sales metrics and modifies the goal based on the analysis, then the system should allow the manager to view historical adjustments made to the sales goal after submission.

A retail manager needs to respond to a supplier disruption impacting inventory. They decide to adjust the inventory turnover goal downwards using the Goal Adjustment Functionality.

Given an existing inventory turnover goal that needs to be lowered, when the retail manager enters a new, reduced goal and submits the change, then the system should record this adjustment along with the reason for change and maintain an audit log.

At the end of a quarter, a retail manager reviews goals set at the start of the period and needs the ability to modify them for the next quarter through the Goal Adjustment Functionality.

Given that the quarter has ended and new goals need to be set, when the retail manager accesses the historical goals, modifies them and submits the new goals, then the system should save all current and previous goals and reflect the changes in the goal overview dashboard.

Historical Performance Comparison

Allow retail managers to compare current data against historical performance metrics over customizable timeframes. This feature provides insights into growth patterns, seasonality, and operational efficiency, equipping managers with the context needed to make strategic decisions and plan for future success.

Requirements

Customizable Timeframe Selection

"As a retail manager, I want to customize the timeframe for historical performance comparisons so that I can better analyze specific business periods and trends relevant to my store operations."

Description

This requirement allows retail managers to select and customize the timeframes for comparing current data against historical performance metrics. By implementing this feature, users can define specific periods (days, weeks, months, or years) that are relevant to their analysis, enabling granular insights into business trends. It plays a crucial role in the functionality of the Historical Performance Comparison feature by tailoring the analysis to specific promotional activities, seasonal changes, or operational adjustments, ultimately empowering managers to make informed decisions based on relevant data.

Acceptance Criteria

Retail manager wants to compare sales data from the last quarter to the same quarter from the previous year to assess growth performance.

Given a retail manager is on the Historical Performance Comparison page, When they select the last quarter as the current timeframe and the same quarter from the previous year as the historical timeframe, Then the system should display a comprehensive comparison of sales data between both selected timeframes.

Retail manager needs to analyze promotional campaign performance by comparing data from the two weeks during the campaign against the previous two weeks.

Given a retail manager is on the Historical Performance Comparison page, When they choose a custom timeframe of two weeks during a promotional campaign and the two weeks prior, Then the system should provide detailed metrics on sales, customer engagement, and inventory levels for both timeframes.

Retail manager wants to view seasonal trends by comparing monthly data from the summer season to winter season metrics.

Given a retail manager is on the Historical Performance Comparison page, When they set a custom timeframe to the entire summer season of the current year and the entire winter season of the previous year, Then the system should output insights regarding sales trends, product performance, and customer preferences for both summers and winters.

Retail manager needs to assess operational efficiency by comparing weekly data between two different months.

Given a retail manager is on the Historical Performance Comparison page, When they select a custom timeframe of the first two weeks of one month and the first two weeks of another month, Then the system should generate a report highlighting differences in operational metrics such as staffing levels, customer service ratings, and order fulfillment times.

Retail manager wishes to review overall performance for the entire past year compared to the previous year to make adjustments for next year’s strategy.

Given a retail manager is on the Historical Performance Comparison page, When they select the whole previous year as the current timeframe and the year prior as the historical timeframe, Then the system should compile a comprehensive overview of key performance indicators including total sales, customer growth, and average transaction value for both years.

Retail manager wants to adjust the comparison to exclude certain dates such as holidays from the analysis to have a clearer view of regular sales performance.

Given a retail manager is on the Historical Performance Comparison page, When they customize the timeframe to exclude specified holidays and select relevant periods, Then the system should reflect the adjusted data accurately, noting the exclusions in the comparative report.

Retail manager needs to utilize predefined timeframes such as 'Last Month' or 'Last Year' for a quick analysis of performance metrics.

Given a retail manager is on the Historical Performance Comparison page, When they select a predefined timeframe option of 'Last Month', Then the system should immediately display relevant sales and performance metrics as compared to the month prior.

Real-time Data Integration

"As a retail manager, I want to see real-time data integrated into the historical performance comparison so that I can make quicker, data-driven decisions based on the most current performance metrics."

Description

This requirement entails integrating real-time data with historical performance metrics to provide an accurate and up-to-date comparison. Ensuring that the platform can access and incorporate live inventory and sales data allows managers to see current performance in context with historical data. This functionality enhances the insights provided through the Historical Performance Comparison feature, by allowing for more immediate responses to market changes and improving the decision-making process based on the most current information available.

Acceptance Criteria

Retail manager wants to compare current sales data with sales data from the same period last year to assess growth trends and seasonal performance.

Given the retail manager accesses the Historical Performance Comparison feature, when they select the current month and the same month from last year, then the system should display a side-by-side comparison of sales data for both periods, highlighting percentage growth or decline.

A retail manager needs to examine the real-time inventory levels against historical inventory metrics during a seasonal sale event to adjust marketing strategies.

Given the retail manager is reviewing the Historical Performance Comparison tool, when they input the current inventory levels and select the past seasonal averages, then the system must provide visual indicators of stock discrepancies and recommendations based on historical data trends.

The retail team is analyzing the impact of recent promotions on sales performance by comparing data over the previous quarter and the current quarter.

Given the retail team is using the Historical Performance Comparison feature, when they choose the last quarter's data and the current quarter's data for comparison, then the system should generate a report that includes metrics such as total sales, average transaction value, and conversion rates, with graphical representations.

A retail manager aims to quickly check the effect of a product price change on sales in real-time versus the previous month.

Given the retail manager navigates to the Historical Performance Comparison feature, when they select the product in question and specify the current month and previous month, then the system should accurately present both sets of sales data along with the price changes made, and indicate any increases or decreases in sales volume related to the pricing adjustments.

A user wants to download a performance report that compares the real-time sales metrics against previous years for audit purposes.

Given the retail manager accesses the Historical Performance Comparison tool, when they apply filters for the desired timeframes and click on 'Download Report', then the system should generate a CSV file containing all relevant data comparisons, including sales figures, inventory levels, and trend analysis, ensuring the format is suitable for external sharing.

The marketing department seeks to visualize customer engagement over the last three months against the previous year to plan future campaigns effectively.

Given the marketing team is reviewing customer engagement data within the Historical Performance Comparison feature, when they select the last three months and corresponding months from the previous year for comparison, then the system should display visual analytics, including customer footfall, transaction counts, and other engagement metrics, enabling strategic campaign decisions.

Growth Patterns Visualization

"As a retail manager, I want to visualize growth patterns from historical data so that I can easily identify trends and make strategic plans based on those insights."

Description

This requirement focuses on the need to visualize growth patterns derived from historical performance data. It involves implementing graphical representations, such as charts and graphs, that depict trends over the selected timeframes. A strong visualization aspect will help managers quickly identify growth areas, seasonal trends, and potential market shifts. This requirement is essential for providing a clear understanding of data at a glance, facilitating strategic planning and operational adjustments based on visual insights.

Acceptance Criteria

Visualizing Growth Patterns Over Quarter-End Reports

Given a retailer has selected the past four quarters for comparison, when they view the growth pattern visualization, then the system should display line graphs for each quarter showing revenue trends with labels indicating growth percentages.

Visualizing Seasonal Sales Trends

Given a retailer is analyzing sales data for a holiday season, when they choose the 'Holiday Season' timeframe, then the system should generate a bar chart illustrating sales figures over the previous three years for that period, with clear seasonal indicators.

Comparing Current Month Performance Against Historical Data

Given a retailer is reviewing the current month's sales performance, when they access the growth pattern visualization, then the system should overlay the current month's data on the historical trend line for the past two years to show variances.

Identifying Market Shifts Through Visual Insights

Given a retailer is using the growth pattern visualization, when significant deviations in sales trends occur, then the visualization should highlight these shifts in red for immediate attention.

Exporting Growth Pattern Data for Reporting

Given a retailer has completed analyzing growth patterns, when they select the export option, then the data should be downloadable in Excel format with fully labeled charts and graphs that reflect the visualization.

Customizing Timeframe for Growth Analysis

Given a retailer wants to analyze growth patterns for a custom timeframe, when they enter specific start and end dates, then the system should generate an accurate graph displaying the corresponding sales trends for that period.

User Access to Growth Pattern Features

Given a retailer's personnel information has been updated, when a user logs in, then they should have appropriate access rights to view and manipulate the growth pattern visualization features based on their role.

Seasonality Insights Feature

"As a retail manager, I want to analyze seasonality insights from historical performance data so that I can prepare better for peak sales seasons and optimize inventory levels accordingly."

Description

This requirement includes developing a feature that highlights seasonality trends based on historical performance metrics through analytical tools. Incorporating seasonal insights will enable managers to understand peak sales periods and inventory needs, enhancing operational preparedness and marketing strategies. By pinpointing seasonal fluctuations, retailers can adjust pricing, promotions, and stock levels accordingly, ultimately improving sales and customer satisfaction throughout the year.

Acceptance Criteria

Retail manager accesses the Seasonality Insights Feature to analyze the sales data from the past three years during the holiday season to prepare inventory for the upcoming holiday sales.

Given the manager is logged into RetailRevive, when they navigate to the Seasonality Insights Feature and select the holiday season for the last three years, then the system should display a detailed comparison of sales data including total sales, units sold, and inventory levels for each year.

The retail manager modifies the time frame in the Seasonality Insights Feature to assess performance during the back-to-school sales period over the last two years.

Given the manager is on the Seasonality Insights page, when they change the time frame to the back-to-school season for the previous two years, then the system should update the displayed metrics accurately reflecting the chosen period without any data discrepancies.

A retail manager uses the historical performance comparison to identify trends and adjust future marketing strategies based on past performance during key sales periods.

Given historical data has been analyzed, when the manager views the seasonality insights for the selected time frame, then the insights should highlight periods of increased sales alongside recommended marketing strategies tailored to those periods, enabling informed decision-making for future promotions.

The retail manager checks the predictive analytics provided by the Seasonality Insights Feature before placing bulk orders for stock ahead of a predicted sales spike during Black Friday.

Given the predictive analytics have been generated based on historical data, when the manager reviews these insights, then they should see projections for sales increases, suggested inventory levels, and pricing strategies aligned to maximize profit and minimize stock-outs during that period.

The retail manager wants to generate a report of seasonal performance insights to present at a strategic meeting, highlighting key learning for adapting future sales tactics.

Given the report generation functionality is available, when the manager selects parameters for the seasonal insights report and clicks 'Generate', then the system should produce a comprehensive report that includes graphs, insights, and actionable recommendations, ready for export or printing.

The retail manager reviews feedback on the Seasonality Insights Feature from users to identify potential improvements and necessary updates.

Given the feedback collection system is active, when the manager accesses the user feedback section, then they should see a list of user suggestions and satisfaction ratings specific to the Seasonality Insights Feature, including any recurring issues or enhancement requests.

Operational Efficiency Metrics

"As a retail manager, I want to assess operational efficiency metrics in conjunction with historical performance so that I can identify areas for operational improvement and enhance overall business performance."

Description

This requirement aims to incorporate metrics that provide insights into operational efficiency alongside historical performance data. By measuring key performance indicators (KPIs) such as order fulfillment times, lead times, and customer satisfaction scores, managers can assess the effectiveness of their operations over time. Integrating these metrics enriches the historical performance analysis, helping to uncover areas for improvement and driving operational excellence.

Acceptance Criteria

Retail manager wants to compare current order fulfillment times with historical performance metrics from the last year to assess improvements in operational efficiency.

Given that the retail manager selects the 'Operational Efficiency Metrics' section, when they choose a custom timeframe of the last year and look at the order fulfillment metrics, then the system displays a comparison graph highlighting the differences in order fulfillment times.

A store manager is analyzing lead times during the peak season against previous years to understand changes in supply chain efficiency.

Given that the store manager accesses the historical performance comparison tool, when they filter lead times for the peak season from previous years, then the system presents a side-by-side comparison of lead times that includes numeric values and graphical representations.

A retail manager needs to check the customer satisfaction scores over the last 6 months to make adjustments to customer service strategies.

Given that the retail manager successfully accesses the customer satisfaction metrics, when they select a 6-month custom timeframe, then the system returns an average customer satisfaction score for the selected period alongside historical averages for context.

The retail manager wants to view the historical performance data for operational efficiency metrics for strategic planning for the upcoming year.

Given that the retail manager is on the 'Historical Performance Comparison' page, when they select the operational efficiency metrics and specify the upcoming fiscal year, then the system displays projections based on historical data along with recommended adjustments.

A store manager is evaluating the impact of a recent policy change on operational efficiency by comparing metrics from before and after the change.

Given that the store manager has access to the operational metrics dashboard, when they specify a custom date range that includes periods before and after the policy change, then the system provides a detailed report showing changes in order fulfillment times, lead times, and customer satisfaction scores with visual indicators of performance.

The retail manager needs to present the historical efficiency metrics in a team meeting to discuss potential operational improvements.

Given that the retail manager is logged into the system, when they select the option to generate a report for the team meeting, then the system creates a comprehensive report with charts and graphs depicting historical operational efficiency metrics, including key KPIs over the designated timeframe.

Integrated Reporting

Facilitate the generation of comprehensive reports directly from the dashboard, compiling metrics and insights into easily shareable formats. The reporting feature simplifies data presentation for stakeholders, saving time and ensuring that key insights are communicated effectively across the organization.

Requirements

Customizable Report Templates

"As a retailer, I want to customize my report templates so that I can present the most relevant data to various stakeholders in a clear and engaging manner."

Description

This requirement entails the development of customizable report templates that users can modify to fit their specific needs. Users should be able to select from a variety of template designs, add or remove data fields, and customize layout options to create reports that reflect their preferences. This feature will enhance the reporting process by allowing retailers to tailor reports for different stakeholders, ensuring that relevant information is highlighted and presented in a user-friendly manner. Providing this level of customization will enhance user satisfaction and engagement with the platform.

Acceptance Criteria

User creates a customizable report template for sales analysis to share with stakeholders.

Given the user is logged into RetailRevive, when they navigate to the reporting section and select 'Create New Template', then they should be able to choose from at least 5 pre-defined template designs and customize at least 3 data fields before saving the template.

User modifies an existing report template to include additional metrics relevant to inventory management.

Given the user has an existing report template, when they access the template editor, then they should be able to add at least 2 additional data fields and rearrange the layout before saving the changes.

User shares a customized report template with different team members.

Given the user has created a customized report template, when they select the 'Share' option, then they should be able to successfully share the template via email or generate a shareable link for team members, with confirmation of sharing shown on the interface.

User tests the responsiveness of the report templates on various devices.

Given the user views a customized report template on a mobile device and a tablet, then the report layout should adjust appropriately, ensuring all data fields remain visible and correctly aligned without losing any information.

User deletes an unused report template to declutter their dashboard.

Given the user is viewing their list of report templates, when they select the 'Delete' option on a template, then the template should be permanently removed from the list with a confirmation message displayed.

User previews a customized report template before finalizing it.

Given the user has customized a report template, when they click on the 'Preview' button, then they should see a full view of the report as it would appear when generated, allowing them to confirm the layout and data included.

Automated Report Scheduling

"As a retailer, I want to schedule automated report generation so that I can save time and ensure my team receives timely insights without needing to manually create reports each time."

Description

This requirement focuses on implementing an automated report scheduling feature that allows users to set schedules for generating and distributing reports without manual intervention. Users should be able to choose specific dates, times, and frequency (daily, weekly, monthly) for reports to be generated and sent out automatically. This feature will save users time, reduce manual work, and ensure that stakeholders receive regular updates without delay, fostering better decision-making and communication within the organization.

Acceptance Criteria

User wants to set up a weekly report on sales performance to be sent every Monday morning.

Given the user is logged into the RetailRevive platform, when they navigate to the report scheduling section, then they should be able to select 'Sales Performance' from the report types, set the schedule to 'Weekly', choose 'Monday' as the day, and select a time for the report to be sent.

User decides to modify an existing report schedule from bi-weekly to monthly distribution.

Given a user has an existing report scheduled bi-weekly, when they access the report scheduling interface, then they should see an option to edit the frequency, change it to 'Monthly', and save the changes without errors.

User wishes to stop receiving automated reports for a specific metric that is no longer needed by the team.

Given the user is in the report scheduling dashboard, when they select the option to delete the 'Inventory Levels' report schedule, then the system should remove the schedule and confirm the cancellation with a success message.

User wants to set multiple reports to be generated and sent on different days and times.

Given the user is in the report scheduling section, when they select multiple reports including 'Sales Performance' and 'Customer Engagement', then they should be able to set different schedules for each without conflicts, and all schedules should be saved successfully.

User needs confirmation that scheduled reports have been sent successfully to stakeholders.

Given reports have been generated and scheduled, when the scheduled time arrives, then an email notification should be sent to the specified stakeholders with the report attached, and the user should receive a confirmation on the dashboard.

User requires reports to be available in various formats for compatibility with different stakeholders.

Given the user is setting up a new report schedule, when they choose the format options, then they should be able to select multiple formats such as PDF and Excel for each report being scheduled.

Real-Time Dashboard Integration

"As a retailer, I want my reports to integrate real-time data so that I can make informed decisions based on the most current performance metrics available."

Description

This requirement outlines the integration of real-time data visualization into the reporting feature, where users can view live metrics and data trends directly within their reports. This functionality will allow users to link dynamic data sources to reports, enabling them to visualize changes in performance metrics as they occur. The integration will enhance the insights provided in reports and allow users to make informed decisions based on the most current information available, ultimately improving operational efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the real-time dashboard from the reporting feature during a weekly sales review meeting to evaluate current inventory levels and sales performance.

Given the user is logged in to the RetailRevive platform, when they navigate to the reporting feature, then they should be able to view live metrics such as current inventory levels, sales data, and other relevant KPIs displayed in real-time on the dashboard.

A user generates a report that includes real-time data visualizations to present to stakeholders during a quarterly business review.

Given the user selects the option to include real-time data visualizations in their report, when the report is generated, then it must include dynamic graphs and charts that update automatically to reflect the latest data.

A retail manager wants to identify trends over the past month by accessing the integrated reporting feature on the RetailRevive dashboard.

Given the retail manager selects a time range of the past month, when they access the integrated reporting feature, then they should see trends in sales performance and inventory changes displayed in visual formats, such as line graphs or bar charts, that are updated automatically.

A user attempts to share a report containing real-time data visualizations with a colleague via email.

Given the user has generated the report with real-time data visualizations, when they choose to share the report via email, then the recipient should receive a correctly formatted email with links or attachments that allow them to view the live data as presented in the report.

A business analyst performs a presentation using the integrated reporting feature to show live demonstration of inventory trends during a sales strategy meeting.

Given the business analyst is presenting live data from the reporting feature, when they point to significant metrics on the dashboard, then the data should accurately reflect the current state without lag or discrepancies, and be easily interpretable by the audience.

A user works late to manually update a report and is concerned about the accuracy of their data before the morning meeting.

Given the user is in the reporting feature, when they enable real-time data integration, then all metrics and visualizations should refresh automatically without requiring manual inputs, ensuring they are based on the most current information available.

Mobile-Friendly Report Access

"As a retailer, I want to access my reports on mobile devices so that I can review performance metrics and insights while I am away from my desk."

Description

This requirement centers around ensuring that generated reports are mobile-friendly, allowing users to view and interact with their reports seamlessly across different devices, including smartphones and tablets. Users should be able to access reports from their devices without sacrificing usability or aesthetics, ensuring a streamlined experience whether in-store or on the go. Enhancing mobile access for reports will empower users to stay informed and engaged with their retail operations anytime, anywhere.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses a generated report on their smartphone while in a retail environment, aiming to check stock levels and sales data.

Given the user has logged into the RetailRevive app on their smartphone, when they navigate to the reporting section and select a report, then the report should display correctly formatted and easily readable on the mobile screen without horizontal scrolling.

A manager reviews the generated sales report on a tablet during a meeting with the sales team, wanting to share insights in real-time.

Given the user accesses a report on a tablet device, when the report is opened, then all interactive elements (charts, filters, etc.) should be fully functional and responsive to touch input.

A user receives a notification about a new report generated from the dashboard and attempts to view it on various devices (smartphone, tablet, laptop).

Given the user has received a notification for a new report, when the user opens the report on any device, then the layout should adapt to the screen size, maintaining readability and usability across all devices.

A stakeholder reviews a performance report while commuting and needs to share insights via email with other team members.

Given the user is viewing a performance report on a mobile device, when they select the share option, then the report should be exportable in a mobile-friendly format (PDF/URL) directly to an email client.

A user is in the store and wants to compare the last month's performance report with this month's using their smartphone.

Given the user opens the reports section on their smartphone, when they select two different reports for comparison, then the system should allow side-by-side viewing while maintaining a clear and organized layout.

A user accesses a report to check seasonal sales data from their smartphone during a customer service interaction.

Given the user taps on the report link from their mobile dashboard, when the report loads, then there should be no significant delays (loading time should be under 3 seconds) for viewing data.

Collaboration Tools for Reports

"As a retailer, I want to share reports with my team and collaborate on insights so that we can collectively analyze data and make informed decisions more efficiently."

Description

This requirement involves incorporating collaboration tools within the reporting feature, allowing users to share reports with team members, add comments, and discuss metrics directly within the platform. Users should be able to invite colleagues to collaborate on reports in real-time, enabling them to work together on analysis and decision-making. This feature will enhance communication and teamwork among users and streamline the process of gathering insights and making data-driven decisions.

Acceptance Criteria

User invites a colleague to collaborate on a report.

Given the user is on the reporting dashboard, when they click the 'Invite Collaborator' button and enter the colleague's email address, then the invited colleague receives an email notification to join the report.

User adds comments to a report for collaborative discussion.

Given the user has opened a report, when they add a comment in the comment section and click 'Post', then the comment should be visible to all collaborators on the report in real-time.

User shares a report with stakeholders through the internal sharing feature.

Given the user has finalized a report, when they click on the 'Share' button and select team members from the list, then all selected team members should receive access to the report and be able to view it immediately.

User edits a collaborative report in real-time with a colleague.

Given the user is collaborating on a report with a colleague, when both users make changes to the report simultaneously, then all changes should be updated in real-time without delay for all users.

User receives notifications for comments made by collaborators on a report.

Given the user is collaborating on a report, when any collaborator adds a comment, then the user should receive a notification within the platform and via email for each new comment.

User reviews the revision history of a report to track changes.

Given the user is on the report page, when they click on 'View Revision History', then they should see a chronological list of changes made by all collaborators with timestamps indicating when each change was made.

Smart Reorder Suggestions

Leverage advanced algorithms to provide users with actionable recommendations on when and how much stock to reorder based on real-time sales velocity and historical data. This ensures that Inventory Analysts never miss critical stock replenishment opportunities, decreasing the likelihood of stock-outs and maintaining optimal inventory levels.

Requirements

Real-time Sales Data Integration

"As an Inventory Analyst, I want to receive real-time updates on sales data so that I can make informed reorder decisions that prevent stock-outs and keep popular items available for customers."

Description

The real-time sales data integration requirement focuses on the platform's ability to interface seamlessly with point-of-sale systems to collect accurate sales information as it occurs. This integration is critical because it allows the Smart Reorder Suggestions feature to generate timely and relevant recommendations for stock replenishment based on the most current sales velocity. By having access to real-time data, retailers can react immediately to purchasing patterns, ensuring they are never caught short on popular items. Additionally, it enhances the overall reliability of inventory management strategies, minimizes stock-outs, and optimizes customer satisfaction through better availability of products.

Acceptance Criteria

Integration of Real-time Sales Data with POS Systems

Given the RetailRevive platform is connected to a POS system, when a sale occurs, then the real-time sales data must be accurately captured and reflected in the inventory management module within 5 seconds of the transaction.

Actionable Smart Reorder Suggestions

Given that real-time sales data is integrated, when the inventory level falls below the predefined threshold, then the Smart Reorder Suggestions feature should indicate the product, recommended reorder quantity, and urgency of restock within the user's dashboard.

Reporting of Sales Velocity Changes

Given that sales data is updated in real-time, when the sales velocity of a particular product changes significantly, then the system should automatically alert inventory analysts to reassess the stock levels for that product.

Historical Data Comparison

Given historical sales data is available, when the current sales velocity is compared against the historical data, then the Smart Reorder Suggestions should provide a trend analysis indicating stock needs based on past performance.

User Notification System for Reorders

Given that reorder suggestions are generated, when an inventory analyst logs into the RetailRevive platform, then they must receive a notification summarizing all critical reorder suggestions for the day.

Error Handling for Data Integration

Given that a connection to the POS system is established, when there is a failure in data transmission, then the system should log the error, notify the user, and provide steps to troubleshoot the issue.

Performance Metrics Dashboard

Given real-time data integration is in place, when the inventory management module is accessed, then the dashboard must display key performance indicators (KPIs) related to inventory turnover and stock availability in real-time.

Historical Sales Analytics

"As an Inventory Analyst, I want to analyze historical sales data so that I can forecast stock requirements accurately and optimize my reorder strategies for seasonal trends."

Description

This requirement pertains to the capability of the system to analyze historical sales data over defined periods to identify trends and forecast future stock needs accurately. The Smart Reorder Suggestions will heavily rely on the analytics derived from past sales patterns, allowing for predictive recommendations that align with seasonal trends and purchasing habits. Implementing this functionality will provide retailers with the insights needed to proactively manage inventory levels, ensuring that they can purchase enough stock ahead of peak sales periods while minimizing the risk of overstocking on less popular items. This feature enhances the overall profitability and turnover rates of inventory by enabling data-driven stocking decisions.

Acceptance Criteria

User reviews historical sales data to determine seasonal demand trends for inventory management.

Given the user has accessed the Historical Sales Analytics feature, when they select a specific time period for analysis, then the system should display the sales data trends for that period with accurate statistical information and graphics.

Inventory Analysts receive smart reorder suggestions based on analyzed historical sales data.

Given the Inventory Analyst has reviewed the historical sales trends, when they access the Smart Reorder Suggestions feature, then the system should generate at least three actionable recommendations for stock replenishment that align with the identified trends.

User utilizes the predictive analytics from historical data to make informed stocking decisions ahead of a peak sales period.

Given the user has reviewed the forecasted stock needs based on historical sales analytics, when they finalize their stock order, then the user should have stocked a minimum of 95% of the recommended reorder quantities without exceeding a predetermined maximum inventory level.

The system alerts users when stock levels are predicted to reach below optimal thresholds based on historical sales patterns.

Given the system has analyzed current inventory levels against historical sales velocity, when the stock level is predicted to drop below the optimal threshold, then the system should send an automated alert to the Inventory Analyst.

User evaluates the accuracy of the reorder suggestions post-implementation.

Given that stock has been reordered based on recent Smart Reorder Suggestions, when the user reviews sales performance during the sales period, then the reordered items should show a minimum sales increase of 10% compared to the previous similar period where no recommendations were applied.

The system provides an interactive dashboard presenting historical sales analytics.

Given the user accesses the dashboard, when they interact with various filters for time frames and product categories, then the dashboard should dynamically update to reflect the user's selections and accurately represent the underlying data visually.

User-Friendly Dashboard for Recommendations

"As an Inventory Analyst, I want a user-friendly dashboard that provides clear reorder recommendations and sales data visualizations so that I can quickly make informed decisions about inventory management."

Description

This requirement entails the development of an intuitive user dashboard that displays actionable reorder suggestions alongside visual data representations of sales velocity and inventory levels. The dashboard should empower Inventory Analysts to easily understand when orders need to be placed and how much stock should be reordered, all at a glance. This user-friendly interface is crucial for efficient decision-making, especially in fast-paced retail environments where timing is essential. Integrating this feature will enhance user experience, reduce the time spent on inventory management, and ensure that vital stock decisions can be made effectively and swiftly, directly impacting sales performance and customer satisfaction without overwhelming users with complexity.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the Smart Reorder Suggestions dashboard after logging into RetailRevive to monitor inventory levels and receive reorder recommendations.

Given the user is on the dashboard, when they click on the 'Reorder Suggestions' tab, then they should see a list of recommended products to reorder along with suggested quantities and reorder timelines, displaying data sourced from real-time sales velocity and historical performance.

User in the RetailRevive dashboard wants to filter reorder suggestions based on specific product categories to focus their inventory management efforts.

Given the user selects a product category filter, when they apply the filter, then the dashboard should update to display only reorder suggestions relevant to the selected category, ensuring filtered results are accurate and timely.

User views historical data on sales velocity and inventory levels to understand trends before making stock replenishment decisions.

Given the user accesses the 'Sales Velocity Chart' section on the dashboard, when they hover over a data point, then they should see a tooltip with detailed sales velocity information for that specific period, allowing for informed decision-making based on historical sales performance.

Inventory Analyst needs to quickly take action on reorder suggestions provided in the dashboard.

Given the dashboard shows reorder suggestions, when an Analyst clicks on the 'Order Now' button next to a suggested product, then an order confirmation pop-up should appear allowing them to proceed with the purchase or edit quantities, ensuring a seamless ordering process.

User wants to receive notifications for low stock levels prompted by the dashboard’s recommendations.

Given the user sets their notification preferences in the dashboard, when the stock level of any product falls below the predefined threshold, then the user should receive an email notification alerting them of the low stock status and recommended reorder actions.

User needs to understand the dashboard layout and functionalities to use the reorder suggestions effectively.

Given the user first accesses the dashboard, when they click on the 'Help' icon, then a tutorial or help guide should be displayed, providing a clear overview of dashboard features and how to interpret the reorder suggestions efficiently.

User wants to ensure that the displayed reorder suggestions are based on the latest available data.

Given the user refreshes the dashboard, when the data reloads, then the reorder suggestions should reflect the most current sales data and inventory levels, ensuring timely and accurate inventory management decisions.

Automated Alerts for Low Stock Levels

"As an Inventory Analyst, I want to receive automated alerts when stock levels are low so that I can act quickly to reorder critical items and prevent sales losses."

Description

The automated alerts for low stock levels requirement encompasses the system's functionality to send notifications to Inventory Analysts when stock levels for popular items fall below a predetermined threshold. Automating this alert system ensures that no critical restocking opportunities are overlooked, thereby reducing the frequency of stock-outs. This feature allows retailers to maintain optimal inventory levels, minimizing lost sales opportunities and fostering customer loyalty by ensuring that products remain available. Additionally, it enhances the responsiveness of inventory management practices, allowing for more strategic and timely reordering processes based on actual performance rather than reactive measures.

Acceptance Criteria

Notifications are sent to Inventory Analysts when stock levels for popular items fall below the preset threshold.

Given that an item in stock falls below the predetermined threshold, when the stock level is updated in the system, then an automated notification is sent to the Inventory Analysts via email.

Inventory Analysts receive timely alerts to take action on low stock levels.

Given that the inventory level is updated, when the stock falls below the threshold, then the alert is generated within 5 minutes of the update and sent to designated Inventory Analysts.

System logs track every automated alert generated for low stock items.

Given that an alert is triggered, when the alert is sent, then it is logged in the system with the timestamp, item details, and Analyst notified for auditing purposes.

Inventory Analysts can customize the low stock threshold for specific items based on sales data.

Given that an Analyst wishes to adjust the threshold, when they update the threshold for an item in the parameter settings, then the new threshold is saved and used for future notifications.

The alert system must function during off-hours and peak sales periods.

Given that stock levels are updated during off-hours or peak sales periods, when an item goes below the threshold, then alerts are still generated and sent, ensuring no critical stock-outs occur.

Alerts include essential information to facilitate quick decision-making by Inventory Analysts.

Given that an alert is sent, when it is received by an Inventory Analyst, then it must include the item name, current stock level, threshold level, and suggested reorder quantity.

Inventory Analysts can view a historical log of past low stock alerts.

Given that alerts have been generated for low stock levels, when an Inventory Analyst checks the alert history, then they can view all past alerts with details on items, thresholds, and timestamps.

Performance Metrics Tracking

"As an Inventory Analyst, I want to track performance metrics for reorder suggestions so that I can evaluate the effectiveness of the system and make necessary adjustments to improve inventory management."

Description

This requirement involves implementing tracking mechanisms to monitor the effectiveness and performance of the Smart Reorder Suggestions feature. Key performance indicators (KPIs) such as stock-out rates, inventory turnover, and the accuracy of sales forecasts should be measurable with insights provided through comprehensive reports. By continuously assessing these metrics, RetailRevive can identify areas for improvement, optimize the algorithms driving reorder suggestions, and enhance overall system performance. This data-driven approach ensures that the solution evolves over time, adapting to changing retail environments and customer behavior, ultimately leading to improved operational efficiency and profitability.

Acceptance Criteria

Inventory Analysts utilize the Smart Reorder Suggestions feature to analyze stock levels and sales trends for a high-demand product during the peak holiday season.

Given that the inventory data is up to date, when an Inventory Analyst reviews the Smart Reorder Suggestions, then the suggestions should not indicate any stock-outs for high-demand items in the next 14 days based on forecasted sales velocity.

RetailRevive generates performance reports to assess the accuracy of sales forecasts made by the Smart Reorder Suggestions over the past quarter.

Given that the performance metrics tracking is implemented, when a report is generated, then the report must show a minimum of 90% accuracy in sales forecasts compared to actual sales data.

An inventory manager evaluates the inventory turnover rates provided by the Smart Reorder Suggestions feature to ensure effective stock management.

Given that inventory turnover data is collected, when the inventory manager reviews the turnover rate, then the turnover rate should meet or exceed the industry benchmark of 5 for the product category within the last month.

During a weekly review meeting, team members discuss the impact of the Smart Reorder Suggestions on stock-out rates and inventory management.

Given that the stock-out rates are tracked, when the team reviews the stock-out report, then there should be a documented reduction of at least 20% in stock-out occurrences compared to the previous quarter.

A system update is performed, and all tracking mechanisms for performance metrics of the Smart Reorder Suggestions feature are verified for functionality.

Given that the system has been updated, when the performance tracking features are tested, then all KPIs (stock-out rates, inventory turnover, forecast accuracy) should be successfully recorded and updated in the system logs without errors.

Retailers test the Smart Reorder Suggestions feature during non-peak periods to evaluate its effectiveness in predicting reorder needs across various product categories.

Given that the system runs simulations for different product categories, when the Smart Reorder Suggestions are activated, then the suggested reorder quantities must align within 10% of actual sales data projections for those categories.

A feedback session is conducted with users of the Smart Reorder Suggestions feature to gather insights on usability and effectiveness.

Given that user feedback is collected, when the analysis is conducted, then at least 80% of the users must agree that the suggestions are actionable and significantly improve their inventory management process.

Multi-store Inventory Management

"As an Inventory Analyst for a multi-store retail chain, I want system-wide inventory management capabilities so that I can optimize reorder suggestions across all locations and maintain stock consistency."

Description

This requirement enables the Smart Reorder Suggestions feature to function across multiple store locations, providing a unified approach to inventory management in a multi-store environment. By allowing inventory analysts to get reorder suggestions that consider the combined sales data from all locations, the platform ensures that stock levels are optimized not just for individual stores but across the entire retail chain. This capability is essential for retailers with various locations to avoid disparities in stock availability and enhance overall efficiency in replenishing popular items uniformly. This feature aims to streamline inventory operations across the enterprise, facilitating better resource allocation and improved customer service by managing stock levels consistently.

Acceptance Criteria

Multi-store inventory analysts need to view stock levels and reorder suggestions for various stores simultaneously during weekly inventory review meetings to ensure optimal stock levels across the retail chain.

Given that an inventory analyst is logged into the RetailRevive system, when they select the 'Multi-store Management' dashboard, then they should see real-time stock levels and reorder suggestions for all locations in a consolidated view.

Inventory analysts require the ability to adjust reorder quantities based on combined sales data from multiple stores to ensure adequate stock is available without overordering during peak seasons.

Given that the inventory analyst is on the reorder suggestions page, when they modify the suggested reorder quantity for one or more stores, then the system should update the total suggested reorder amount reflecting changes based on combined historical sales data.

When a store runs low on a high-demand product, the system should automatically send reorder alerts based on real-time sales data, preventing stock-outs across all stores.

Given that a product's stock level falls below the predefined threshold based on real-time sales velocity, when the alert is triggered, then the inventory analyst should receive a notification for immediate action on that product across all affected locations.

During the implementation of the Smart Reorder Suggestions feature, training for inventory analysts is required to ensure they understand how to leverage historical data for accurate reorder recommendations across multiple stores.

Given that the inventory analyst has completed the training session, when they access the Smart Reorder Suggestions feature, then they should be able to explain how to interpret the suggestions based on combined sales data and utilize them effectively.

To ensure compliance with sales trends, the system should be able to generate reports that show inventory performance across all store locations on a monthly basis for analysis by management.

Given that an inventory analyst requests a monthly inventory performance report, when the report is generated, then the system should include data on stock levels, sales velocity, and reorder suggestions across all stores, accessible within a specified time frame.

Trend Prediction Insights

Utilize machine learning to analyze seasonal patterns and consumer trends, offering predictions on future demand for specific products. This feature empowers Retail Managers and Inventory Analysts to anticipate market needs and align their stock accordingly, enhancing inventory efficiency and reducing waste.

Requirements

Machine Learning Algorithm Integration

"As a Retail Manager, I want to receive predictive insights on future product demand so that I can optimize inventory levels and minimize stockouts or excess inventory."

Description

Integrate advanced machine learning algorithms into the RetailRevive platform to analyze historical sales data, seasonal trends, and external market conditions. This integration will enable accurate demand forecasting and trend analysis for specific products. By leveraging this technology, RetailRevive will provide insights to retailers that enhance inventory management processes, allowing them to stock precisely what is needed based on expected consumer behavior, ultimately reducing waste and improving profitability.

Acceptance Criteria

Retail Manager reviews demand forecasts generated by the integrated machine learning algorithms to make inventory stocking decisions for the upcoming season.

Given historical sales data and seasonal trends, when the Retail Manager accesses the Trend Prediction Insights dashboard, then they should see accurate forecasts for each product with a confidence level above 80%.

Inventory Analyst uses the machine learning-generated insights to adjust stock levels for products predicted to have increased demand.

Given the demand forecasts, when the Inventory Analyst modifies stock levels based on the insights provided, then the system should automatically update the inventory counts and reflect changes in real-time.

Retail Manager evaluates the accuracy of the machine learning predictions over a specified period.

Given the actual sales data from the past month, when comparing it to the machine learning predictions, then at least 90% of the predictions should fall within a 10% variance of actual sales figures.

A retail store uses the Trend Prediction Insights to receive alerts on potential overstock or stockout situations before they occur.

Given the defined thresholds for stock levels, when a potential overstock or stockout is detected, then the system should send automated alerts to the Retail Manager and Inventory Analyst via email.

User conducts a performance review of the machine learning integration during a bi-weekly reporting cycle.

Given the bi-weekly review cycle, when presenting the performance report, then it should include metrics such as prediction accuracy, user engagement with insights, and inventory adjustments made based on the predictions, demonstrating the impact of machine learning on inventory efficiency.

User-Friendly Dashboard for Insights

"As an Inventory Analyst, I want to access a clear dashboard showing trend predictions so that I can make informed inventory decisions without wading through complex data sets."

Description

Develop a user-friendly dashboard that displays trend prediction insights in an easily digestible format for Retail Managers and Inventory Analysts. The dashboard will visualize key data such as predicted demand, seasonal trends, and suggested stock levels, allowing users to make informed decisions quickly. This feature aims to enhance user experience and ensure that critical insights are accessible at a glance, ultimately driving more effective decision-making in inventory management.

Acceptance Criteria

Retail Managers need to access the trend prediction insights dashboard to make informed inventory decisions during a weekly inventory review meeting.

Given that the Retail Manager is logged into RetailRevive, when they navigate to the dashboard, then they should see a clear visual representation of predicted demand for the next month, along with relevant seasonal trends and suggested stock levels for key products.

Inventory Analysts are analyzing past seasonal trends to adjust upcoming stock orders based on the insights provided by the dashboard.

Given that the Inventory Analyst is on the trend prediction insights dashboard, when they select a specific product category, then the dashboard should display historical sales data alongside the predicted demand and trends for that category over the next three months.

Retail Managers are conducting a training session with new employees on how to use the dashboard effectively for inventory management.

Given that the new employees are in the training session, when they receive a demonstration of the dashboard, then they should be able to locate key insights such as predicted demand and seasonal trends within five minutes without assistance.

During a busy sales period, Retail Managers need to quickly assess the stock levels compared to the predicted demands to avoid stockouts.

Given that it is during the sales period, when the Retail Manager accesses the dashboard, then they should see real-time alerts indicating any product stock levels are below the predicted demand for the upcoming week.

Users across different roles (Retail Managers and Inventory Analysts) need to access the dashboard from various devices such as tablets and laptops.

Given that the user is accessing the dashboard from a tablet or laptop, when they log into RetailRevive, then the dashboard should be fully functional and visually optimized for both device types without any loss of data clarity.

The dashboard is utilized after implementing feedback from initial user acceptance testing to ensure it meets user expectations of usability and data accessibility.

Given that the feedback has been implemented, when users test the dashboard again, then 90% of participants should indicate they find the interface easy to navigate and access required insights effectively in a follow-up survey.

Retail Managers need to generate a report of predicted demands and trends over a specified period for future planning and strategy meetings.

Given that the Retail Manager selects a date range, when they request to generate the report from the dashboard, then the system should produce a downloadable report in PDF format containing all relevant insights accurately reflecting the selected timeframe.

Automated Alerts for Stock Adjustments

"As a Retail Manager, I want to receive alerts when demand predictions change significantly so that I can adjust my inventory strategy promptly and avoid stockouts or overstock situations."

Description

Implement automated alert systems that notify Retail Managers and Inventory Analysts when predicted product demand significantly changes. This feature will provide recommendations on necessary stock adjustments based on the latest forecasts, allowing teams to react promptly to shifts in consumer behavior. By ensuring that stakeholders receive timely alerts, RetailRevive will facilitate proactive decision-making and improve overall inventory efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria

Automated Alerts Triggering on Significant Demand Changes

Given that the machine learning model has analyzed sales data, When product demand changes by more than 20% from the previous week's average, Then an automated alert is generated and sent to Retail Managers and Inventory Analysts.

Alert Content and Recommendations

Given an automated alert is triggered, When Retail Managers and Inventory Analysts receive the alert, Then the alert includes specific product recommendations for stock adjustments based on projected demand changes.

Alert Delivery Method

Given an automated alert has been generated, When the alert is dispatched, Then it should be delivered via email and through the RetailRevive dashboard notifications within 5 minutes of the demand prediction change.

User Acknowledgment of Alerts

Given that an automated alert has been received by the Retail Manager, When they view the alert, Then there should be an acknowledgment button that records the alert as 'acknowledged' for tracking purposes.

Historical Alert Performance Tracking

Given multiple alerts have been generated, When reviewing alert efficacy, Then there should be a report showing the percentage of alerts that resulted in stock adjustments made within 48 hours.

Integration with Inventory Management System

Given the automated alert system is operational, When an alert is acknowledged and adjustments are recommended, Then those recommendations should be automatically reflected in the inventory management system for real-time updates.

User Feedback on Alerts

Given that Retail Managers and Inventory Analysts receive alerts, When they respond to a feedback survey on alert usefulness, Then at least 80% of respondents should rate the alerts as 'helpful' or 'very helpful'.

Integration with Existing Inventory Systems

"As an IT Manager, I want to ensure that RetailRevive integrates with our existing inventory systems so that we can maintain accurate data and streamline our operations."

Description

Provide seamless integration capabilities with existing inventory management systems used by retailers. This integration will allow for real-time updates of stock levels and ensure that trend prediction insights are based on the most accurate and current data. By enhancing connectivity between the RetailRevive platform and retailers' existing systems, this feature will facilitate more accurate inventory forecasts and improve overall operational efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria

Integration of RetailRevive with a popular existing inventory management system, where a Retail Manager needs to synchronize stock levels manually for the first time and verify that data flows seamlessly between both platforms.

Given the Retail Manager has authorized the integration with the existing inventory system, when the stock levels are updated in the existing system, then those updates should reflect in RetailRevive within 10 seconds.

A Retail Manager uses RetailRevive to update product stock levels and needs to confirm that the trend prediction insights are recalculated based on the latest data inputs.

Given the Retail Manager has updated the stock levels in RetailRevive, when the updates are saved, then the trend predictions should be recalibrated immediately, displaying the updated forecasts to the user.

After a successful integration, an Inventory Analyst wants to generate a report that reflects the real-time inventory status and trend predictions based on the latest sales data.

Given all relevant integrations are active, when the Inventory Analyst requests a report, then the report must include up-to-date stock levels and trend predictions that are reflective of the last 24 hours of sales data.

A Retail Manager attempts to integrate RetailRevive with an outdated inventory system, which lacks common integration standards, and needs to understand the failure reasons clearly.

Given the Retail Manager has initiated an integration with a non-compatible inventory system, when the integration attempt fails, then a detailed error message must be displayed outlining specific compatibility issues and potential solutions.

The RetailRevive platform is being utilized during peak shopping hours, and the stock updates from existing systems are critical for accurate trend predictions.

Given peak shopping hours are in effect, when stock levels are updated, then the integration should handle updates with no more than 1% lag to maintain real-time accuracy in trend predictions.

Retail employees need training on how to use the integration with their existing inventory systems reliably.

Given the Retail employee has completed the training module on the integration, when they follow the training guidelines, they should be able to seamlessly update and synchronize stock levels with no less than 90% accuracy on the first attempt.

Customizable Reporting for Predictions

"As an Inventory Analyst, I want to generate customizable reports on trend predictions so that I can analyze data specific to our needs and manage our inventory more effectively."

Description

Create a customizable reporting feature that enables users to generate reports based on specific products, categories, or time frames. Retail Managers and Inventory Analysts will have the ability to tailor reports to focus on areas that matter most to their decision-making processes. This flexibility will empower users to gain deeper insights into trends and make more strategic inventory decisions.

Acceptance Criteria

Retail Manager generates a customizable report for a specific product category during the quarterly review meeting.

Given the user selects the product category, time frame, and desired metrics, when they click the 'Generate Report' button, then a report is created that includes sales data, stock levels, and trend predictions for the selected category within the specified time frame.

Inventory Analyst wants to analyze seasonal demand trends for a specific product over the last year.

Given the user selects a specific product and a time frame of one year, when they customize the report to focus on seasonal trends, then the generated report shows a graphical representation of sales and stock levels by month, identifying peaks and valleys in demand.

A Retail Manager uses the reporting feature to identify slow-moving inventory items.

Given the user sets filters to show products with low sales over the past three months, when they generate the report, then it displays a comprehensive list of slow-moving items along with suggested actions based on historical trends.

Inventory Analyst needs to share a customized report with the marketing team for upcoming promotions.

Given the user customizes a report focusing on high-demand products for the upcoming quarter, when they choose the 'Share' option and enter the marketing team's email, then the report is sent via email with the specific insights and data downloaded as an attached PDF.

Retail Manager requires an exportable version of the customized report for offline analysis.

Given the user generates a report with various filters applied, when they select the 'Export' option, then the report is exported in CSV format and is ready for download, preserving all the applied filters and format.

Automated Restock Alerts

Create an alert system that notifies Inventory Analysts when stocks fall below predefined thresholds based on AI predictions. This proactive approach guarantees timely restocking, preventing missed sales opportunities and ensuring product availability for customers.

Requirements

Automated Restock Notification System

"As an Inventory Analyst, I want to receive automated alerts when stock levels fall below set thresholds so that I can ensure timely restocking and avoid stockouts."

Description

The Automated Restock Notification System will proactively monitor inventory levels and send alerts to Inventory Analysts when stock levels drop below predefined thresholds. This requirement ensures that inventory is managed efficiently by leveraging AI predictions to anticipate restocking needs. By implementing this feature, RetailRevive helps retailers maintain optimal product availability, thus minimizing lost sales due to stockouts. The integration of this system within the existing inventory management framework will create a seamless process for replenishment, allowing retailers to stay ahead of customer demand and improve the overall shopping experience.

Acceptance Criteria

Inventory Analyst receives a restock alert when the stock of a high-demand product dips below the predefined threshold after a sales spike during a holiday sale.

Given the inventory level of a product is monitored, when it falls below the predefined threshold, then the Inventory Analyst should receive a notification via email and SMS within 5 minutes.

An Inventory Analyst assesses the automated alerts to identify products that require restocking for replenishment before peak shopping hours.

Given a product's inventory is being tracked, when an alert is triggered for low inventory, then it should be recorded in the system with the timestamp, product ID, and current stock level for accountability.

A retail store user tests the notification system after using it for the first time to ensure that alerts are received during stock audits.

Given the inventory monitoring system is active, when stock levels are checked, then any products which received alerts should show historical alert data and current stock in the dashboard.

Inventory Analysts compare automated notifications with actual inventory levels during an end-of-day review.

Given a log of all restock alerts is available, when the Inventory Analyst reviews the alerts, then 95% of the triggered alerts should correspond with actual stock levels that were below threshold.

A system administrator updates the predefined threshold levels in the inventory alert system as needed based on shifting demand patterns.

Given a new sales trend is identified, when the system administrator adjusts the threshold levels for specific products, then the changes should take effect immediately and reflect in real-time monitoring.

Inventory Analysts receive an alert for a product that is predicted to have increased demand in the upcoming weeks, prompting proactive restocking measures.

Given the AI prediction model shifts based on market trends, when a product is predicted to have increased demand, then an alert should be sent to the Inventory Analyst at least 48 hours before the predicted demand increase occurs.

An inventory management review is conducted to evaluate the effectiveness of the automated restock alert system after one month of use.

Given that the automated restock alert system has been in use for one month, when the review is completed, then the report should indicate at least a 20% decrease in stockouts compared to the month prior to implementation.

Predictive Stock Level Thresholds

"As a Retailer, I want the system to automatically adjust stock level thresholds based on sales trends so that I can optimize my inventory management and reduce carrying costs."

Description

The Predictive Stock Level Thresholds requirement will involve developing a set of algorithms that analyze historical sales data to establish dynamic stocking thresholds for each product. This feature enables RetailRevive to customize stock alerts based on patterns that reflect seasonal changes, sales trends, and consumer behavior. The implementation of predictive thresholds enhances inventory accuracy and provides a tailored approach to each retailer's unique stock requirements. By aligning stock levels with anticipated demand, retailers can significantly reduce excess inventory and improve cash flow.

Acceptance Criteria

Inventory Analysts receiving alerts for stock levels during peak sales season.

Given that the inventory levels fall below 20% of the predictive stock threshold, when the system processes live sales data, then an alert notification should be sent to the inventory analyst within 5 minutes.

Inventory Analysts configuring personalized thresholds for different products based on the AI predictions.

Given that an Inventory Analyst selects a product, when they set a predictive stock level threshold, then the system should save this threshold and apply it for future stock alerts without manual intervention.

Monitoring the accuracy of predictive thresholds against actual sales.

Given that the product's actual sales data is available, when the system compares this against the predictive stock level thresholds over a 30-day period, then the accuracy should be reported as at least 90% for timely alerts.

Testing alerts during a simulated inventory drop event.

Given a test scenario where inventory levels are dropped below predicted thresholds due to a simulated spike in demand, when the alert system generates notifications, then all relevant inventory analysts should receive alerts within 2 minutes.

Evaluating the effectiveness of restock alerts on sales recovery.

Given a period of reduced stock availability, when restock alerts are triggered and product restocking occurs, then sales recovery rates should be tracked, showing at least a 30% increase in sales within a week post-restock.

Inventory Analysts reviewing historical AI predictions against actual sales fluctuations.

Given that historical sales data is compiled, when inventory analysts review the predictions made by the system, then at least 85% of the predictions should accurately represent the sales trends over the last quarter.

User-Friendly Alert Dashboard

"As an Inventory Analyst, I want to have a centralized dashboard for viewing stock alerts so that I can quickly make informed decisions about restocking."

Description

The User-Friendly Alert Dashboard requirement focuses on creating an intuitive interface where Inventory Analysts can easily view alerts related to stock levels, including details such as item name, current stock level, and suggested restock quantity. This dashboard will integrate with existing RetailRevive tools to provide a comprehensive view of inventory health. The clarity and accessibility of the dashboard will enable faster decision-making and enhance the effectiveness of inventory management processes, ultimately ensuring that customers always have access to the products they want.

Acceptance Criteria

User views stock level alerts on the dashboard when inventory drops below threshold.

Given the Inventory Analyst is logged into the RetailRevive dashboard, When an item's stock level falls below the predefined threshold, Then the alert for that item should be displayed on the dashboard including item name, current stock level, and suggested restock quantity.

User receives notifications for stock level alerts via the alert dashboard.

Given the Inventory Analyst is on the User-Friendly Alert Dashboard, When stock levels drop below thresholds, Then the dashboard should display real-time alerts with clear visibility on affected items and restocking recommendations.

User filters alerts by product categories on the dashboard.

Given the Inventory Analyst is using the User-Friendly Alert Dashboard, When they apply the product category filter, Then only alerts related to the selected category should be displayed on the dashboard.

User views historical data of stock level trends on the dashboard.

Given the Inventory Analyst is on the User-Friendly Alert Dashboard, When they click on the historical data option, Then they should be able to view trends of stock levels over the past months to inform restocking decisions.

User customizes alert thresholds for specific products on the dashboard.

Given the Inventory Analyst is accessing the settings for alerts, When they input new threshold levels for specific products, Then the changes should be saved and reflected on the dashboard for future alerts.

User accesses the User-Friendly Alert Dashboard from multiple devices.

Given the Inventory Analyst uses different devices, When they log into the User-Friendly Alert Dashboard, Then the layout and alert information should be consistent across all devices ensuring a seamless experience.

User receives training resources related to using the alert dashboard effectively.

Given the Inventory Analyst is new to using the dashboard, When they access the help section, Then they should find documentation and training videos that explain how to best utilize features of the User-Friendly Alert Dashboard.

Historical Analytics Reports

"As a Retailer, I want to generate reports on historical inventory performance so that I can evaluate my inventory strategies and improve future predictions."

Description

The Historical Analytics Reports requirement will introduce a reporting feature that allows retailers to access detailed analytics on past stock levels, sales data, and alert response times. This feature will help RetailRevive users assess the effectiveness of their inventory management strategies and the responsiveness of their restocking processes. By analyzing historical performance, retailers can make more informed decisions for future inventory adjustments and improve forecasting accuracy, ultimately driving better sales outcomes.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the Historical Analytics Reports feature from the RetailRevive dashboard after a defined sales period to evaluate the effectiveness of their inventory management strategies.

Given the user has accessed the Historical Analytics Reports, when they select a date range and click 'Generate Report', then the system should display a report summarizing stock levels, sales data, and alert response times for the specified period.

An Inventory Analyst reviews the Historical Analytics Reports for a specific product after experiencing a stockout situation.

Given the analyst selects the product and inputs the relevant date range, when the report is generated, then it should display stock levels and sales data accurately reflecting the times before and after the stockout occurred.

User wants to compare historical sales data before and after implementing automated restock alerts.

Given the user is in the Historical Analytics Reports, when they generate reports for both periods (before and after restock alerts), then the system should show comparative data, including sales volume changes and restock alert response times, clearly distinguishing between the two periods.

User provides feedback on the clarity and usability of the Historical Analytics Reports feature after running a report.

Given the report is generated, when the user submits usability feedback regarding the report's format, accuracy, and insights, then the feedback form should be submitted successfully, and a confirmation message should appear.

A system administrator checks the performance of the Historical Analytics Reports feature over a month to ensure there are no load issues during peak usage times.

Given the administrator reviews system logs for the Historical Analytics Reports feature, when they analyze the report data, then there should be no errors logged, and report generation times should not exceed 3 seconds during peak hours.

An executive manager wants to see a summary of how the Historical Analytics Reports have improved inventory management decisions over the last quarter.

Given the manager requests an overview report, when the system compiles the data, then it should include statistics reflecting inventory turnover rates and decision impacts from the previous quarter based on the reports generated.

Integration with Supplier Stock Systems

"As a Retailer, I want my inventory system to automatically reorder stock from my suppliers when levels drop so that I can maintain product availability without manual effort."

Description

The Integration with Supplier Stock Systems requirement aims to establish direct connections with suppliers' inventory systems to facilitate automatic reordering when stock falls below defined thresholds. This integration streamlines the entire restocking process by reducing manual intervention and delays in replenishing stock. Automated ordering not only enhances efficiency but also builds stronger supplier relationships and ensures that retailers have access to the necessary stock without interruption.

Acceptance Criteria

Receiving and Processing Low Stock Notifications from Supplier Inventory Systems

Given that the supplier's stock system detects a product has fallen below the predefined threshold, when the notification is sent to RetailRevive, then the inventory analyst receives an alert within 5 minutes of the threshold breach.

Automated Reorder Creation Based on Low Stock Alerts

Given that the inventory analyst receives the low stock alert, when they review the alert details, then the system automatically generates a reorder request to the supplier within 10 minutes without manual input.

Integration Validation with Supplier Stock Systems

Given the integration has been established, when testing connectivity with the supplier's system, then the system should successfully retrieve current stock levels and thresholds without errors in 99% of the trials conducted.

Supplier Confirmation of Reorder Requests

Given an automated reorder request is generated and sent to the supplier, when the supplier confirms the order, then RetailRevive should receive a confirmation notification within 15 minutes.

Monitoring Supplier Stock Levels in Real-time

Given that the integration with the supplier stock system is active, when a user accesses the inventory dashboard, then they should see real-time updates on supplier stock levels with a maximum delay of 1 minute since the last update.

Failure Alert for Integration Issues with Supplier Systems

Given that there's a failure in the connection to the supplier stock system, when the failure occurs, then the system should alert the inventory manager within 5 minutes of the detected failure.

Reporting on Reorder Efficiency and Stock Availability

Given the system has been operational for one month, when the inventory manager generates a report on reorder efficiency, then the report should show at least a 90% success rate for timely restocks, measured against initial low-stock alerts.

Scenario Analysis Tool

An innovative tool that allows users to simulate various sales scenarios based on changing market conditions or promotions. By visualizing potential outcomes, Inventory Analysts can make informed decisions about stock levels and realistic reorder points, optimizing inventory management under different circumstances.

Requirements

Dynamic Scenario Simulation

"As an Inventory Analyst, I want to simulate different sales scenarios so that I can make informed decisions about stock levels and optimize inventory management based on changing market conditions."

Description

The Scenario Analysis Tool shall allow users to create, modify, and simulate multiple sales scenarios based on varying market conditions or promotional strategies. Users can input different variables such as discount percentages, seasonal trends, or economic indicators to visualize potential outcomes. This capability enables Inventory Analysts to evaluate the impact of these scenarios on stock levels, reorder points, and overall profitability, which directly enhances inventory management under multiple possible future states. The integration of this tool within RetailRevive will enhance decision-making capabilities and help retailers optimize their inventory strategies based on anticipated market fluctuations, ultimately improving operational efficiency and customer satisfaction.

Acceptance Criteria

Dynamic Scenario Creation by an Inventory Analyst

Given an Inventory Analyst has access to the Scenario Analysis Tool, When they input various market conditions such as discount percentages and seasonal trends, Then a new sales scenario should be successfully created that reflects these inputs and is visible in the tool.

Simulating Sales Outcomes

Given an Inventory Analyst has created a sales scenario, When they click on the 'Simulate' button, Then the tool should display potential outcomes, including stock levels, reorder points, and projected profitability based on the defined variables.

Modifying Existing Scenarios

Given an Inventory Analyst has an existing sales scenario saved in the system, When they choose to modify the discount percentage or market condition, Then the system should update the scenario accordingly and allow re-simulation without loss of previously entered data.

Visualizing Simulation Results

Given a sales scenario has been simulated, When the results are generated, Then the tool should provide a clear visual representation (graphs/charts) of stock levels, reorder points, and profitability so that users can easily analyze the data.

Exporting Scenario Reports

Given an Inventory Analyst wants to share the results of a simulated scenario, When they select the 'Export' option, Then the tool should generate a comprehensive report in PDF format containing all relevant simulation data and visualizations.

User Access and Permissions

Given multiple user roles in RetailRevive, When a user attempts to access the Scenario Analysis Tool, Then they should only see the scenarios they have permission to view or modify, ensuring data security and integrity.

Testing System Performance Under Load

Given multiple Inventory Analysts are using the Scenario Analysis Tool simultaneously, When they create and simulate scenarios, Then the system should maintain performance levels with no significant delay in loading or processing times.

Real-Time Data Integration

"As an Inventory Analyst, I want the Scenario Analysis Tool to integrate with real-time data so that I can base my simulations on the most current information, allowing for more accurate decision-making."

Description

The Scenario Analysis Tool shall integrate with existing real-time sales and inventory data feeds within RetailRevive. This integration will ensure that the simulations generated by users are based on the most current data available, providing accurate and actionable insights. By linking the simulation scenarios with live data, users can quickly assess the potential impact of different strategies and adapt their inventory management practices in response to real-time market changes. This functionality is essential for ensuring that the insights derived from the tool are reliable and relevant, enabling retailers to respond effectively to dynamic market conditions.

Acceptance Criteria

Integration of real-time sales data from various retail locations to the Scenario Analysis Tool

Given the retail locations are connected to RetailRevive, when they input real-time sales data into the Scenario Analysis Tool, then the tool should accurately retrieve and display the most current sales figures with no delays.

Simulations using historical inventory levels alongside real-time data

Given the retail locations have historical inventory data stored, when users simulate scenarios in the Scenario Analysis Tool, then the tool should successfully integrate historical inventory levels with current sales data to provide accurate predictive insights.

User experience while setting up a new sales scenario in the tool

Given a user has access to the Scenario Analysis Tool, when they create a new sales scenario using real-time data inputs, then the system should guide them through the setup process with intuitive prompts and error notifications for invalid entries.

Testing the response time of the Scenario Analysis Tool under live data conditions

Given multiple retail users are accessing the Scenario Analysis Tool simultaneously, when they all input real-time data, then the tool should process and return results within 5 seconds without performance degradation.

Availability of comprehensive documentation for users regarding data integration

Given the Scenario Analysis Tool integrates with real-time data sources, when users access the documentation, then they should find clear guides and FAQs on how to properly set up data feeds and troubleshoot common issues.

Monitoring data accuracy during the integration process

Given the integration of real-time data is in progress, when data from sales and inventory feeds is processed, then the tool should automatically generate a report showing the data accuracy with discrepancies highlighted for further review.

User-Friendly Visualization

"As an Inventory Analyst, I want the Scenario Analysis Tool to include user-friendly visualizations so that I can easily interpret simulation results and present data to stakeholders."

Description

The Scenario Analysis Tool shall feature user-friendly visualization options that present simulation results in an easily digestible format. This requirement includes graphs, charts, and dashboards that depict the outcomes of different scenarios, making it straightforward for users to interpret data and identify trends. The ability to visualize potential outcomes will assist Inventory Analysts in communicating findings to other stakeholders, facilitating better collaboration and strategic planning. A comprehensive visualization approach is critical for helping users quickly understand complex data and make timely strategic decisions based on the analysis.

Acceptance Criteria

User Interaction with Visualization Tool

Given an Inventory Analyst accesses the Scenario Analysis Tool, when they select a specific scenario to simulate, then the tool should display a graph showing projected sales over the next quarter with clear labels and legends for easy interpretation.

Data Accuracy in Visualization

Given that the Scenario Analysis Tool has been used to simulate scenarios, when the Visualization is generated, then all data points on the graph must accurately reflect the underlying simulation data without any discrepancies.

User Navigation and Usability

Given an Inventory Analyst is using the Scenario Analysis Tool, when they navigate through different visualization options (graphs, charts, dashboards), then each option must load within 2 seconds to ensure a seamless user experience.

Customization Options for Visualizations

Given an Inventory Analyst wants to present a specific analysis, when they utilize the customization features in the Scenario Analysis Tool, then they must be able to modify the color scheme and labels on the visualizations without any errors occurring.

Exportation of Visualization Results

Given the Scenario Analysis Tool has generated visualizations, when an Inventory Analyst selects the export option, then the visualizations should be downloadable in PDF format maintaining high resolution and clear formatting.

Real-time Data Updates in Visualizations

Given that market conditions change, when the inventory data is updated in the Scenario Analysis Tool, then the visualizations must refresh automatically within 5 seconds to reflect the new data accurately.

Multi-scenario Comparison

Given an Inventory Analyst has multiple scenarios to analyze, when they select the option to compare scenarios, then the tool must display a comparative chart that highlights differences in projected outcomes clearly and effectively.

Scenario Comparison Functionality

"As an Inventory Analyst, I want to compare multiple sales scenarios side-by-side so that I can evaluate their differences and make informed decisions about which strategy to implement."

Description

The Scenario Analysis Tool shall provide functionality for users to compare multiple simulated scenarios side-by-side. This feature will enable Inventory Analysts to evaluate the differences in potential outcomes between varying strategies quickly. A comparison matrix will display key metrics such as inventory costs, expected sales, and reorder points across selected scenarios, allowing for an efficient analysis of the trade-offs inherent in each approach. This aspect is fundamental in empowering users to select the most advantageous course of action based on comprehensive analysis of various strategies.

Acceptance Criteria

Inventory Analysts need to compare multiple scenarios to evaluate inventory costs under different promotional strategies during peak sales seasons.

Given that the user has selected multiple scenarios in the Scenario Analysis Tool, when they initiate the comparison function, then a comparison matrix should display key metrics including inventory costs, expected sales, and reorder points for each scenario side-by-side.

Users want to quickly understand the impact of changing market conditions on stock levels by comparing historical data with simulated scenarios.

Given that historical data has been successfully imported, when the user selects a historical scenario for comparison, then the tool should display the predicted metrics alongside historical metrics for immediate evaluation.

An Inventory Analyst is preparing for a board meeting and needs to showcase potential outcomes of various inventory strategies based on predictive analytics.

Given that the user has created multiple scenarios, when they generate a report for the board meeting, then the report should include a visual representation of the comparison matrix along with insights derived from the metrics.

A user needs to validate the accuracy of the scenario comparison matrix against set business performance metrics before finalizing strategic decisions.

Given that the scenario comparison matrix has been generated, when the user reviews the metrics against established business KPIs, then the tool should indicate whether each scenario meets or exceeds the performance benchmarks set by the company.

Users want to save and revisit their scenario comparisons later to track changes in data and strategic outcomes over time.

Given that the user has completed a comparison of multiple scenarios, when they choose to save the comparison, then the system must allow them to name and save the comparison for future reference, ensuring all metrics are stored accurately.

Analysts aim to present a side-by-side analysis of two promotional scenarios to stakeholders to discuss resource allocation.

Given that two promotional strategies have been selected for comparison, when the user initiates the analysis, then the system should provide a clear side-by-side comparison of metrics in a format suitable for presentation to stakeholders.

Scenario Export and Reporting

"As an Inventory Analyst, I want to export simulation results and generate reports so that I can share insights with my team and aid in strategic decision-making."

Description

The Scenario Analysis Tool shall offer the ability to export simulation results and generate detailed reports for further analysis or presentation. Users will be able to export data in various formats (e.g., CSV, PDF) to facilitate sharing insights with team members or stakeholders. This feature enhances collaboration and ensures that critical data is easily accessible for strategic meetings and further discussions. By providing comprehensive reports and export options, the tool will make it effortless for users to convey their findings and recommendations based on the simulations conducted.

Acceptance Criteria

User wants to export simulation results to share findings with the team after a scenario analysis workshop.

Given that the user has completed a sales scenario simulation, when they select the export option and choose CSV format, then the system should generate a CSV file containing all relevant simulation data, which can be successfully opened in spreadsheet software without data loss.

Inventory Analyst needs to generate a detailed report of scenario results for a stakeholder meeting.

Given that the user has completed a simulation and selects the generate report option, when the report is in PDF format, then it should include graphical representations of key performance indicators and be formatted for professional presentation, ensuring all data is accurate and easily readable.

A user wants to export simulation results in different file formats to analyze flexibility.

Given that simulation results are ready, when the user selects multiple formats (CSV, PDF) for exporting, then the system should correctly create and provide the option to download each file format separately without errors or data corruption.

User aims to share scenario analysis results through email with a cross-functional team.

Given that the user has successfully exported the simulation results to PDF, when they attempt to email the PDF file from the application, then the system should allow email sharing of the file directly from the tool without requiring manual attachment.

An analyst needs to verify that simulated data exported accurately reflects the inputs used during the analysis.

Given that a scenario was simulated and data was exported, when the analyst compares the exported data with the original simulation parameters, then all metrics in the export should match the input values without discrepancies.

User wants to ensure compliance by archiving previous scenario reports.

Given that the user has generated a report, when they select to save the report in the system's archival section, then the report should be stored securely and made accessible for future retrieval and review without any data modification.

A user desires to modify simulation parameters and see if updated results can be exported correctly.

Given that the user changes certain parameters in a saved scenario, when they re-run the simulation and export results, then the new export should reflect the updated scenario inputs accurately and maintain the same format options as previous exports.

Supplier Optimization Recommendations

Analyze supplier performance to suggest the most efficient resource for product sourcing, considering variables such as pricing, lead times, and delivery reliability. This feature aids Inventory Analysts in building strong supplier relationships and streamlining the purchasing process.

Requirements

Supplier Performance Analytics

"As an Inventory Analyst, I want to receive detailed analytics on supplier performance so that I can make data-driven decisions about sourcing products effectively and build stronger supplier relationships."

Description

This requirement encompasses the implementation of a robust analytics tool that evaluates the performance of various suppliers based on factors such as pricing, delivery times, and historical reliability. By leveraging data analytics, the feature aims to present actionable insights into supplier performance, enabling Inventory Analysts to make informed sourcing decisions. This tool will be seamlessly integrated into the RetailRevive platform, enhancing the platform's existing inventory management and supplier relationship functions. Expected outcomes include improved sourcing efficiency, strengthened supplier relationships, and optimized procurement processes.

Acceptance Criteria

Supplier Performance Analytics tool enables Inventory Analysts to view detailed reports on supplier performance metrics in real-time.

Given an Inventory Analyst accesses the Supplier Performance Analytics tool, When they select a specific supplier, Then the tool should display the supplier's pricing history, delivery times, and reliability ratings over the past 12 months.

The system provides recommendations based on supplier performance analysis to optimize sourcing decisions.

Given an Inventory Analyst reviews the supplier performance metrics, When the performance scores of a supplier fall below a predefined threshold, Then the system should suggest alternative suppliers with better performance metrics.

The analytics tool supports filtering and sorting options to help users easily navigate through supplier information.

Given an Inventory Analyst is using the Supplier Performance Analytics tool, When they apply filters for pricing, delivery times, and reliability, Then the tool should display only the suppliers that meet the selected filter criteria.

Historical performance data is accurately populated and updated regularly within the Supplier Performance Analytics tool.

Given the Supplier Performance Analytics tool, When the data is refreshed, Then the performance metrics for each supplier should reflect the most current and accurate historical data available.

The tool should be integrated seamlessly into the RetailRevive platform without any disruption to existing functionalities.

Given that the Supplier Performance Analytics tool is deployed, When an Inventory Analyst navigates the platform, Then they should access the tool without encountering errors or downtime.

The Supplier Performance Analytics tool generates printable reports for supplier performance review meetings.

Given an Inventory Analyst accesses the report generation feature, When they select the parameters for a report, Then the tool should produce a downloadable PDF file containing supplier performance analytics for the specified period.

Lead Time Optimization

"As a Retail Manager, I want to receive recommendations for suppliers with the best lead times so that I can ensure timely product availability and enhance customer satisfaction."

Description

This requirement focuses on developing a feature that analyzes historical lead times from various suppliers and compares them against real-time demand forecasts. The goal is to recommend suppliers that can meet inventory replenishment needs while minimizing lead times. This feature will integrate with the existing inventory processes within RetailRevive, ensuring that recommendations are relevant and timely. By optimizing lead times, businesses can enhance their ability to meet customer demands promptly, therefore increasing customer satisfaction and reducing stockouts.

Acceptance Criteria

Lead time optimization recommendation for seasonal product sourcing

Given historical lead times and real-time demand forecasts are available, when an Inventory Analyst requests supplier recommendations for a seasonal product, then the system should provide a list of suppliers ranked by their ability to meet the lead time while considering current demand.

Comparison of supplier lead times against inventory levels

Given current inventory levels and supplier lead times, when the Inventory Analyst views the supplier optimization dashboard, then the system should display alerts for suppliers whose lead times exceed the projected demand for the next two weeks.

Integration testing with existing inventory management

Given the lead time optimization feature is built, when it is integrated with the existing inventory system, then the recommendations must be available for use within the inventory replenishment workflow without any errors.

User feedback on supplier recommendations

Given that the lead time optimization recommendations have been made, when the Inventory Analyst uses the recommendations, then they must provide feedback that at least 80% of the recommendations result in ordering products from suppliers that meet or exceed lead time expectations.

Real-time updates for changing supplier performance

Given supplier performance metrics are continuously updated, when any supplier's lead time or reliability changes, then the system must re-evaluate and update supplier recommendations in real-time to ensure they remain accurate.

Historical performance tracking for supplier evaluation

Given a complete dataset of past supplier performance, when an Inventory Analyst generates a report, then the report must accurately reflect historical lead times and fulfillment success rates for each supplier over the last six months.

Delivery Reliability Scoring

"As a Supply Chain Manager, I want to view the reliability scores of my suppliers so that I can select the most dependable partners for my inventory needs."

Description

This requirement outlines the need for a system that scores suppliers based on their historical delivery reliability. By implementing a scoring system, the feature will assign reliability scores to each supplier, taking into account metrics such as on-time delivery rates and issue resolution times. This will allow users to quickly assess which suppliers are trustworthy and consistent in their delivery performance. Integrating this feature into RetailRevive will empower retailers to choose suppliers that align best with their operational needs, thus reducing the risk of disruptions.

Acceptance Criteria

Supplier Performance Analysis for Delivery Reliability Scoring

Given that the system has collected historical delivery data for suppliers, When an analyst accesses the supplier scores dashboard, Then they should see a calculated delivery reliability score for each supplier based on on-time delivery rates and issue resolution times, updated in real-time.

Filtering Suppliers by Reliability Score

Given that an analyst is viewing the list of suppliers, When they apply a filter for a minimum delivery reliability score, Then the system should display only those suppliers who meet or exceed the specified score threshold.

Historical Data Integration for Scoring

Given that the system is integrated with historical supplier delivery data, When a new supplier is added, Then the scoring system should automatically assign a preliminary reliability score based on available metrics and past performance data.

Real-time Score Updates Based on New Deliveries

Given that a supplier completes a new delivery, When the delivery is marked as fulfilled in the system, Then the reliability score for that supplier should be recalculated and updated within 5 minutes to reflect recent performance.

Alerts for Low Reliability Scores

Given that a supplier's reliability score falls below the defined threshold, When the analyst views the supplier performance dashboard, Then an alert should be triggered, notifying the analyst of the supplier's low reliability status.

Reporting on Supplier Reliability Trends

Given that an analyst is viewing the supplier performance dashboard, When they generate a report on reliability trends over the last quarter, Then the report should include visual representations of score changes and highlight suppliers that have improved or declined in performance.

User Feedback on Supplier Scoring Effectiveness

Given that the delivery reliability scoring feature has been implemented, When users provide feedback through the platform, Then at least 80% of user feedback collected should indicate satisfaction with the scoring system's accuracy and usefulness in supplier selection.

Price Comparison Tool

"As an Inventory Analyst, I want to compare prices from multiple suppliers so that I can secure the best rates for our inventory purchases and improve our profit margins."

Description

This requirement aims to introduce a price comparison tool that evaluates the pricing structures of different suppliers for the same products. The feature will utilize algorithms to analyze pricing trends and patterns, allowing Inventory Analysts to identify the most cost-effective supplier options. This capability will be integrated into the existing RetailRevive platform, ensuring streamlined access to pricing data. The expected outcome is to lower procurement costs and improve margins on product sales, thereby boosting overall profitability for retailers.

Acceptance Criteria

Analyzing Pricing Structures Across Suppliers

Given that an Inventory Analyst is logged into the RetailRevive platform, When they access the Price Comparison Tool, Then they should see a list of suppliers along with their respective prices for the same products, sorted by lowest to highest price.

Identifying Cost-Effective Supplier Options

Given that the Inventory Analyst has used the Price Comparison Tool, When they input parameters such as lead times and delivery reliability, Then the tool should highlight the most cost-effective supplier options based on the selected criteria.

Historical Pricing Trend Analysis

Given that the Inventory Analyst views pricing for a selected product, When they select the option to view historical pricing trends, Then the system should display a graph of pricing changes over the last six months alongside supplier reliability metrics.

Exporting Price Comparison Data

Given that the Inventory Analyst has generated a price comparison report, When they choose the export option, Then the system should allow them to download the report in both PDF and Excel formats, ensuring data integrity.

User-Friendly Interface for Price Comparison

Given that the Inventory Analyst is using the Price Comparison Tool, When they interact with the interface, Then they should find it intuitive and easy to navigate, with tooltips and help options clearly available.

Real-Time Updates on Supplier Prices

Given that the Price Comparison Tool is active, When supplier prices change, Then the tool should update the data in real-time without requiring a page refresh from the Inventory Analyst.

Generating Recommendations Based on Pricing Analysis

Given that the Inventory Analyst has completed a pricing analysis, When they request optimization recommendations, Then the system should provide suggestions for the top three suppliers based on price, lead times, and reliability.

Supplier Relationship Management Dashboard

"As a Procurement Officer, I want a centralized SRM dashboard so that I can manage my interactions with suppliers efficiently and strengthen our business relationships."

Description

This requirement specifies the development of a Supplier Relationship Management (SRM) dashboard, which will serve as a centralized interface for tracking and managing supplier interactions, evaluations, and communication logs. The dashboard will allow retailers to view performance analytics, lead time metrics, reliability scores, and historical interactions with each supplier. This comprehensive view will foster better relationship management and facilitate proactive engagement with suppliers. Integrating this dashboard into RetailRevive will enhance user efficiency and promote informed decision-making regarding supplier relations.

Acceptance Criteria

Supplier Performance Analytics Review

Given that the user accesses the Supplier Relationship Management dashboard, When they select a specific supplier, Then the dashboard should display detailed performance analytics, including pricing, lead times, and reliability scores for that supplier.

Historical Interaction Log Access

Given that the user is on the Supplier Relationship Management dashboard, When they click on the 'Historical Interactions' tab for a selected supplier, Then the system must show a chronological log of all communications and evaluations associated with that supplier.

Lead Time Evaluation

Given that the user wants to assess potential suppliers for a new product, When they input the product details into the dashboard, Then the dashboard should provide a comparison of lead times for all applicable suppliers, sorted from fastest to slowest.

Reliability Scores Filter

Given that the user is viewing the list of suppliers on the dashboard, When they apply a filter for reliability scores, Then only suppliers that meet or exceed a specified reliability threshold should be displayed.

Supplier Recommendations

Given that the user has completed an assessment of suppliers, When they navigate to the 'Recommendations' section of the dashboard, Then the system should suggest optimal suppliers based on historical performance and current inventory needs.

User Engagement Metrics

Given that the user is managing supplier relationships, When they review the dashboard metrics, Then the dashboard should include user engagement metrics, including the frequency of supplier interactions and resolution times for issues raised.

Inventory Health Reports

Generate detailed reports on stock performance, including turnover rates, age analysis, and slow-moving items. By providing a comprehensive view of inventory health, this feature assists Inventory Analysts in making strategic decisions about surplus inventory and optimizing stock turnover.

Requirements

Comprehensive Inventory Analysis

"As an Inventory Analyst, I want to access comprehensive inventory health reports so that I can make informed decisions about surplus stock and optimize our inventory turnover rates effectively."

Description

This requirement focuses on generating detailed inventory health reports that will include stock turnover rates, age analysis of products, and identification of slow-moving items. By offering an in-depth analysis of inventory performance, it allows Inventory Analysts to make informed decisions regarding surplus inventory, thereby optimizing stock turnover and reducing excess stock. The accurate data presented in the reports will empower retailers to strategically adjust their ordering processes and pricing strategies, ultimately leading to improved profitability and operational efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria

As an Inventory Analyst, I want to generate a comprehensive inventory health report after the end of each fiscal quarter so that I can assess the stock performance over the last three months and make informed decisions for the upcoming quarter.

Given that the user is logged in as an Inventory Analyst, when they navigate to the 'Inventory Health Reports' section and select 'Generate Report' for the last fiscal quarter, then a detailed report including stock turnover rates, age analysis, and slow-moving items should be generated and displayed.

As an Inventory Analyst, I need to review the turnover rates outlined in the inventory health report to identify which products are selling quickly and which are not, enabling me to optimize stock levels.

Given that an inventory health report has been generated, when the user selects 'View Turnover Rates', then the report should accurately display product turnover rates categorized by product type for the last quarter.

As an Inventory Analyst, I want to identify slow-moving items so that I can implement strategies to reduce excess stock and improve inventory efficiency.

Given that the inventory health report is accessible, when the user navigates to the 'Slow-Moving Items' section, then the report should list all products with a turnover rate below a specified threshold over the last quarter.

As an Inventory Analyst, I want to compare current stock levels against historical sales data from the report to adjust ordering processes and improve profitability.

Given that I have generated the inventory health report, when I select the 'Historical Sales Data' comparison option, then the report should display current stock levels alongside comparative sales data for the past two quarters.

As an Inventory Analyst, I want to export the inventory health report in various formats (PDF, Excel) to share insights with my team and upper management for strategic discussions.

Given an inventory health report has been successfully generated, when the user clicks on the 'Export' button, then the system should allow them to export the report in PDF and Excel formats without errors.

As an Inventory Analyst, I need to receive alerts about items that have critical stock levels as a result of the inventory health report, to initiate reordering processes in a timely manner.

Given that the inventory health report has been generated and reviewed, when the report indicates critical stock levels for specific items, then the system should send an automated alert to the user via email and in-app notification.

Automated Reporting Generation

"As an Inventory Analyst, I want the system to automatically generate inventory health reports on a set schedule so that I can focus on analyzing the data rather than spending time creating reports."

Description

The requirement entails implementing an automated report generation system that provides daily, weekly, and monthly inventory health insights. This feature will streamline the reporting process, eliminating the need for manual data collection and report creation, which can be time-consuming and prone to error. Automated reporting ensures that Inventory Analysts have timely access to crucial inventory data, helping them to react quickly to stock issues and trends, thus improving decision-making and efficiency in inventory management.

Acceptance Criteria

Automated Daily Report Generation for Inventory Health.

Given the inventory data is up-to-date, when the system initiates a daily report generation, then the report should be generated without errors and made available to the Inventory Analysts within 10 minutes of the end of the business day.

Automated Weekly Report Generation for Inventory Health.

Given the inventory data is current, when the system initiates a weekly report generation at the designated time, then the report should include cumulative data for the week and be accessible to Inventory Analysts by 9 AM every Monday.

Automated Monthly Report Generation for Inventory Health.

Given the inventory data is accurate, when the system executes the monthly report generation on the first day of the month, then the report should provide detailed insights for the previous month and be sent to designated recipients via email by 5 PM.

Error Handling During Report Generation.

Given there is an issue with the inventory data, when the report generation process is initiated, then an error message should be displayed, and an alert should be sent to the Inventory Analysts indicating the nature of the error.

User Access to Generated Reports.

Given that reports have been generated, when an Inventory Analyst logs into the system, then they should be able to view and download the generated reports within a single click from the dashboard.

Report Content Verification for Accuracy.

Given a report has been generated, when the Inventory Analyst reviews the report, then they should find that the data accurately reflects the latest inventory metrics, including turnover rates and slow-moving items, confirmed by a manual audit of data points.

Automated Scheduling of Report Generation.

Given the report generation system is implemented, when the Inventory Manager sets the desired schedule for daily, weekly, and monthly reporting, then the system should adhere to this schedule without the need for manual input each time.

User-friendly Dashboard Visualization

"As an Inventory Analyst, I want a user-friendly dashboard that visually represents our inventory health metrics so that I can quickly identify trends and make better inventory management decisions based on clear data visualization."

Description

This requirement focuses on creating a user-friendly dashboard that visually displays inventory health metrics such as turnover rates, stock levels, and age analysis. The dashboard will present data in an easily digestible format, utilizing graphs and charts to allow users to grasp inventory performance at a glance. This functionality is essential to aid Inventory Analysts in quickly identifying trends and making strategic decisions about inventory management without needing to sift through complex data sets.

Acceptance Criteria

User Accessing the Dashboard to View Inventory Metrics

Given the user has logged into the RetailRevive platform, when they navigate to the Inventory Health Reports section, then the dashboard should load without errors, displaying visual metrics such as turnover rates, stock levels, and age analysis in graphical formats like charts and graphs.

User Interpreting Dashboard Data for Strategic Decisions

Given the dashboard is successfully loaded, when the user analyzes stock turnover and age analysis graphs, then the user should be able to identify which products have high turnover and which are slow-moving within 2 minutes without additional resources or assistance.

User Customizes Dashboard View Preferences

Given the dashboard is displayed, when the user selects options to customize the layout or types of metrics shown (e.g., switching between bar and line graphs), then the dashboard should update and accurately reflect their preferences in real-time without requiring the user to refresh the page.

User Exports Dashboard Data for Reporting

Given the dashboard displays the current inventory metrics, when the user clicks on the export button, then the system should generate a downloadable report in CSV format containing all displayed metrics within 3 seconds.

User Receives Notifications for Significant Inventory Changes

Given the user is on the dashboard, when there is a significant drop in stock levels for a specific product (as defined by the system settings), then the user should receive a visible notification on the dashboard within 5 minutes of the change.

User Shares Dashboard Insights with Team Members

Given the user has all relevant metrics displayed, when they click on the share dashboard option, then the system should allow them to send a link to the dashboard to team members via email or direct message within 1 minute.

User Accesses Historical Inventory Data through the Dashboard

Given the dashboard is displayed, when the user selects a date range for historical data analysis (e.g., past 30 days), then the dashboard should accurately display historical inventory metrics for the selected range without errors within 3 seconds.

Customizable Report Parameters

"As an Inventory Analyst, I want to customize the parameters of my inventory health reports so that I can focus on the specific data relevant to our current inventory challenges and strategic goals."

Description

This requirement involves enabling users to customize the parameters of their inventory health reports, such as selecting specific date ranges, inventory categories, or metrics of interest. This flexibility allows Inventory Analysts to tailor reports to meet specific needs and focus on the most relevant data for their strategic initiatives. By empowering users with customizable reporting options, RetailRevive enhances usability and ensures that reporting remains aligned with individual analyst goals and retailer needs.

Acceptance Criteria

Inventory Analysts are preparing for a quarterly review of stock performance and need to generate a detailed inventory health report that reflects current data accurately based on specific metrics and timeframes relevant to their strategic decisions.

Given the Inventory Analyst is on the report generation page, when they select a custom date range and specific inventory categories, then the system should generate a report that includes only the selected data without errors and displays the correct metrics for turnover rates and age analysis.

An Inventory Analyst wants to analyze the sales performance of a specific product category over the last six months to make future stock decisions. They must configure the report parameters to isolate this data effectively.

Given the Inventory Analyst has chosen a product category and a six-month date range, when they submit the request for the report, then the system must return a comprehensive report that accurately lists the inventory turnover rates and identifies slow-moving items specifically within the selected category.

An Inventory Analyst notices discrepancies in previous reports regarding slow-moving items and needs to refine their query parameters to understand the performance of these items better before the next inventory meeting.

Given the Inventory Analyst wants to investigate slow-moving items from the last year, when they customize the report parameters to include a specific metric for identifying slow-moving items, then the system should filter the report to show a detailed list of those items correctly.

During a daily operational review, an Inventory Analyst is tasked with adjusting inventory stock levels based on the last month’s performance data, necessitating real-time report customization.

Given the Inventory Analyst accesses the report generation tool during their review meeting, when they apply the custom parameters for the last month’s sales data, then the system must generate a report that updates in real-time and displays accurate performance metrics aligned with the selected criteria.

An Inventory Analyst wants to compare inventory performance across multiple categories to identify which categories are underperforming and need attention for future stock adjustments.

Given the Inventory Analyst wants to compare at least three different inventory categories, when they select the comparative analysis feature within the report parameters, then the system should generate a report that effectively illustrates the turnover rates and age analysis side-by-side for the selected categories.

Alerts for Slow-Moving Inventory Items

"As an Inventory Analyst, I want to receive alerts for slow-moving inventory items so that I can take timely action to reduce excess stock and improve our overall inventory turnover rates."

Description

This requirement encompasses the implementation of an alert system that notifies Inventory Analysts when certain inventory items are identified as slow-moving based on predefined criteria. This proactive feature will assist retailers by prompting timely actions, such as promotional activities or markdowns to stimulate sales for these items, ultimately reducing excess inventory and improving cash flow. By addressing slow-moving inventories proactively, retailers will enhance overall inventory management effectiveness.

Acceptance Criteria

Alert System Activation for Slow-Moving Inventory Items

Given that the inventory items have been analyzed, when an item is deemed slow-moving according to predefined criteria, then an alert notification should be sent to the Inventory Analyst within 5 minutes.

Threshold Configuration for Alerts

Given that the Inventory Analyst has access to the alert system, when they set the criteria for slow-moving inventory, then those criteria should be saved and applied consistently for future analyses.

Alert Notification Format and Content

Given that an alert is triggered for a slow-moving inventory item, when the alert is received by the Inventory Analyst, then the alert should include the item name, current stock level, and recommended action (e.g., markdown or promotion).

Frequency of Alert Notifications

Given that multiple items are identified as slow-moving, when alerts are generated, then the system should limit the alerts to one summary notification per day to prevent spamming the analyst's inbox.

User Interface for Managing Alerts

Given that the Inventory Analyst accesses the alert management interface, when they review alerts, then they should be able to mark alerts as read or resolved, and those actions should update the alert status in the system.

Reporting of Alert Effectiveness

Given that alerts were triggered for slow-moving items, when a review is conducted at the end of each month, then a report should be generated showing the impact of alerts on sales and stock turnover rates.

Integration with Marketing Tools

Given that an alert is triggered for a slow-moving item, when the Inventory Analyst decides to take action, then they should have the option to initiate a promotional campaign directly from the alert notification.

Integration with Sales Data

"As an Inventory Analyst, I want to integrate our inventory health reports with real-time sales data so that I can better understand inventory performance in the context of actual customer demand and sales trends."

Description

This requirement aims to integrate inventory health reports with real-time sales data, allowing Inventory Analysts to assess inventory performance in the context of current sales trends. Such integration provides a holistic view of inventory health against actual sales figures, enabling better forecasting and demand planning. By aligning inventory and sales data, retailers can ensure that they maintain optimal stock levels corresponding to customer demands, enhancing their operational agility.

Acceptance Criteria

Inventory Analyst needs to generate an inventory health report that includes real-time sales data for a specific period, such as the last quarter.

Given that the Inventory Analyst inputs the desired time frame for the report, when they generate the report, then it must display accurate turnover rates, age analysis, and sales data for that period.

An Inventory Analyst wants to analyze slow-moving items in the context of current sales trends to make informed decisions about stock replenishment.

Given that the slow-moving items report is generated, when sales data is integrated, then the report shall highlight items with decreased sales alongside their turnover rates and age analysis for better visibility.

The Inventory Analyst is reviewing the weekly inventory health report to assess overall stock performance versus sales trends.

Given that the weekly report includes both inventory data and sales data, when the report is viewed, then it must present a clear comparison between stock levels and corresponding sales figures, allowing for actionable insights.

A retailer needs to forecast demand based on historical inventory and current sales data.

Given that the historical data is available, when the Inventory Health Reports are generated with real-time sales data, then the forecasting tool should provide accurate demand predictions for upcoming seasons based on this integrated view.

Inventory Analysts require alerts for items that are frequently out of stock or experiencing excess inventory levels in relation to sales.

Given the integrated sales and inventory data, when stock levels drop below or exceed defined thresholds, then alerts must be triggered to notify the Inventory Analyst.

An Inventory Analyst wishes to export the inventory health report that includes real-time sales data for presentation to management.

Given that an Inventory Health Report is generated with integrated sales data, when the export function is used, then the report must be downloadable in multiple formats (e.g., PDF, Excel) without loss of data integrity.

The Inventory Analyst performs ad-hoc analysis on specific categories of inventory in relation to sales data for targeted promotions.

Given that the category filters are applied in the report settings, when the report is generated, then it must accurately reflect inventory health metrics specifically for the selected categories against current sales data.

Multi-Channel Stock Insights

Integrate data from various sales channels to provide a holistic view of stock performance across both online and offline environments. This enables Inventory Analysts to accurately assess demand fluctuations and adjust inventory levels, ensuring alignment with overall retail strategy.

Requirements

Real-time Data Synchronization

"As an Inventory Analyst, I want real-time access to stock data across all sales channels so that I can make timely adjustments to inventory levels and avoid stock shortages or overstocks."

Description

This requirement ensures that inventory data from various sales channels is synchronized in real-time, allowing for immediate updates and accurate representation of stock levels across platforms. This not only enhances visibility for Inventory Analysts but also mitigates the risks of overselling or stockouts. By maintaining a centralized database that integrates with all sales channels, RetailRevive empowers retailers to make informed decisions quickly, leading to better resource management and customer satisfaction.

Acceptance Criteria

Real-time synchronization of inventory data during high sales events, where multiple channels are active simultaneously, ensuring that stock levels reflect the latest sales and updates from both online and physical stores without delay.

Given multiple sales occur across various channels simultaneously, When an item sells out in one channel, Then the inventory data should be updated in real-time across all platforms to reflect accurate stock levels in less than 5 seconds.

Routine operational hours where inventory data is continuously updated throughout the day, allowing Inventory Analysts to assess stock levels and make necessary adjustments without experiencing data discrepancies.

Given the system runs during operational hours, When stock levels are updated in one channel, Then the updates should propagate across all channels with no more than a 10-second delay.

The end of day summary report requirement that reflects accurate stock levels from all channels after inventory updates, assisting Inventory Analysts in reviewing performance and making strategic decisions for the next day.

Given the end of the operational day, When an Inventory Analyst requests the inventory summary report, Then the report must reflect the latest stock levels updated in real-time across all sales channels.

Integrating third-party applications (like analytics or sales platforms) into RetailRevive to ensure they receive the latest inventory data for reporting and insights purposes.

Given a third-party application is connected to RetailRevive, When an inventory update occurs, Then the third-party application should receive and reflect the updated stock levels within 5 seconds.

Real-time alerts setup for Inventory Analysts to notify them about stockouts or low inventory across any sales channel, allowing for swift corrective action.

Given stock levels fall below a predetermined threshold in any channel, When the update occurs, Then an alert should be triggered and sent to all relevant Inventory Analysts within 3 seconds.

Testing the system's ability to handle a high volume of transactions during peak shopping times without degradation of real-time synchronization.

Given peak shopping times with a high transaction volume, When multiple sales transactions occur, Then the real-time synchronization of inventory data must remain intact without exceeding a 5-second update delay.

Customizable Stock Alerts

"As a Retail Manager, I want to receive customizable stock alerts so that I can efficiently manage my inventory and respond proactively to changes in stock levels."

Description

Develop a feature that allows retailers to set customizable stock alerts based on specific thresholds for each product across different channels. This capability will enable proactive management of inventory, informing users when stock falls below or exceeds desired levels. Such alerts can facilitate timely replenishment or discounts on excess inventory, optimizing stock handling and enhancing sales strategies.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailer configures customizable stock alerts for products in their online store.

Given that I am a registered retailer, when I set a stock threshold for a product at 10 units and save this setting, then I should receive a stock alert notification when the inventory level drops below 10 units.

Retailer adjusts stock alert thresholds for products with fluctuating demands based on sales data.

Given that I have access to historical sales data, when I modify the stock alert threshold for a high-demand product to 20 units and apply changes, then the new threshold should be effective immediately and reflected in the system.

Inventory Analyst reviews stock alerts and takes action based on the notifications received.

Given that stock alert notifications are sent for products below the threshold, when I access my alerts dashboard, then I should see a list of all products with alerts including their current stock levels and action buttons for replenishment or discounting.

Retailer sets multiple customizable stock alerts for different products across various sales channels.

Given that I am managing products across online and offline channels, when I create stock alerts for 5 different products with varying thresholds, then all alerts should be saved successfully and displayed in my alerts management section.

Retailer receives alerts for excess inventory levels as well as low stock levels.

Given that I have set stock alerts for thresholds both below and above typical inventory levels, when stock for any product exceeds its upper threshold, then I should receive notification alerts in real-time to take action.

Retailer opts to turn off stock alerts for specific products.

Given that I have set stock alerts for certain products, when I choose to disable alerts for one product, then that product should no longer trigger notifications while keeping alerts active for other products.

Integration of stock alerts with email notifications for immediate action.

Given that I have configured my email settings for stock alerts, when any stock alert is triggered, then I should receive an automated email notification outlining the product, current stock level, and recommended action.

Multi-Channel Reporting Dashboard

"As a Retail Manager, I want a multi-channel reporting dashboard that displays stock performance metrics so that I can easily analyze trends and make informed inventory decisions."

Description

Create a user-friendly dashboard that visually represents stock performance metrics across multiple channels. This dashboard will aggregate data from online and offline sales, showcasing trends, inventory turnover rates, and sales forecasts. By providing a holistic view, it assists Retail Managers in strategizing inventory purchases and sales tactics, ensuring that retailers can align their operations with market demands.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the Multi-Channel Reporting Dashboard to analyze stock performance for the past month, focusing on sales data from both online and offline channels.

Given the user is logged in and has access to the Multi-Channel Reporting Dashboard, when they select the date range for the past month, then the dashboard should display aggregated stock performance metrics including inventory turnover rates and sales forecasts for all channels.

A Retail Manager uses the dashboard to compare sales trends between online and offline channels during a promotional event.

Given the promotional event has a specified period, when the Retail Manager filters the data to include only the promotional dates, then the dashboard should accurately reflect the sales trends for both online and offline channels during the selected dates, highlighting any significant changes.

Inventory Analysts utilize the dashboard to assess demand fluctuations and make adjustments to inventory levels based on data insights.

Given that the dashboard displays real-time data from all sales channels, when an Inventory Analyst identifies a trend of increasing demand for a particular product, then they should be able to adjust inventory levels directly from the dashboard interface and save the changes successfully.

The dashboard is accessed on multiple devices (desktop and mobile) to ensure consistent performance and responsiveness.

Given the Multi-Channel Reporting Dashboard is designed for both desktop and mobile access, when the user accesses the dashboard from a mobile device, then the layout should adapt responsively, ensuring all key metrics are visible and accessible without loss of functionality.

Retail Managers need to generate a report from the dashboard to share with stakeholders, summarizing key stock performance metrics.

Given the dashboard includes an export functionality, when the Retail Manager selects the 'Export to PDF' option, then a high-quality PDF report should be generated containing all selected metrics and visualizations, ready for sharing with stakeholders.

The dashboard should provide visual cues for stock levels, such as alerts for low inventory.

Given the dashboard is displaying current stock levels, when an inventory item falls below a specified threshold, then a visual alert should be prominently displayed on the dashboard indicating the low stock status for immediate attention by the Retail Managers.

Integration with CRM Systems

"As a Sales Coordinator, I want to integrate stock insights with our CRM system so that I can personalize marketing efforts based on customer demand and inventory levels."

Description

Facilitate seamless integration of the multi-channel stock insights feature with existing CRM systems. This requirement will allow sales and customer data to drive inventory decisions, ensuring that stock levels are aligned with customer demand and preferences. By merging customer behavior insights with inventory data, RetailRevive can enhance personalized marketing strategies and improve customer engagement, thereby increasing overall sales effectiveness.

Acceptance Criteria

Integration of Multi-Channel Stock Insights with CRM Systems for Retail Sales Optimization

Given the CRM system is connected to RetailRevive, when an inventory update occurs in any sales channel, then the CRM must reflect the updated stock levels within 10 seconds.

Utilizing Customer Purchase History for Inventory Adjustments in Real-Time

Given a customer's purchase history is available in the CRM, when an item is frequently purchased, then the inventory level for that item should adjust automatically based on predictive analytics within 5 minutes.

Reporting Sales Insights from Integrated CRM and Inventory Data

Given the integration is complete, when an Inventory Analyst generates a report, then the report must display accurate stock insights and corresponding sales data from all channels without discrepancies.

User Access Management for CRM Data Accessibility

Given the retail manager has access rights, when they log into RetailRevive, then they must be able to view and modify stock information derived from the integrated CRM without encountering permission errors.

Training Users on the New Integrated System for Inventory Control

Given the training session is conducted, when Inventory Analysts complete the training, then at least 90% of participants must score 80% or higher on the assessment of system usage and features.

Evaluating Customer Engagement Metrics Post-Integration

Given the integration is live, when analyzing customer engagement metrics after one month, then there should be at least a 15% increase in customer retention and engagement metrics compared to the previous month.

Historical Sales Data Analysis

"As a Data Analyst, I want to analyze historical sales data alongside inventory levels so that I can identify trends and make more accurate future demand forecasts."

Description

Implement functionality to analyze historical sales data in conjunction with stock levels to identify patterns and inform future inventory decisions. This capability will empower retailers to forecast more accurately based on past trends, enabling better anticipation of demand and effective stock allocation. By factoring in seasonal variances and promotional periods, this feature will enhance strategic planning for inventory management.

Acceptance Criteria

Historical sales data is analyzed in conjunction with current stock levels to identify trends and patterns for inventory management and forecasting.

Given that historical sales data is available and integrated with current stock levels, when an Inventory Analyst queries the system for patterns over the last quarter, then the system should display a comprehensive report highlighting sales trends and stock levels, including any significant fluctuations.

An Inventory Analyst utilizes the feature to forecast future demand based on historical data, taking into account promotional periods and seasonal variances.

Given that an Inventory Analyst selects a specific product category and a date range, when the forecast function is executed, then the system should generate a forecast report that includes expected demand, recommendations for stock allocation, and highlights seasonal trends affecting sales.

The system provides alerts or notifications regarding stock shortages based on the analysis of historical sales data.

Given that the analysis of historical sales data indicates a trend of increasing demand for a specific product, when the projected stock level falls below the established threshold, then the system should send an alert notification to the Inventory Analyst and relevant stakeholders.

Integrating historical sales data analysis into regular inventory review meetings to inform stock management strategies.

Given that historical sales data analysis is completed before the inventory review meeting, when the Inventory Analyst presents the data, then stakeholders should receive clear insights and recommendations for adjustments, including data visualizations (charts/graphs) for clarity.

A comparison of different promotional periods is conducted to evaluate their impact on stock levels and sales.

Given that the historical sales data includes multiple promotional periods, when the impact assessment is requested, then the system should provide an analysis comparing sales performance and stock levels during these periods, highlighting any correlations observed.

Behavioral Targeting

This feature uses advanced analytics to identify and segment customers based on their shopping behaviors, preferences, and purchase history. By automating targeted marketing efforts, it ensures that personalized campaigns reach the right audience, thus increasing engagement rates and improving the effectiveness of promotional strategies.

Requirements

Customer Segmentation Engine

"As a marketer, I want to automatically segment my customers based on their shopping behaviors so that I can create personalized marketing campaigns that resonate with their interests and drive higher engagement."

Description

The Customer Segmentation Engine requirement focuses on developing an advanced analytical tool to categorize and segment customers based on their shopping behaviors, preferences, and purchase history. This functionality will enable RetailRevive to facilitate automated targeted marketing campaigns that are optimized for specific customer segments. By employing machine learning algorithms, the engine will continuously analyze real-time data, ensuring that segments are updated dynamically as customer behaviors evolve. The overall benefit is to increase customer engagement through personalized interactions, ultimately improving conversion rates and enhancing marketing ROI. This engine will seamlessly integrate with the existing CRM tools available in RetailRevive, allowing marketers to easily launch targeted promotions based on segment insights.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer segments are created automatically based on real-time shopping behavior data when a customer makes a new purchase.

Given a customer has made a purchase, when their behavior is analyzed, then they should be assigned to a relevant segment or group based on predefined criteria.

Marketers access the Customer Segmentation Engine to view updated customer segments every week.

Given the segments are based on real-time data, when the marketer logs into the CRM, then they should be able to see updated customer segments reflecting the latest purchase behaviors and interactions.

A targeted marketing campaign is launched towards a specific customer segment identified by the engine based on recent behaviors.

Given a campaign is set up, when it is initiated for a specific customer segment, then the system should successfully deliver personalized messages to at least 80% of the segment members without errors.

The machine learning algorithm of the Customer Segmentation Engine recalibrates segments as new data is received from purchases.

Given new purchase data is available, when the data is processed, then the machine learning algorithm should reflect immediate updates in customer segments within 24 hours.

Marketers evaluate the effectiveness of the campaigns launched to specific customer segments.

Given the campaign has been running for two weeks, when performance metrics are analyzed, then there should be at least a 25% increase in engagement rates compared to previous campaigns without segmentation.

The system integrates seamlessly with existing CRM tools, allowing marketers to customize campaigns based on current customer segments.

Given integration has been completed, when a marketer creates a campaign, then they should be able to select and apply customer segments from the Segmentation Engine without any technical issues.

Customer feedback is collected on the relevance of marketing materials sent as a result of segmentation.

Given a feedback collection campaign is initiated, when customers respond, then at least 70% of the feedback should indicate a positive response to the relevance of the personalized marketing materials received.

Personalized Campaign Automation

"As a retailer, I want to automate my marketing campaigns based on customer segments so that I can save time and ensure my customers receive relevant promotions at the right time."

Description

The Personalized Campaign Automation requirement involves creating a system that utilizes insights from the Customer Segmentation Engine to automatically generate and schedule marketing campaigns tailored to specific customer segments. This feature will allow retailers to configure campaign parameters, such as timing, messaging, and offers, based on customer behavior data. Automation will save time and resources for marketers, while ensuring that customers receive timely and relevant communications that match their interests. Integration with existing email and messaging platforms within RetailRevive will ensure campaigns are delivered efficiently, thereby increasing the likelihood of engagement and conversion.

Acceptance Criteria

Automated campaign generation based on customer behavior data.

Given that the customer segmentation engine has categorized customers, When a retailer schedules a campaign, Then the system should automatically generate personalized campaign content that aligns with the selected customer segments and settings.

Scheduling and sending personalized campaigns via email.

Given that a personalized campaign is configured and scheduled, When the scheduled time arrives, Then the system should send the campaign emails to the appropriate customer segments with the correct messaging and offers.

Integration with existing email services for campaign delivery.

Given that the retailer has set up integration with their email platform, When a campaign is executed, Then the campaign must be successfully transmitted through the integrated email service without errors, and track delivery status for each recipient.

Tracking customer engagement metrics post-campaign.

Given that a campaign has been delivered, When customers interact with the emails or messages sent, Then the system should accurately record engagement metrics such as open rates, click-through rates, and conversions for analysis.

Updating campaign parameters based on feedback and performance.

Given that an ongoing campaign is underperforming, When the retailer accesses the campaign settings, Then they should be able to modify timing, messaging, and offers based on performance data, and those updates should be applied in real-time.

User permissions and roles in campaign management.

Given that multiple users have access to the campaign management system, When a retailer assigns roles, Then the system should enforce those permissions appropriately, restricting certain functionalities based on user roles (e.g., admin, marketer).

Testing the system before launch of a campaign.

Given that a campaign is configured, When the retailer initiates a test run, Then the system should send a preview of the campaign to specified internal test email addresses, and ensure that all links and content render as expected before actual deployment.

Behavior Tracking Analytics Dashboard

"As a store manager, I want a dashboard that showcases customer behavior and campaign performance metrics so that I can make informed decisions to improve our marketing efforts."

Description

The Behavior Tracking Analytics Dashboard requirement aims at developing an intuitive interface that provides insights into customer behaviors, preferences, and campaign performance. This dashboard will aggregate data from various sources including the Customer Segmentation Engine, enabling retailers to visualize key metrics, such as engagement rates, click-through rates, and sales conversion rates. The dashboard will empower users with the ability to analyze trends and patterns in real-time, facilitating data-driven decision-making and strategy optimization. Ensuring that the dashboard is user-friendly and accessible will enhance the overall user experience and encourage retailers to leverage data for better marketing outcomes.

Acceptance Criteria

Dashboard Data Visualization for User Insights

Given the user is logged into the Behavior Tracking Analytics Dashboard, when they select a specific customer segment, then the dashboard should display a visual representation of engagement metrics for that segment, including click-through rates and sales conversion rates for the past month.

Real-Time Data Refresh

Given that the dashboard is open, when a user views the Behavior Tracking Analytics Dashboard, then the data displayed should refresh automatically every 5 minutes without requiring a page refresh.

User-Friendly Navigation

Given that a user is unfamiliar with the dashboard, when they access the main menu, then they should be able to navigate to any section of the dashboard within three clicks, ensuring intuitive user experience.

Exporting Data Reports

Given the user has analyzed customer behavior data, when they click the 'Export' button, then they should be able to download a CSV file of the selected data metrics that includes engagement rates for the last three months.

Campaign Performance Comparison

Given the user is viewing the Behavior Tracking Analytics Dashboard, when they select two or more marketing campaigns, then the dashboard should display a side-by-side comparison of click-through rates and conversion rates for those campaigns.

Mobile Compatibility of Dashboard

Given the user accesses the Behavior Tracking Analytics Dashboard from a mobile device, when they load the dashboard, then the layout should be responsive, ensuring that all data visualizations are easily viewed and interacted with on a smaller screen.

Integration with Third-Party Marketing Tools

"As a marketing director, I want to integrate RetailRevive with my current marketing tools so that I can leverage the existing workflows and enhance my marketing capabilities without disruption."

Description

The Integration with Third-Party Marketing Tools requirement emphasizes the importance of allowing RetailRevive to connect with popular marketing platforms such as Mailchimp, HubSpot, and others. This integration will facilitate seamless data flow between RetailRevive and external tools, enabling retailers to use familiar environments while reaping the benefits of advanced segmentation and targeting features. This capability allows users to import customer lists, synchronize campaign performance data, and enrich their marketing strategies with additional functionalities from third-party sources. By providing flexibility and enhanced capabilities, the integration will improve overall marketing efficiency and effectiveness.

Acceptance Criteria

As a retailer, I want to connect RetailRevive with Mailchimp so that I can synchronize my customer lists and marketing campaigns seamlessly.

Given the user has authorized the integration with Mailchimp, when they import a customer list, then the list should be available in Mailchimp without any errors and with all relevant customer data.

As a marketer, I want to track campaign performance between RetailRevive and HubSpot to measure the effectiveness of my marketing efforts.

Given the user has set up the integration with HubSpot, when a marketing campaign is run, then the campaign performance data should be reflected accurately in both RetailRevive and HubSpot within 15 minutes.

As a retailer, I want to use behavioral targeting to create segmented email campaigns in Mailchimp that reflect customer preferences from RetailRevive.

Given the customer behavioral data is available in RetailRevive, when the user creates a targeted email campaign, then the campaign should automatically segment customers based on their shopping behaviors and preferences.

As a user of RetailRevive, I need to ensure that my marketing data is protected while integrating with third-party tools.

Given the integration is established, when data synchronization occurs, then all customer data should be encrypted during transfer and comply with GDPR regulations.

As a retailer, I want to ensure that any changes made in my customer list in RetailRevive reflect in real-time in Mailchimp.

Given the user updates a customer’s information in RetailRevive, when they save the changes, then the updated information should be instantly visible in Mailchimp without additional input from the user.

As a user of RetailRevive, I want a way to troubleshoot integration issues easily if the connection fails with a third-party marketing tool.

Given the integration setup page, when the user tests the connection to a third-party tool, then clear error messages should be displayed if the connection fails, along with recommendations for resolution.

As a retailer using RetailRevive, I want to have access to training materials regarding using the integration with Mailchimp and HubSpot.

Given the user is on the platform, when they navigate to the training section, then comprehensive documentation and tutorials about integrating with Mailchimp and HubSpot should be readily available.

Dynamic Content Personalization

Allow Marketing Specialists to create dynamic marketing content that adapts based on individual customer profiles. This feature ensures that emails, online advertisements, and social media content reflect customers' preferences and past interactions, making outreach more relevant and driving higher conversion rates.

Requirements

Dynamic Content Creation Engine

"As a Marketing Specialist, I want to create dynamic marketing content that adapts to individual customer profiles so that I can engage customers with relevant offers and increase conversion rates."

Description

The Dynamic Content Creation Engine enables Marketing Specialists to seamlessly generate marketing content that adjusts based on the unique profiles of individual customers. This requirement involves a user-friendly interface for content creation, algorithms that analyze customer data, and automation tools that ensure timely delivery of personalized content. The implementation of this engine will significantly enhance the relevance of marketing campaigns, leading to improved engagement and conversion rates. By leveraging customer preferences and prior interactions, retailers can foster deeper connections with their audience and drive sales effectively. The expected outcome is a more efficient marketing process and higher customer satisfaction through tailored communications.

Acceptance Criteria

Marketing specialists access the Dynamic Content Creation Engine to create a personalized email campaign targeting customers who have previously purchased sports equipment.

Given that the marketing specialist selects the email campaign option, when they input the customer segment for sports equipment buyers and design the email template, then the system should dynamically populate the email content with product recommendations based on their previous purchases and preferences.

A marketing specialist wants to schedule dynamic social media posts that reflect current promotions and individual customer interests.

Given that the marketing specialist chooses to create a social media post, when they select their target customer segment and input the promotional details, then the system should generate a post that includes relevant images, suggested hashtags, and tailored messaging suitable for the selected audience.

After launching an email campaign, the Marketing team seeks to review the effectiveness of the Dynamic Content Creation Engine's personalization efforts.

Given that the email campaign has been sent, when the marketing specialist checks the campaign analytics, then the system should provide metrics such as open rates, click-through rates, and conversion rates specifically attributed to the personalized content versus the overall campaign performance.

A Marketing specialist needs to edit an existing dynamic marketing content piece to align with new customer preferences that have recently been identified through data analysis.

Given that the marketing specialist accesses an existing content piece, when they update the customer preferences settings and save the changes, then the system should reflect these new preferences in real-time and adjust the displayed content accordingly across communications.

The marketing team is preparing for a new product launch and wants to ensure that the Dynamic Content Creation Engine can handle a large volume of personalized content generation.

Given that the team inputs product details and customer segments for the new launch, when they initiate the content generation process, then the system should be able to produce personalized content for at least 10,000 customers within a specified timeframe, demonstrating efficiency and scalability.

Real-Time Customer Profile Tracking

"As a Marketing Specialist, I want to access real-time updates on customer profiles so that I can create timely and accurate marketing campaigns that resonate with my audience."

Description

Real-Time Customer Profile Tracking collects and updates individual customer data continuously as interactions occur across various channels. This requirement supports the dynamic content personalization feature by ensuring that the marketing content is based on the most current information about customers’ behaviors and preferences. Benefits include enhanced accuracy in targeted marketing efforts, improved customer experiences, and the ability to quickly adapt campaigns based on real-time insights. This integration will provide Marketing Specialists with the tools needed to tailor communications and offers, positioning RetailRevive as a forward-thinking retail solution that prioritizes customer satisfaction and engagement.

Acceptance Criteria

Real-time customer profile updates during an online shopping session.

Given a customer is browsing the online store, when they view products, add items to their cart, or make changes to their profile, then their customer profile must be updated in real-time and reflect these interactions.

Integration with email marketing tools to utilize real-time customer data.

Given Marketing Specialists are preparing an email campaign, when they select customer segments based on preferences, then the system must accurately reflect the latest customer data, including recent purchases and interactions, ensuring targeted emails are sent based on real-time profiles.

Monitoring the effects of personalized content on conversion rates.

Given a marketing campaign is launched using dynamically personalized content, when the campaign runs, then there should be measurable improvements in click-through and conversion rates compared to previous non-personalized campaigns, tracked over a specified period.

Real-time feedback loop for customer interactions.

Given the system collects customer interactions across various channels, when a customer takes an action, then the system must provide instant feedback on their profile update and preferences to the Marketing Specialists within 5 minutes.

Reporting on customer engagement metrics based on real-time profiles.

Given the data collected from customer interactions, when a Marketing Specialist requests a report, then they must receive insights that reflect customer engagement metrics based on the latest updates to their profiles.

Handling multiple concurrent customer interactions.

Given multiple customers are interacting with the platform simultaneously, when these customers perform actions that modify their profiles, then the system must update all relevant profiles in real-time without errors or data loss.

Testing the accuracy of customer preference updates.

Given a series of predefined customer interactions are simulated, when these interactions are completed, then the system must accurately reflect the corresponding changes to customer preferences as validated by comparing expected outcomes with actual system updates.

Segmentation and Audience Targeting

"As a Marketing Specialist, I want to segment my customer base into targeted groups so that I can customize marketing messages to improve engagement and conversion."

Description

Segmentation and Audience Targeting allow Marketing Specialists to categorize customers into specific groups based on shared attributes, purchasing behavior, or engagement history. This requirement enhances the dynamic content personalization feature by enabling tailored messaging for different segments of the customer base. By utilizing advanced analytics, this capability will improve the effectiveness of marketing campaigns and ensure that communications are both relevant and appealing to each audience segment. Proper implementation will allow for increased precision in marketing strategies, leading to higher conversion rates and better ROI.

Acceptance Criteria

Marketing Specialists can easily segment customers based on attributes like age, purchase history, and engagement level using a user-friendly interface.

Given the Marketing Specialist is logged into RetailRevive, when they navigate to the Segmentation tool and select customer attributes, then they should be able to create and save customer segments successfully.

A Marketing Specialist wants to send a targeted email campaign based on a specific segment they created earlier.

Given a customer segment is created, when the Marketing Specialist selects the segment for an email campaign, then the email content should automatically adjust to reflect the preferences identified in the customer segment.

After sending a marketing campaign, the Marketing Specialist wishes to analyze its performance based on the segmented audience.

Given a marketing campaign was sent, when the Marketing Specialist views the analytics dashboard, then they should be able to filter results specifically by the customer segments used in the campaign and compare performance metrics.

A Marketing Specialist attempts to update an existing customer segment to refine the targeting criteria based on new data.

Given the Marketing Specialist has access to customer data, when they modify the attributes of an existing segment, then the segment should update in real-time without error and reflect the new criteria.

The system needs to account for customer interactions and feedback, which can affect the segmentation of customers over time.

Given the system collects customer feedback and interaction data, when this data is processed, then the updated segmentation should reflect new insights and automatically adjust customer placements in segments accordingly.

In the event of a marketing campaign, a Marketing Specialist should be able to generate A/B tests for different segments to determine the most effective content.

Given multiple customer segments, when the Marketing Specialist sets up an A/B test, then they should be able to see distinct performance outcomes based on variations in content for each segment after the campaign is executed.

A Marketing Specialist wants to access suggestions for segment creation based on historical data and trends.

Given the Marketing Specialist is within the segmentation interface, when they request segment suggestions, then the system should provide at least three data-driven segment ideas based on historical customer behavior and demographics.

Performance Analytics Dashboard

"As a Marketing Specialist, I want to access a performance analytics dashboard so that I can analyze the effectiveness of my campaigns and make data-driven decisions for future marketing strategies."

Description

The Performance Analytics Dashboard provides Marketing Specialists with comprehensive insights into the effectiveness of personalized marketing campaigns. This requirement includes data visualization tools to track engagement metrics, conversion rates, and overall campaign performance. The dashboard will enable continuous optimization of marketing strategies by highlighting what works best and areas requiring adjustment. By analyzing performance data, retailers can make informed decisions, enhance future campaigns, and ensure resources are allocated effectively, ultimately increasing the impact of marketing efforts.

Acceptance Criteria

Marketing Specialist is utilizing the Performance Analytics Dashboard to evaluate the effect of a recently launched personalized email campaign on customer engagement rates over a two-week period.

Given the Marketing Specialist accesses the Performance Analytics Dashboard, when they select the personalized email campaign metric, then they should see engagement rates, conversion rates, and a breakdown of customer interactions between the current date and the previous two weeks.

A Marketing Specialist needs to identify which marketing channels are driving the highest conversion rates for personalized content campaigns within the dashboard.

Given the Marketing Specialist is on the Performance Analytics Dashboard, when they filter the data by marketing channels, then they should be able to view conversion rates for each channel displayed in a bar graph format and sortable by highest to lowest conversion.

After launching a personalized advertising campaign, the Marketing Specialist is checking the dashboard to assess overall campaign performance and areas for improvement.

Given the Marketing Specialist views the Performance Analytics Dashboard, when they analyze the campaign's overall performance, then they should see key performance indicators (KPIs) such as total impressions, click-through rates, and a detailed analysis of performance compared to previous campaigns.

A Marketing Specialist wants to track engagement metrics week over week for continuous campaign optimization using the Performance Analytics Dashboard.

Given the Marketing Specialist accesses the Performance Analytics Dashboard, when they select the engagement metrics report for the last four weeks, then they should receive a comparative analysis chart that highlights week-over-week changes in customer engagement.

The Marketing Specialist needs to generate a report from the dashboard that summarizes campaign performance and insights for team presentation.

Given the Marketing Specialist is on the Performance Analytics Dashboard, when they request to generate a campaign performance report, then they should receive a downloadable PDF that includes visual charts, key insights, and actionable recommendations based on the data.

Marketing Specialist reviews the Performance Analytics Dashboard to assess if the personalized marketing strategy is meeting predetermined success metrics.

Given the Marketing Specialist has established success metrics for personalized marketing campaigns, when they review the dashboard, then they should see visual indicators (green/yellow/red) next to each metric indicating whether the campaign is on track, at risk, or not meeting targets.

A Marketing Specialist wants to compare the performance of different campaigns targeting the same audience segment in the dashboard.

Given the Marketing Specialist selects two or more campaigns targeting the same audience segment within the Performance Analytics Dashboard, when they initiate a comparison analysis, then they should receive a side-by-side performance report detailing key metrics such as engagement and conversion rates for each campaign.

Multi-Channel Integration Capabilities

"As a Marketing Specialist, I want to deploy dynamic marketing content across multiple channels so that I can reach customers where they are most active and enhance engagement."

Description

Multi-Channel Integration Capabilities allow Marketing Specialists to deploy dynamic content across various platforms including email, social media, and online advertising seamlessly. This requirement entails the integration of tools that streamline content publishing, ensuring consistency in messaging and branding across channels. The implementation of this feature will provide a unified approach to marketing efforts, increasing efficiency and maximizing the reach of personalized campaigns. By being present on multiple channels, retailers will enhance customer engagement at every touchpoint, which is essential in today’s multi-faceted retail landscape.

Acceptance Criteria

Marketing Specialist creates a dynamic email campaign targeting customers who have recently purchased running shoes, incorporating their past preferences and interactions to demonstrate relevance and encourage repeat purchases.

Given a Marketing Specialist uses the platform to create a dynamic email, when they select customer segments based on purchase history, then the email content must reflect individual customer preferences and dynamically adapt per customer profile.

A Marketing Specialist schedules a social media advertisement that targets customers who abandoned their shopping carts, creating incentives based on their previous interactions to drive them back to the store.

Given the Marketing Specialist sets up an advertisement targeting customers who have abandoned carts, when the advertisement is published across various social media channels, then it should dynamically display personalized offers unique to each customer’s cart contents.

The Marketing team wants to analyze the performance of a campaign that utilized dynamic content personalization across email and social media to measure engagement and conversion rates.

Given the campaign has been deployed across all channels, when the Marketing team accesses the analytics dashboard, then they must see comprehensive metrics on engagement and conversion rates segmented by channel and content type.

A Marketing Specialist utilizes the platform to send out a promotional email campaign during a holiday season, ensuring that messaging is consistent across multiple channels including email, social media, and online ads.

Given the Marketing Specialist configures promotional content for the campaign, when the content is published, then it must appear identically in the email, social media posts, and ads, maintaining brand consistency and messaging across all platforms.

A RetailRevive user wishes to update marketing content for a new product launch across various channels, ensuring timely updates to avoid customer confusion.

Given a new product launch is planned, when the Marketing Specialist updates the content in the central dashboard, then it must automatically propagate and update all channels within 30 minutes without manual intervention.

A Marketing Specialist applies dynamic content personalization for an upcoming loyalty program, ensuring messages are tailored to different tiers of loyalty program members.

Given the loyalty program has multiple tiers, when the Marketing Specialist sets up the campaign, then the content displayed to each member tier must reflect tier-specific rewards and messaging tailored to encourage program engagement.

Automated Campaign Scheduling

This tool enables users to automate the scheduling of marketing campaigns based on customer behaviors, such as time of day, frequency of past purchases, and engagement levels. By optimizing timing, Marketing Specialists can enhance visibility and interaction with their promotions.

Requirements

Dynamic Scheduling Algorithm

"As a Marketing Specialist, I want the system to automatically schedule campaigns based on customer behavior so that I can maximize promotion effectiveness and reach more customers at the right time."

Description

The dynamic scheduling algorithm will analyze customer behavior patterns, such as peak engagement times, frequency of past purchases, and specific preferences to automatically determine the optimal time to launch marketing campaigns. This requires integration with the existing CRM tools for seamless data exchange and will significantly boost the engagement rates by ensuring that promotions reach customers when they are most likely to interact. Additionally, it will reduce the manual effort spent scheduling campaigns, allowing marketing specialists to focus on content creation and strategy instead.

Acceptance Criteria

Automated scheduling of a marketing campaign for a promotion on weekend sales based on customer purchasing habits and engagement metrics.

Given that the marketing campaign is set to launch on a Friday evening, when customer engagement metrics indicate high activity, then the system will automatically schedule the campaign without manual intervention if previous data shows increased purchases during this time.

Integration of the dynamic scheduling algorithm with existing CRM tools to facilitate seamless data flow for scheduling campaigns.

Given that the CRM tools have been updated, when the dynamic scheduling algorithm analyzes customer behavior, then it will correctly pull historical purchasing data and engagement rates from the CRM without errors and schedule campaigns accordingly.

Marketing specialists want to assess the effectiveness of the automated scheduling feature by comparing engagement rates before and after implementation.

Given that campaigns were previously scheduled manually, when the automated scheduling feature is implemented, then there should be at least a 20% increase in customer engagement rates within three months of launch.

Users utilize the automated scheduling feature to set up a holiday promotion campaign.

Given that the user inputs specific target customer segments and promotion timings, when the algorithm executes, then the system will schedule the campaign for those segments at the optimal times as determined by analytics.

Monitor and evaluate the performance of the scheduled campaigns to optimize future campaigns based on data insights.

Given that the automated campaigns have been running for two weeks, when the user checks the engagement dashboard, then they should see actionable insights and recommendations based on the performance data available through the platform.

Marketing specialists need to manually override the automated scheduling for specific campaigns due to unforeseen circumstances.

Given that a marketing specialist identifies a need to override the automated schedule, when they manually adjust the campaign timings, then those adjustments should be logged, and the scheduled campaign should reflect the new timings accurately.

User Segmentation Tool

"As a Marketing Specialist, I want to segment users based on their behaviors and demographics so that I can tailor my marketing campaigns to better meet the needs of different customer groups."

Description

The user segmentation tool will allow users to create targeted groups based on various criteria such as demographics, purchasing habits, and engagement levels. This feature will enhance the automated campaign scheduling by providing insights into which segments respond best to specific promotions, enabling more tailored and effective marketing strategies. Integration with existing analytics tools will ensure this segmentation is based on real-time data, enhancing the overall effectiveness of marketing efforts and improving conversion rates.

Acceptance Criteria

User Segmentation Creation for Email Campaigns

Given a Marketing Specialist has access to the user segmentation tool, when they input demographics and engagement levels to create a segment, then the system should successfully generate a targeted user group that adheres to the specified criteria and displays a success message.

Integration of Real-Time Data for Segmentation

Given the user segmentation tool is integrated with existing analytics tools, when real-time data is received, then the segment should be updated automatically to reflect the latest user behaviors and trends without any manual intervention.

Testing Segment Performance for Campaign Optimization

Given a Marketing Specialist has created a user segment, when they launch a marketing campaign targeted at that segment, then the conversion rates and engagement metrics should be tracked and reported back to validate that the segment responds effectively to the promotions.

Dynamic Adjustment of Segments Based on Behavior Changes

Given a user segment has been created, when user behaviors shift (e.g., increase in purchase frequency), then the segmentation tool should dynamically adjust the segment criteria to incorporate new user behaviors and inform the Marketing Specialist of the changes.

Generating Reports on Segment Effectiveness

Given a Marketing Specialist uses the segmentation tool, when they request a report on the performance of campaigns directed at specific segments, then the system should generate a comprehensive report detailing engagement and conversion rates associated with each segment within 24 hours.

User-Friendly Interface for Segmentation Management

Given a Marketing Specialist accesses the user segmentation tool, when they navigate through the interface to create or edit segments, then the interface should be intuitive and allow for seamless management of segments with clear instructions provided at each step.

Multi-Criteria Segmentation Creation

Given the user segmentation tool allows for complex segmentation, when a Marketing Specialist specifies multiple criteria (demographics, purchase history, engagement), then the tool should accurately display users meeting all specified criteria and allow them to save that segment for future campaigns.

Campaign Performance Dashboard

"As a Marketing Specialist, I want to see the performance of my scheduled campaigns in real-time so that I can quickly adjust my strategies and improve overall engagement."

Description

The campaign performance dashboard will present real-time data analytics on scheduled campaigns, allowing Marketing Specialists to evaluate the effectiveness of their promotional efforts. This feature will include KPIs such as open rates, click-through rates, and conversion rates, providing insights into what strategies work best. The dashboard will integrate with existing analytics tools for a comprehensive view of campaign performance, enabling data-driven decisions for future marketing initiatives.

Acceptance Criteria

Accessing the campaign performance dashboard as a Marketing Specialist after completing a campaign to analyze its effectiveness.

Given the Marketing Specialist has accessed the campaign performance dashboard, When a completed campaign is selected, Then the dashboard displays real-time data for key performance indicators (KPIs) including open rates, click-through rates, and conversion rates for that campaign.

Updating campaign data in the performance dashboard to reflect new analytics after a campaign has run for a specified duration.

Given the campaign's end date has passed, When the Marketing Specialist refreshes the dashboard, Then the updated KPIs reflect the latest data and insights accurately for review.

Integrating the campaign performance dashboard with existing analytics tools to compile data from multiple sources.

Given the integration setup is complete, When the Marketing Specialist views the performance dashboard, Then the KPIs displayed are sourced correctly from both the internal campaign data and the integrated analytics tools.

Exporting the campaign performance data for presentation to stakeholders who are not directly accessing the dashboard.

Given the Marketing Specialist has selected a completed campaign, When they choose to export the performance data, Then the exported file contains all relevant KPIs and is formatted correctly for external presentation.

Providing insights and recommendations based on the campaign performance data displayed on the dashboard.

Given the Marketing Specialist has analyzed the KPI data for a campaign, When they generate insights, Then the dashboard suggests at least three actionable recommendations based on the performance trends identified.

A/B Testing Functionality

"As a Marketing Specialist, I want to conduct A/B tests on my campaigns so that I can identify the most effective messaging and improve customer engagement."

Description

The A/B testing functionality will allow marketing teams to test different versions of campaigns to determine which variations perform better among their target audience. This will help refine campaigns based on real customer reactions rather than assumptions. Integration with the scheduling tools will ensure that A/B tests can be launched and monitored efficiently, leading to optimized marketing strategies that resonate more with customers and enhance campaign success rates.

Acceptance Criteria

A marketing team wants to test two different subject lines for an email campaign targeting customers who purchased running shoes in the last month.

Given the email campaign is set up with two versions of subject lines, When the campaign is scheduled for execution, Then the A/B testing functionality should randomly distribute the emails to the target audience.

The marketing team needs to run an A/B test comparing two different promotional offers to see which one leads to better conversion rates.

Given two different promotional offers are configured in the campaign, When the A/B test is launched, Then the system should track and report the conversion rates for both offers separately.

The A/B testing tool is integrated with the automated campaign scheduling feature to optimize the timing of email sends based on customer engagement.

Given a successful A/B test has been conducted, When results indicate a winning version based on customer engagement, Then the winning version should be automatically scheduled for future sends based on optimal times.

The marketing specialist wants to analyze A/B test results to make informed decisions for future campaigns.

Given an A/B test has completed, When the results are accessed, Then the system should provide a clear comparison of the performance metrics for each version tested.

A marketing team conducts A/B tests for social media ads to assess which creatives generate more clicks.

Given the social media ads have been set up for A/B testing, When the ads are run, Then the system should capture engagement metrics such as click-through rates for each ad variant.

The system must ensure that A/B test results are accurate and reliable by preventing the same customer from receiving both variations.

Given an A/B test is in progress, When customers in the target segment are identified, Then no customer should receive more than one variation of the test.

The marketing team needs to receive notifications about the A/B test results once the testing period is over.

Given an A/B test has concluded, When the results are computed, Then the system should automatically send a notification to the marketing team summarizing the results and suggested next steps.

Customer Journey Mapping

Integrate a visual representation of the customer journey into the platform, allowing Marketing Specialists to track various touchpoints and customer interactions. This feature helps in understanding how customers engage with marketing efforts and aids in creating more effective and personalized campaigns.

Requirements

Touchpoint Tracking

"As a Marketing Specialist, I want to track customer interactions across multiple touchpoints so that I can better understand their journey and create more targeted marketing campaigns that resonate with their needs."

Description

The Touchpoint Tracking requirement involves the implementation of a feature that allows Marketing Specialists to visualize and analyze customer interactions across different stages of their journey. This includes integration with existing marketing tools to pull in data from email campaigns, social media ads, website visits, and in-store engagements. By providing a comprehensive view of how customers interact with various touchpoints, this feature will enable Marketing Specialists to identify trends, optimize marketing strategies, and personalize customer interactions effectively, ultimately driving engagement and conversion rates.

Acceptance Criteria

As a Marketing Specialist, I want to visualize customer interactions across various touchpoints including emails, social media ads, and in-store visits, to better understand engagement patterns.

Given that the Marketing Specialist accesses the Touchpoint Tracking feature, when they view the visual representation of customer interactions, then they should see aggregated data from email campaigns, social media ads, website visits, and in-store engagements clearly displayed.

As a Marketing Specialist, I want to filter touchpoints by date range to analyze trends over specific periods such as monthly or quarterly.

Given that the Marketing Specialist selects a date range, when they apply the filter, then the visual representation should update to show only the interactions within the selected date range.

As a Marketing Specialist, I want to receive insights on customer journey trends based on touchpoint interaction data to enhance my marketing strategy.

Given that the Marketing Specialist accesses the analytics dashboard, when they view the insights report, then it should highlight key trends in customer behavior and provide actionable recommendations based on the interactivity data.

As a Marketing Specialist, I want to integrate Touchpoint Tracking with existing marketing tools to ensure seamless data flow for comprehensive analysis.

Given that the Marketing Specialist configures the integration settings, when they connect to existing marketing tools, then data from those tools should be automatically pulled into the Touchpoint Tracking feature without manual entry.

As a Marketing Specialist, I want to customize the visual representation of touchpoints to focus on specific customer segments, enabling targeted marketing efforts.

Given that the Marketing Specialist selects a specific customer segment, when they view the touchpoint visualization, then it should display interactions exclusively related to the selected segment, distinguishing it from the overall data.

As a Marketing Specialist, I want to track the conversion rates associated with different touchpoints to evaluate the effectiveness of each channel.

Given that the Marketing Specialist accesses the conversion analytics, when they analyze the data, then they should see clear metrics indicating conversion rates for each touchpoint, allowing for better marketing decisions.

As a Marketing Specialist, I want to generate reports based on touchpoint data to share insights with my team and stakeholders.

Given that the Marketing Specialist selects the report generation option, when they specify the report parameters, then a downloadable report summarizing key touchpoint data should be generated and available for export.

Interactive Journey Visualization

"As a Marketing Specialist, I want to have an interactive visualization of the customer journey so that I can easily analyze the touchpoints where customers engage and enhance my marketing strategies accordingly."

Description

The Interactive Journey Visualization requirement focuses on creating an intuitive, visual dashboard that presents the customer journey in an interactive format. It should allow users to drill down into specific touchpoints for detailed analysis, enabling Marketing Specialists to gain insights into customer behavior and preferences. This feature will include dynamic mapping capabilities, allowing users to visualize changes over time, assess campaign effectiveness, and identify critical moments where customers drop off or convert. By facilitating a better understanding of the customer journey, this requirement aims to enhance the ability to tailor marketing efforts and improve customer retention.

Acceptance Criteria

Marketing Specialist interacts with the Interactive Journey Visualization dashboard to analyze the customer journey for a recent campaign.

Given a Marketing Specialist is logged into the RetailRevive platform, when they navigate to the Interactive Journey Visualization dashboard, then the dashboard should load without errors and display the complete customer journey for the selected campaign.

A Marketing Specialist wants to drill down into a specific touchpoint in the customer journey to assess engagement.

Given the dashboard is loaded, when the Marketing Specialist clicks on a specific touchpoint on the customer journey map, then relevant details about that touchpoint, including engagement metrics and customer feedback, should be presented correctly.

A Marketing Specialist assesses the effectiveness of a marketing campaign over time using the interactive visualization.

Given the Marketing Specialist selects a date range for campaign evaluation, when they apply the filters, then the dashboard should dynamically update to show engagement statistics and conversion rates for each touchpoint within the selected timeframe.

The Marketing Specialist reviews the customer journey over time to identify patterns in drop-offs and conversions.

Given the Marketing Specialist is viewing the customer journey, when they enable the time-lapse feature, then the visualization should display changes in the journey over the selected period, highlighting drop-offs and conversions.

The Marketing Specialist generates a report based on insights gathered from the Interactive Journey Visualization.

Given the Marketing Specialist has finalized their analysis, when they click on the 'Generate Report' button, then a downloadable report should be created that summarizes the insights drawn from the interactive dashboard, including charts and graphs of engagement data.

A Marketing Specialist utilizes the visualization to tailor marketing strategies based on customer interactions.

Given the Marketing Specialist identifies key touchpoints with low engagement, when they select those touchpoints, then the system should provide suggestions for tailored marketing strategies to increase engagement at those critical moments.

Data Integration Framework

"As a Marketing Specialist, I want to seamlessly integrate data from different platforms so that I can have a unified view of customer interactions and make informed decisions about my marketing strategies."

Description

The Data Integration Framework requirement entails building a robust system that connects various data sources, including CRM, website analytics, POS systems, and social media platforms. This framework will ensure that all data regarding customer interactions is aggregated in real-time, providing a comprehensive view of customer behavior. It is critical for the accurate functioning of the Customer Journey Mapping feature since it relies on precise data to map out customer interactions and touchpoints. By streamlining data collection and integration, this requirement will support better decision-making for marketing campaigns and inventory management based on predictive analytics.

Acceptance Criteria

Integration of CRM system data with the Data Integration Framework

Given the CRM system is connected to the Data Integration Framework, when a customer transaction is recorded, then the data must be reflected in the Customer Journey Mapping feature within 5 minutes without discrepancies.

Real-time data synchronization across all platforms

Given that multiple data sources (website analytics, POS systems, social media) are integrated, when any data change occurs in one platform, then it should update in all other platforms in real-time with no delays of more than 2 minutes.

Aggregated view of customer interactions

Given the Data Integration Framework is fully operational, when a Marketing Specialist accesses the Customer Journey Mapping feature, then they should see a comprehensive report of customer interactions spanning at least the last 30 days with no missing data.

Handling of conflicting data from different sources

Given that conflicting data is received from the CRM and social media platforms, when the Data Integration Framework processes the data, then it must apply a defined conflict resolution strategy and display the resolved data accurately in the Customer Journey Mapping feature.

User access and permission settings

Given that multiple users access RetailRevive, when a Marketing Specialist requests access to the Customer Journey Mapping feature, then the Data Integration Framework must enforce access controls, allowing only authorized users to view sensitive customer data.

Campaign Effectiveness Analysis

"As a Marketing Specialist, I want to analyze the effectiveness of my marketing campaigns so that I can understand what works best and adjust my strategies to enhance customer engagement and sales."

Description

The Campaign Effectiveness Analysis requirement involves the creation of a feature that evaluates the performance of marketing campaigns based on customer journey data. It will provide Marketing Specialists with analytics tools that highlight conversion rates, engagement metrics, and ROI for various campaigns. With this feature, users can understand which marketing strategies resonate best with their audience, allowing them to refine their approach and allocate resources more effectively. This requirement is essential for continuous improvement in marketing efforts, ensuring that campaigns are data-driven and aligned with customer behavior patterns.

Acceptance Criteria

Marketing Specialists need to evaluate the performance of their recent email marketing campaign based on the customer journey data gathered over the last quarter.

Given the Marketing Specialist has access to the Campaign Effectiveness Analysis tool, when they select the recent email marketing campaign, then the tool should display conversion rates, engagement metrics, and ROI specific to that campaign accurately.

A Marketing Specialist is preparing for a new campaign and wants to assess the effectiveness of past social media marketing campaigns before finalizing their strategy.

Given the Marketing Specialist is in the Campaign Effectiveness Analysis section, when they filter results by social media campaigns from the last six months, then the tool should generate a report including insights on conversion rates and customer feedback specifically for those campaigns.

A Marketing Specialist needs to present the results of a recent campaign to the executive team, showcasing how customer interactions influenced conversion rates.

Given the Marketing Specialist selects a campaign for presentation, when they generate the Campaign Effectiveness report, then the report should include visual charts showing customer interaction touchpoints correlated with conversion rates for that campaign.

Marketing Specialists want to identify which marketing strategies are underperforming based on customer engagement data.

Given the Marketing Specialist is analyzing data for multiple campaigns, when they access the Campaign Effectiveness Analysis, then they should be able to see a list of campaigns ranked by low conversion rates and engagement metrics clearly labeled.

The Marketing Specialist has implemented changes in their campaign strategy and wants to compare performance before and after the changes.

Given the Marketing Specialist has run two consecutive campaigns with different strategies, when they compare the Campaign Effectiveness Analysis reports of both campaigns side by side, then they should see a clear comparison of conversion rates, engagement metrics, and ROI for both.

Marketing Specialists are utilizing the Campaign Effectiveness Analysis tool to forecast ROI for a future campaign based on historical data.

Given the Marketing Specialist is setting up a new campaign, when they use the forecasting feature in the Campaign Effectiveness Analysis tool, then it should provide a projected ROI based on similar past campaigns' performance data.

Predictive Promotion Insights

Utilize machine learning algorithms to predict which promotions will resonate best with specific customer segments. This feature allows Marketing Specialists to tailor offers based on anticipated customer responses, ultimately driving higher sales conversions and customer satisfaction.

Requirements

Customer Segmentation Analysis

"As a Marketing Specialist, I want to analyze customer purchase behaviors so that I can tailor marketing strategies that effectively engage specific customer segments and increase sales conversions."

Description

This requirement involves developing a robust customer segmentation model that leverages machine learning algorithms to analyze historical purchase data and behavioral patterns. By categorizing customers into distinct segments based on their shopping habits, preferences, and responsiveness to promotions, the platform enables marketing teams to create targeted promotions that resonate with each group. This functionality will enhance the overall effectiveness of marketing campaigns, driving higher sales conversions and improving customer satisfaction by ensuring that the right products and promotions reach the right customers at the right time.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer Segmentation for Seasonal Promotions

Given that a Marketing Specialist has accessed the Customer Segmentation Analysis, when they input historical purchase data for the last year, then the system should categorize customers into at least five distinct segments based on shopping habits and responsiveness to seasonal promotions.

Insights Generation for Targeted Campaigns

Given that the Customer Segmentation Analysis has been completed, when users view the segmentation insights, then they should see actionable recommendations for at least three tailored promotional campaigns for each customer segment.

Update Customer Preferences Based on New Data

Given that new behavioral data has been gathered, when a Marketing Specialist uploads this data into the Customer Segmentation Analysis, then the system should automatically update customer segments within 24 hours to reflect the new information.

Performance Tracking of Promotions

Given that a promotional campaign has been launched targeting a specific customer segment, when the Marketing Specialist reviews the sales data after one month, then they should see an increase in conversion rates for that segment by at least 15% compared to the previous month.

Cross-Selling Opportunities Identification

Given that customer segments have been established, when a Marketing Specialist accesses the Customer Segmentation Analysis, then the system should present at least three relevant cross-selling opportunities tailored for each customer segment.

Visual Representation of Segmentation Analysis

Given that the Customer Segmentation Analysis has processed the data, when a user accesses the insights dashboard, then the system should display a visual representation (charts/graphs) of the segments with clarity and detail necessary for decision-making.

Feedback Loop for Segmentation Model Improvement

Given that the predictive promotions have been executed, when the Marketing Specialist reviews the effectiveness of the promotions, then they should be able to provide feedback that can be integrated into the segmentation model to refine future analyses.

Promotion Performance Dashboard

"As a Marketing Specialist, I want to access a dashboard that shows the performance of my promotions so that I can quickly assess their effectiveness and make informed decisions on future campaigns."

Description

This requirement entails the development of an interactive dashboard to track and visualize the performance of promotional campaigns in real time. It will display key metrics such as conversion rates, customer engagement levels, and revenue uplift generated by various promotions. This feature will allow marketing specialists to evaluate which promotions are performing well and which need adjustment, facilitating data-driven decisions that optimize promotional strategies and improve overall marketing effectiveness. Integration with existing analytics tools and a user-friendly interface will ensure ease of use and quick access to insights.

Acceptance Criteria

Marketing specialists want to visualize the performance of recent promotional campaigns to make data-driven decisions on future promotions.

Given that the marketing specialist accesses the Promotion Performance Dashboard, when they select a particular promotion, then the dashboard should display the conversion rates, customer engagement levels, and revenue uplift associated with that promotion.

A marketing specialist needs to quickly assess which promotions are underperforming to make necessary adjustments.

Given that the marketing specialist is viewing the dashboard, when they filter the data for promotions with conversion rates below a specified threshold, then the dashboard should highlight these promotions distinctly for easy identification.

The company wants to compare the performance of different promotions over time to identify trends and patterns.

Given that the marketing specialist opens the Promotion Performance Dashboard, when they select a date range for analysis, then the dashboard should display historical performance metrics for all relevant promotions within that date range in a graphical format.

Marketing specialists are collaborating remotely and require the ability to share insights from the dashboard with their team seamlessly.

Given that the marketing specialist is viewing the dashboard, when they click on the 'Share' option, then they should be able to generate a shareable link or export the dashboard as a PDF to share with team members.

The company seeks to integrate the Promotion Performance Dashboard with existing analytics tools to streamline data comparison and reporting.

Given that the dashboard is being accessed by the marketing specialists, when they integrate with a specified analytics tool, then the dashboard should pull relevant data from that tool and reflect it accurately in real-time.

Automated Promotion Suggestions

"As a Marketing Specialist, I want to receive automated suggestions for promotions so that I can save time on campaign planning and focus on executing high-impact marketing strategies."

Description

This requirement covers the implementation of an automated recommendation engine that provides Marketing Specialists with suggested promotions based on predictive analytics. Utilizing historical data and customer behavior insights, the system will analyze which promotional strategies have been successful in the past and suggest new ones tailored to current market trends and customer preferences. This feature will save marketers time and effort in conceptualizing campaigns and increase sales by ensuring promotions are relevant and well-timed.

Acceptance Criteria

Automated Promotion Suggestions for Targeted Campaigns

Given a marketing specialist accesses the 'Automated Promotion Suggestions' feature, when they input target customer demographics and past promotional success data, then they should receive tailored promotion suggestions within 5 seconds that include at least three specific promotions ranked by predicted effectiveness.

Validation of Suggested Promotions

Given a set of suggested promotions generated by the system, when a marketing specialist reviews the suggestions, then they must verify that at least 80% of suggestions correlate with successful past promotions and current market trends based on historical data.

User Feedback on Promotion Suggestions

Given a marketing specialist implements a suggested promotion, when they provide feedback on the effectiveness of the promotion after the campaign, then the system should allow them to rate it between 1 to 5 stars and capture comments to improve future suggestions.

Integration with Customer Relationship Management (CRM) Tools

Given that the system provides promotion suggestions, when these suggestions are integrated with existing CRM tools, then the marketing specialists should see the promotions reflected in the CRM system without any data discrepancies or delays.

Real-Time Monitoring of Promotion Performance

Given an active promotional campaign from the suggestions made, when the marketing team checks the analytics dashboard, then they should see real-time performance metrics showing at least three KPIs (e.g., sales conversions, customer engagement, and promotional reach) updated every 10 minutes.

Reporting on Promotional Suggestion Outcomes

Given that several promotions have been implemented based on suggestions, when the marketing team runs a report on these promotions, then the report should include clear visual graphs and statistics showing total sales uplift and customer response rate, available within 24 hours post-campaign.

Customer Feedback Integration

"As a Marketing Specialist, I want to gather customer feedback on promotions so that I can understand their effectiveness and improve future marketing strategies based on customer insights."

Description

This requirement involves integrating customer feedback mechanisms directly into the promotional campaign processes. By collecting customer feedback on promotions through surveys or direct responses after purchases, marketers can gain valuable insights into customer preferences and satisfaction levels. This data will not only enhance future promotion tailoring but also improve customer relationships by demonstrating that the brand values their opinions and is responsive to their needs.

Acceptance Criteria

Integration of Customer Feedback in Promotional Campaigns

Given a promotional campaign is active, when a customer receives a survey post-purchase, then they should be able to submit their feedback easily through a user-friendly interface.

Analysis of Customer Feedback Data

Given customer feedback has been collected, when the Marketing Specialist accesses the feedback analytics dashboard, then they should be able to view insights and trends in customer preferences and satisfaction levels.

Demonstrating Brand Responsiveness to Feedback

Given customer feedback is analyzed, when a customer views their individual feedback response, then they should see that their opinions have contributed to the next promotional campaign's design.

Feedback Submission Confirmation

Given a customer submits their feedback, when they complete the survey, then they should receive a confirmation message thanking them for their input.

Segmentation of Feedback Based on Customer Profiles

Given diverse customer segments exist, when feedback is collected, then the system should categorize responses based on different customer profiles for tailored analysis.

Integration Testing of Feedback Mechanism

Given the customer feedback mechanism is implemented, when tested in a staging environment, then it must capture and store feedback data correctly without loss or errors.

Real-time Feedback Visualization

Given the promotional campaign is running, when feedback comes in, then the Marketing Specialist should see real-time updates on feedback reflected in their analytics dashboard.

Real-time Inventory Adjustments for Promotions

"As a Retail Manager, I want the inventory system to automatically adjust for promotions so that we can ensure product availability and maximize sales during promotional campaigns."

Description

This requirement focuses on ensuring that the inventory management system is updated in real-time to reflect promotions being offered. When a promotion is activated, the system will automatically adjust inventory levels to account for expected sales increases, ensuring that stock levels are optimized and that customers do not encounter out-of-stock scenarios. This functionality will enhance customer satisfaction and prevent lost sales opportunities during promotional periods.

Acceptance Criteria

When a marketing specialist activates a promotion through the RetailRevive platform, they expect the real-time inventory levels to be adjusted according to the anticipated increase in sales based on predictive analytics.

Given a promotion has been successfully activated, When the promotion is applied, Then the inventory levels should reflect a calculated increase based on predicted sales, ensuring no stock-outs occur during the promotion period.

During a promotional period, a customer attempts to purchase a product that is part of the current promotion. The inventory system must ensure that stock amounts are accurately displayed based on real-time updates to avoid customer disappointment.

Given an active promotion, When a customer checks the product's availability, Then the system should show the updated stock level reflecting the anticipated sales adjustments due to the promotion.

The marketing team needs to review the system's historical data to analyze the impact of previous promotions on inventory levels and sales outcomes to plan future promotions effectively.

Given past promotion data is available, When the marketing team requests a report on inventory adjustments and sales performance, Then the report should accurately display the correlation between promotions and inventory changes over the specified period.

A retailer requires immediate updates on inventory levels as products sell during a promotional event, to ensure appropriate stock is maintained and customer satisfaction is preserved.

Given a promotional event is ongoing, When a product is sold, Then the system should immediately adjust the inventory levels in real-time to reflect the current available stock.

After a promotion ends, the retail management team needs to ensure that the inventory levels return to their pre-promotion state, minimizing any discrepancies in stock records.

Given a promotion has concluded, When the promotion is deactivated, Then the system should revert the inventory levels back to the original counts prior to the promotional adjustments.

Multi-Channel Campaign Management

This feature streamlines the process of managing marketing campaigns across multiple platforms, including email, social media, and SMS. By providing a unified dashboard, Marketing Specialists can easily coordinate their personalized messaging efforts, ensuring consistency and maximizing reach across all potential touchpoints.

Requirements

Unified Campaign Dashboard

"As a Marketing Specialist, I want a unified dashboard for managing multi-channel campaigns so that I can ensure consistent brand messaging and easily assess campaign performance across all platforms."

Description

This requirement encompasses the creation of a centralized dashboard that integrates various marketing channels, such as email, social media, and SMS, allowing Marketing Specialists to effectively manage and monitor campaigns from a single interface. The functionality will enable real-time updates on campaign performance, user engagement statistics, and actionable insights, facilitating informed decision-making and strategic adjustments as needed. By streamlining marketing efforts, this dashboard will enhance operational efficiency, drive consistency in messaging, and improve overall campaign success rates, ultimately resulting in higher customer engagement and ROI.

Acceptance Criteria

Marketing Specialist uses the Unified Campaign Dashboard to create and launch a new campaign across email, social media, and SMS platforms seamlessly.

Given the Marketing Specialist is on the Unified Campaign Dashboard, when they select multiple channels and customize their campaign content, then they should be able to launch the campaign simultaneously across all selected channels with a single action.

The Marketing Specialist wants to assess the performance of their ongoing campaigns in real time to make necessary adjustments.

Given the Marketing Specialist is viewing the campaign metrics on the Unified Campaign Dashboard, when they refresh the dashboard, then all metrics including user engagement statistics and performance data should update in real time without the need to reload the page.

A Marketing Specialist is analyzing previous campaign performances to inform their next marketing strategy.

Given the Marketing Specialist is on the campaign history section of the Unified Campaign Dashboard, when they select any previous campaign, then they should be able to view detailed performance analytics including click-through rates, engagement levels, and ROI within 2 seconds.

The Marketing Specialist needs to ensure that the messaging across all channels is consistent to maintain brand integrity.

Given the Marketing Specialist is setting up a new campaign in the Unified Campaign Dashboard, when they input campaign messaging, then the system should highlight any inconsistencies across different channels before the campaign is launched.

The Marketing Specialist requires an overview of all active campaigns to determine their effectiveness at a glance.

Given the Marketing Specialist accesses the Unified Campaign Dashboard, when they look at the dashboard overview, then they should see a visual representation of all active campaigns, including key metrics like reach, engagement, and performance grades clearly displayed at the top of the page.

The Marketing Specialist wants to receive alerts for any underperforming campaigns on the Unified Campaign Dashboard.

Given the Marketing Specialist has defined performance thresholds for their campaigns, when a campaign falls below these thresholds, then the dashboard should automatically send a notification to the Marketing Specialist's inbox or as a pop-up alert on the dashboard.

A Marketing Specialist is attempting to compare the results of different campaigns across channels to determine which strategy is most effective.

Given the Marketing Specialist is on the Unified Campaign Dashboard, when they select two or more campaigns for comparison, then they should be able to visualize side-by-side performance metrics that allow them to draw insights within 3 seconds.

Audience Segmentation Tools

"As a Marketing Specialist, I want audience segmentation tools so that I can deliver personalized marketing messages to different customer groups and improve engagement rates."

Description

This requirement focuses on developing advanced audience segmentation capabilities that allow Marketing Specialists to categorize and target customers based on various criteria, including demographics, behavior, and purchase history. This functionality will enable personalized marketing efforts, ensuring that messages resonate with specific customer groups for better engagement and conversion rates. With intuitive filtering and tagging options, users can quickly create targeted campaigns and maximize their marketing reach and effectiveness.

Acceptance Criteria

As a Marketing Specialist, I need to create an audience segment based on customer demographics so that I can target specific age groups for my campaign.

Given that I have access to the Audience Segmentation Tools, when I apply demographic filters to create a segment for ages 18-34, then I should see a list of customers who meet this criteria, and the total count of customers should be displayed accurately.

As a Marketing Specialist, I want to segment customers based on their purchase history so that I can tailor marketing messages to repeat buyers.

Given that I have access to the purchase history data, when I create a segment targeting customers who have made more than three purchases in the last month, then the system should generate a group that accurately reflects this condition, with the count of customers being displayed correctly.

As a Marketing Specialist, I want to combine multiple segments so that I can target a specific group of customers for a personalized campaign.

Given that I have created a segment for high-value customers and a segment for customers interested in loyalty programs, when I combine these segments, then I should be able to generate a new audience segment that contains only customers who belong to both categories, and the intersection count should match the expected number of customers.

As a Marketing Specialist, I want to utilize behavior-based segmentation so that I can focus campaigns on engaged customers.

Given that I am using the Audience Segmentation Tools, when I filter customers based on criteria such as 'Opened Email Campaigns' in the last three months, then the tool should provide me with a segment that reflects these customers accurately, including their engagement metrics.

As a Marketing Specialist, I need to tag customer segments for easy identification and future use in campaigns.

Given that I have created various audience segments, when I tag a segment as 'Holiday Promotions 2025', then the segment should save the tag successfully and allow me to filter by this tag in the future.

Campaign Performance Analytics

"As a Marketing Specialist, I want campaign performance analytics so that I can measure the success of my marketing efforts and optimize future campaigns based on data-driven insights."

Description

This requirement involves the implementation of comprehensive analytics features that provide insights into the performance of marketing campaigns across different channels. Users will gain access to key performance indicators (KPIs), including open rates, click-through rates, conversion rates, and other relevant metrics. These analytics will help Marketing Specialists evaluate the effectiveness of their campaigns, identify trends, and make data-driven decisions for future marketing strategies, leading to optimized marketing efforts and enhanced customer reach.

Acceptance Criteria

Marketing Specialists need to review comprehensive analytics for a recent multi-channel campaign involving email, social media, and SMS to assess its performance.

Given that a campaign has been executed across multiple channels, when the Marketing Specialist accesses the analytics dashboard, then they should see overall KPIs including open rates, click-through rates, and conversion rates displayed clearly and accurately for each channel.

A Marketing Specialist is preparing for a quarterly review meeting and needs to gather data from past campaigns to present trends and effectiveness.

Given past campaigns have been executed, when the Marketing Specialist selects a specific campaign from the analytics dashboard, then they should be able to export a detailed performance report including trends over time in open rates and click-through rates.

After running a targeted marketing campaign, a Marketing Specialist wants to evaluate the effectiveness of the messaging strategy.

Given that the campaign has completed its duration, when the Marketing Specialist checks the campaign report, then they should be able to see a comparative analysis of message variations and their respective conversion rates clearly indicated on the dashboard.

A Marketing Specialist notices an unexpected drop in engagement rates from one of the channels used in a recent campaign and wants to investigate.

Given the analytics dashboard provides detailed metrics per channel, when the Marketing Specialist filters the metrics by channel, then they should be able to identify specific reasons for the drop, supported by relevant data points such as click-through rates and engagement times.

To optimize future campaigns, the Marketing Specialist needs to analyze the correlation between different channels' performance.

Given multiple campaigns have been executed over time, when the Marketing Specialist views the combined performance metrics report, then they should see a visual representation of channel performance correlation, helping to identify the most effective channel combinations.

A Marketing Specialist needs to ensure that the analytics feature provides real-time metrics updates during an ongoing campaign for timely decision-making.

Given an active campaign is running, when the Marketing Specialist accesses the campaign analytics dashboard, then they should see real-time updates of key performance metrics like engagement rates and conversion rates without needing to refresh the page.

Automated Campaign Scheduling

"As a Marketing Specialist, I want automated campaign scheduling so that I can set up my campaigns in advance and focus more on strategy and content creation rather than manual execution."

Description

This requirement aims to build functionality for automating the scheduling of marketing campaigns across multiple channels. This feature will enable Marketing Specialists to plan their campaigns in advance, set specific launch times, and establish recurring schedules for ongoing promotions. By automating these processes, users can ensure timely and consistent messaging to their audience with minimal manual intervention, ultimately leading to improved operational efficiency and campaign effectiveness.

Acceptance Criteria

Automated Scheduling for Social Media Campaigns

Given a marketing specialist schedules a campaign for a social media post, when the campaign is saved, then the system should automatically draft the post scheduled for the specified date and time and notify the user that the scheduling was successful.

Automated Email Campaign Coordination

Given a marketing specialist creates a recurring email campaign, when the user specifies the frequency and start date, then the system should automatically queue the email for each specified interval without further user intervention.

Handling Overlapping Campaigns

Given two marketing campaigns are scheduled to launch at the same time across different channels, when the user attempts to schedule the second campaign, then the system should alert the user of the conflict and provide options to adjust the scheduling.

Campaign Performance Tracking

Given a campaign has been executed as per the scheduled timing, when the user checks the campaign dashboard, then the system should display metrics such as open rates, click-through rates, and audience engagement for that specific campaign within 24 hours of launch.

User Notification on Schedule Status

Given a marketing campaign is scheduled to launch, when the scheduled time arrives, then the system should send notifications to the marketing specialist confirming the launch and providing a summary of the campaign details.

Integration with Analytics Tools

Given a campaign is scheduled and launched, when the user accesses the analytics dashboard, then the system should automatically sync campaign results with any connected analytics tools within two hours after campaign completion.

Template Reusability for Campaigns

Given a marketing specialist saves a campaign template after scheduling it, when the user selects the template for future campaigns, then the system should populate all relevant fields accurately and allow the user to adjust the schedule as needed.

Cross-Platform Integration

"As a Marketing Specialist, I want cross-platform integration so that I can enhance my marketing campaigns with insights from other tools and improve overall campaign effectiveness."

Description

This requirement focuses on integrating the campaign management feature with other tools and platforms used by retailers, such as CRM systems, e-commerce platforms, and social media services. By enabling seamless data flow and communication between these systems, Marketing Specialists can enrich their campaigns with customer insights and enhance target precision. This integration will foster a unified approach to marketing, ensuring that all team members have access to vital information and insights, facilitating collaboration and consistency in messaging.

Acceptance Criteria

Integration of Campaign Management with CRM Systems

Given a new marketing campaign is created in RetailRevive, when the Marketing Specialist pushes the campaign live, then the campaign details, including target audience and scheduling, should automatically sync with the connected CRM system without any data loss or discrepancies.

Data Flow with E-commerce Platforms

Given a customer makes a purchase on the e-commerce platform, when the order is confirmed, then the campaign management tool should receive real-time updates of the transaction, updating the customer's status in the campaign audience list automatically.

Direct Integration with Social Media Services

Given a marketing campaign is set up targeting specific audience segments, when the campaign is deployed on social media, then the engagement metrics (likes, shares, comments) should be retrieved and displayed correctly in the RetailRevive dashboard within 10 minutes of the campaign going live.

Unified Dashboard for Campaign Insights

Given multiple campaigns are active across different channels, when a Marketing Specialist views the unified dashboard, then they should be able to see consolidated metrics from all platforms, including total reach, engagement, and conversion rates, accurately reflecting the performance of each channel.

User Access and Permissions for Collaboration

Given the need for teams to collaborate on campaigns, when an admin sets up user roles within RetailRevive, then users should have appropriate access permissions to view and edit campaigns based on their designated roles, ensuring data integrity and security.

Real-Time Data Analytics for Target Precision

Given customer insights are loaded from connected platforms, when a Marketing Specialist creates a new campaign, then they should be able to utilize these insights to target specific customer segments effectively and tailor the messaging accordingly.

Error Handling During Integration

Given that data is being synchronized between RetailRevive and connected platforms, when an error occurs in any part of the data flow, then the system should notify the Marketing Specialist with clear instructions on how to resolve the issue, ensuring minimal disruption.

Performance Analytics Dashboard

Introduce a dedicated dashboard that provides detailed insights into the performance of personalized marketing campaigns. This feature enables Marketing Specialists to analyze engagement metrics, conversion rates, and overall effectiveness, allowing for continuous optimization of strategies based on data-driven insights.

Requirements

Campaign Engagement Metrics

"As a Marketing Specialist, I want to view detailed engagement metrics for my marketing campaigns so that I can assess their effectiveness and make data-driven decisions to optimize future marketing strategies."

Description

The Performance Analytics Dashboard will provide a comprehensive analysis of campaign engagement metrics, detailing how users interact with marketing content. This feature will collect data from various sources to highlight key performance indicators such as open rates, click-through rates, and social media interactions. By offering insights into user behavior, it enables Marketing Specialists to identify successful strategies and areas for improvement. The ability to visualize these metrics in an intuitive interface enhances decision-making and allows for targeted marketing adjustments, ultimately leading to higher conversion rates and better return on investment for marketing campaigns.

Acceptance Criteria

User views the Performance Analytics Dashboard to analyze the engagement metrics of a recent marketing campaign.

Given a Marketing Specialist is logged into RetailRevive, when they navigate to the Performance Analytics Dashboard, then they should see a summary of engagement metrics including open rates, click-through rates, and social media interactions for the selected campaign.

A Marketing Specialist wants to compare engagement metrics between two different marketing campaigns.

Given the user has multiple campaigns active, when they select two campaigns from the dashboard, then they should see a comparative analysis of engagement metrics side by side, including visual graphs for each metric.

A Marketing Specialist aims to identify the top-performing marketing channel based on engagement metrics displayed on the dashboard.

Given a user is reviewing the campaign engagement metrics, when they filter the results by channel, then the dashboard should display metrics sorted from highest to lowest based on total engagement.

The Marketing Specialist wants to visualize engagement trends over a specified time period.

Given the user selects a specific date range on the dashboard, when they apply the filter, then the dashboard should display the trend of engagement metrics over that period with appropriate graphical representation.

A Marketing Specialist needs to export engagement metrics for a meeting.

Given a user is on the Performance Analytics Dashboard, when they click on the export button, then a downloadable report in CSV format should be generated containing all relevant engagement metrics for the displayed campaigns.

A Marketing Specialist is interested in real-time updates on campaign performance metrics.

Given the user has multiple campaigns running, when a new engagement event occurs (e.g., a user clicks on a link), then the dashboard should refresh automatically to reflect the latest metrics without requiring a manual refresh.

Conversion Rate Tracking

"As a Marketing Specialist, I want to track conversion rates from my campaigns so that I can identify successful tactics and improve the effectiveness of my marketing efforts."

Description

This requirement entails the integration of a robust conversion rate tracking system within the Performance Analytics Dashboard. It will monitor the percentage of users who complete desired actions after interacting with marketing campaigns, such as making a purchase or signing up for a newsletter. By analyzing conversion trends over time and across different demographics, Marketing Specialists can pinpoint which campaigns yield the highest conversions. This data will empower users to allocate resources more efficiently and refine targeting strategies, optimizing overall marketing performance and driving sales growth.

Acceptance Criteria

Conversion Rate Analysis for a Marketing Campaign

Given a marketing campaign has been launched, when a user clicks on the campaign link and completes a desired action (purchase or signup), then the conversion rate is accurately calculated and displayed on the Performance Analytics Dashboard.

Demographic Data Segmentation

Given that conversion data is collected, when Marketing Specialists filter the dashboard by demographic segments (age, location, etc.), then the conversion rates reflect accurate results specific to each segment.

Real-Time Data Updates

Given that users are actively engaging with the dashboard, when new conversion data is available from marketing campaigns, then the Performance Analytics Dashboard updates in real-time without needing a page refresh.

Campaign Performance Comparison

Given multiple marketing campaigns are tracked, when Marketing Specialists select different campaigns for comparison, then the dashboard displays side-by-side conversion rates for each campaign, allowing for effective performance analysis.

User-Friendly Interface for Data Interpretation

Given the dashboard is presented to users, when a Marketing Specialist views the conversion data, then the information is presented in a clear and understandable format, including visual aids such as graphs and charts.

Historical Trend Analysis

Given that conversion data is collected over time, when a user selects a date range on the dashboard, then the system displays conversion trends for specified campaigns over that period, enabling trend analysis.

Exporting Conversion Reports

Given that the conversion data is available on the dashboard, when a user opts to export the data, then the system generates a report in a specified format (CSV, PDF) with all relevant conversion metrics included.

Customizable Reporting Features

"As a Marketing Specialist, I want to customize my reports on the Performance Analytics Dashboard so that I can focus on the specific metrics that are most relevant to my marketing goals."

Description

This requirement focuses on providing customizable reporting capabilities within the Performance Analytics Dashboard, allowing users to create tailored reports that fit their specific needs. Users will be able to select different metrics, timeframes, and visualization options to generate reports that align with their individual marketing goals. Customizing reports enables Marketing Specialists to track specific KPIs that matter most to their campaigns, facilitating deeper analysis and actionable insights. This flexibility enhances user experience and empowers decision-makers to address unique business questions, improving overall marketing strategy effectiveness.

Acceptance Criteria

Marketing Specialist creates a customized report for a recent campaign to review performance metrics over the last month, selecting specific KPIs like engagement metrics and conversion rates.

Given a Marketing Specialist is logged into the Performance Analytics Dashboard, when they select the 'Custom Reporting' tab, choose metrics for reports, specify a timeframe of one month, and select a visualization type, then the dashboard should generate a report that accurately reflects the selected KPIs and timeframe.

A Marketing Specialist wants to compare the performance of two different campaigns using the customizable reporting feature.

Given a Marketing Specialist is on the Performance Analytics Dashboard, when they select two different campaign metrics for comparison, choose the same timeframe for both campaigns, and generate the report, then the comparison report should display side-by-side performance metrics for each campaign, clearly indicating differences in engagement and conversion rates.

A Marketing Specialist is looking to save a customized report for future access and analysis.

Given a Marketing Specialist has created a customized report, when they click the 'Save Report' option and provide a name for the report, then the report should be saved in their dashboard with the provided name and accessible for future use.

A Marketing Specialist needs to delete an existing custom report that is no longer needed.

Given a Marketing Specialist has existing custom reports in their dashboard, when they select the report they wish to delete and confirm the deletion action, then the report should be permanently removed from their dashboard and no longer accessible.

A Marketing Specialist wants to export a customized report in a specific format for sharing with team members.

Given a Marketing Specialist has generated a customized report, when they select the export option and choose the desired file format (e.g., PDF, Excel), then the report should be downloaded in the selected format without any loss of data or formatting.

A Marketing Specialist wants to schedule automated generation of custom reports to be delivered via email.

Given a Marketing Specialist has created a custom report, when they choose the scheduling option and select a delivery frequency (daily, weekly, monthly) and recipient email addresses, then the system should send the report automatically to the specified recipients at the designated frequency.

Predictive Analytics Integration

"As a Marketing Specialist, I want to integrate predictive analytics into the Performance Analytics Dashboard so that I can better forecast future trends and adapt my marketing strategies accordingly."

Description

The Performance Analytics Dashboard will incorporate predictive analytics capabilities to forecast future trends based on historical data. This integration will analyze past campaign performances to provide insights into potential future engagement rates, conversion trends, and customer behaviors. By leveraging machine learning algorithms, this feature will enable Marketing Specialists to make proactive decisions, anticipate market shifts, and strategically adjust their campaigns. This predictive insight will enhance the overall effectiveness of marketing strategies, allowing users to stay ahead of market demands and optimize resource allocation accordingly.

Acceptance Criteria

Marketing Specialist analyzes past campaign performance to adjust future marketing strategies.

Given historical campaign data is available, when the Marketing Specialist accesses the Performance Analytics Dashboard, then predictive analytics should display forecasted engagement rates and conversion trends for the upcoming quarter.

Marketing Specialist wants to measure the effectiveness of predictive analytics in decision making.

Given the predictive analytics are integrated, when the Marketing Specialist compares actual performance data against forecasts, then the predictions should accurately reflect 85% or higher correlation with actual outcomes.

Marketing Specialist needs to identify customer behavior trends related to specific campaigns.

Given past campaign data is analyzed, when the Marketing Specialist views the predictive analytics dashboard, then it should provide insights on customer segments most likely to convert based on historical interaction data.

Marketing Specialist requires insights for budgeting future marketing campaigns.

Given the predictive analytics functionality, when the Marketing Specialist inputs upcoming campaign parameters (budget, target audience), then the dashboard should provide optimized budget recommendations based on predicted ROI.

Marketing Specialist seeks to enhance campaign effectiveness through personalized strategies.

Given customer engagement history, when the Marketing Specialist utilizes the predictive insights, then the system should recommend at least three personalized marketing strategies likely to yield higher conversion rates.

Marketing Specialist wants to evaluate the predictive capabilities of the dashboard over a defined time frame.

Given a set time frame (e.g., last three months), when the predictive analytics are evaluated, then user feedback should indicate 90% satisfaction with the predictive capabilities of the dashboard.

Marketing Specialist aims to track the accuracy of predictive insights over time.

Given ongoing campaign performance, when the Marketing Specialist reviews the dashboard every month, then it should show a detailed report on the historical accuracy of predictive insights for continuous improvement analyses.

User-friendly Interface Design

"As a Marketing Specialist, I want the Performance Analytics Dashboard to have an intuitive interface so that I can easily navigate and access the data I need without confusion."

Description

This requirement involves creating a user-friendly interface design for the Performance Analytics Dashboard to ensure that Marketing Specialists can easily navigate and utilize the features effectively. This includes simplifying the layout, enhancing visual hierarchies, and ensuring that key metrics are easily accessible. By focusing on usability, the dashboard will cater to a diverse user base, enabling users with varying levels of technical proficiency to interpret data swiftly and efficiently. A well-designed interface enhances user satisfaction and ultimately leads to increased engagement with the dashboard.

Acceptance Criteria

User Friendly Navigation for Marketing Specialists

Given that a Marketing Specialist is logged into the Performance Analytics Dashboard, when they navigate through the dashboard, then they should be able to access all key features within three clicks or less.

Visual Clarity of Performance Metrics

Given that a Marketing Specialist is on the Performance Analytics Dashboard, when they view the performance metrics, then they should be able to clearly distinguish between different metrics through color coding and size differentiation.

Accessibility for Diverse User Proficiencies

Given that a Marketing Specialist with varying levels of technical proficiency is using the Performance Analytics Dashboard, when they engage with any feature, then they should be able to complete at least 90% of tasks without requiring additional technical support.

Responsive Design for All Devices

Given that a Marketing Specialist accesses the Performance Analytics Dashboard from different devices (desktop, tablet, mobile), when they interact with the dashboard, then the layout and features should be fully functional and appropriately formatted on each device type.

Real-time Data Refresh Rate

Given that a Marketing Specialist is viewing the Performance Analytics Dashboard, when they look at engagement metrics, then the data should refresh in real-time or within a maximum of 5 seconds to ensure up-to-date insights.

Intuitive Data Visualization Tools

Given that a Marketing Specialist is analyzing campaign performance on the dashboard, when they utilize the visualization tools (graphs, charts), then the tools should provide clear, actionable insights with one click to switch visualization types.

Feedback Mechanism for Usability Improvement

Given that a Marketing Specialist uses the Performance Analytics Dashboard, when they provide feedback on the user experience, then their feedback should be submitted easily and stored for evaluation, with a confirmation message received after submission.

Unified Communication Interface

This feature provides a centralized dashboard where customer support representatives can access and respond to inquiries from various channels—be it in-store, online, or social media. By streamlining communications into a single interface, users can enhance efficiency, reduce response times, and ensure no customer inquiry is overlooked, ultimately improving overall customer satisfaction.

Requirements

Multi-channel Integration

"As a customer support representative, I want to access all customer inquiries from one dashboard so that I can respond more quickly and efficiently to customer needs, ensuring a seamless experience for the customer."

Description

The requirement involves integrating various communication channels such as email, live chat, social media, and in-store messaging into a single communication interface. This will allow support representatives to manage all customer inquiries efficiently from one centralized dashboard, significantly reducing the time spent toggling between different platforms. The expected outcome is improved response times, enhanced customer satisfaction, and a streamlined workflow for support teams, ultimately leading to better customer engagement and retention.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the Unified Communication Interface and sees notifications for new inquiries from all integrated channels.

Given a support representative is logged in, when new inquiries arrive from any channel, then all notifications should appear in the dashboard within 2 seconds.

Support representative replies to a customer inquiry received from social media through the interface.

Given a support rep selects an inquiry from social media, when they send a response, then the message should be sent and visible in the customer's messaging history within 5 seconds.

A support representative manages inquiries from email and live chat simultaneously during peak hours.

Given a support representative is handling inquiries, when they switch between email and live chat, then the system should load the selected inquiry within 3 seconds without losing previous context.

Customer feedback after using the Unified Communication Interface shows improved satisfaction.

Given that customers responded to a post-interaction survey, when at least 80% of the responses indicate increased satisfaction levels, then the integration will be considered successful.

Integration of notifications from all available communication channels is complete and functioning.

Given that all channels (email, live chat, social media) are integrated, when a new inquiry is received, then at least 95% of notifications should be correctly routed to the support representative's dashboard.

The system handles a high volume of inquiries during promotional events without crashing.

Given that the platform experiences a surge in inquiries during a sale event, when more than 100 inquiries are received simultaneously, then the system should maintain functionality and response times within acceptable limits (under 5 seconds), without any downtime.

Support representatives can access a knowledge base directly through the Unified Communication Interface.

Given a support representative is logged into the dashboard, when they search for an FAQ or help topic, then the relevant articles should be accessible and displayed within 4 seconds.

Real-time Notifications

"As a customer support representative, I want to receive real-time notifications for new customer inquiries so that I can respond immediately and ensure that no customer feels ignored or undervalued."

Description

This requirement focuses on providing real-time notifications for incoming inquiries across all integrated channels. The system should alert support representatives immediately when a new message arrives, enabling them to respond promptly and not miss any critical communication. This will enhance responsiveness to customer questions or issues, leading to improved satisfaction and retention rates. The real-time nature of these notifications also allows for better management of customer expectations and service levels.

Acceptance Criteria

Notification on New Inquiry Received from In-store Customer

Given a customer sends an inquiry from an in-store kiosk, when the inquiry is submitted, then the support representative should receive a real-time notification within 2 seconds on the unified communication interface.

Notification on New Inquiry Received from Online Chat

Given a customer initiates a chat through the company's website, when the chat message is sent, then the support representative should receive a real-time notification within 3 seconds on the unified communication interface.

Notification on New Inquiry Received from Social Media

Given a customer sends a direct message on social media, when the message is received, then the support representative should receive a real-time notification within 3 seconds on the unified communication interface.

Notification Prioritization Based on Inquiry Type

Given an inquiry is received, when a notification is generated, then high-priority inquiries (like complaints) should be visually highlighted, and all notifications should have a timestamp.

Response Acknowledgment for New Inquires

Given a new inquiry notification, when a support representative acknowledges the notification, then the notification should update to reflect it has been viewed and include the representative's name.

Notification Muting Options for Support Representatives

Given the support interface is open, when a representative selects the option to mute notifications, then new inquiry notifications should not appear until re-enabled, allowing for focused response time.

System Performance During High Inquiry Volume

Given a high volume of incoming inquiries, when inquiries are received simultaneously, then all notifications should be delivered to the support representatives without delays exceeding 5 seconds for any channel.

Customizable User Interface

"As a customer support representative, I want to customize my dashboard layout so that I can prioritize my tasks and focus on the inquiries that matter most to me, thus improving my efficiency."

Description

This requirement entails that the communication interface be customizable, allowing users to rearrange, add, or remove widgets according to their preferences. This flexibility will enhance usability and allow representatives to focus on the most relevant tasks without unnecessary distractions. By enabling users to tailor their interface, we aim to improve user satisfaction and efficiency in handling customer requests.

Acceptance Criteria

User rearranges the widgets in the unified communication interface to prioritize customer inquiry channels based on current workflow demands.

Given the user is logged into the unified communication interface, when they drag and drop widgets to rearrange them, then the new widget arrangement should persist across sessions.

A customer support representative adds a new widget for tracking social media inquiries on their dashboard.

Given the user is customizing their interface, when they select the option to add a new widget, then the new widget should appear on the dashboard and be functional for tracking social media inquiries.

A user removes an unnecessary widget from their communication dashboard to declutter their workspace.

Given the user is on the dashboard, when they choose to remove a widget, then the widget should be successfully removed and the space should be adjusted accordingly without errors.

A support agent saves their customized layout for future sessions to maintain consistent workflow.

Given the user has customized their dashboard layout, when they click the 'save' button, then their layout should be saved and restored upon the next login without any discrepancies.

User attempts to restore the default interface after customizing it extensively.

Given the user has made multiple customizations, when they select the 'restore default' option, then the interface should revert to the original default layout without retaining any custom changes.

User adjusts the size of a widget to accommodate their viewing preferences for specific information.

Given the user is viewing the dashboard, when they resize a widget, then the content within the widget should adjust appropriately, maintaining readability and functionality.

Historical Data Tracking

"As a customer support representative, I want to access historical records of previous inquiries so that I can provide informed responses and enhance the quality of service I deliver to customers."

Description

The historical data tracking requirement involves enabling the system to log all communication interactions and inquiries over time. This data will be accessible for support representatives to review prior conversations, enabling them to handle customer inquiries with more context. This feature will not only reduce the chances of repeat inquiries but also help in identifying trends in customer issues and improving service performance based on past interactions.

Acceptance Criteria

Support representatives are using the Unified Communication Interface to handle customer inquiries during peak shopping hours.

Given a support representative opens the dashboard, when they access the historical communication log, then they should see a list of the last 50 inquiries recorded across all channels with timestamps and customer details.

A customer contacts support through social media asking for follow-up on a previous issue regarding an order.

Given the support representative knows the customer name, when they search the historical data for communications related to that customer, then all relevant interactions should be displayed within 5 seconds for reference.

A support representative is reviewing the historical data to identify trends in customer complaints over the last month.

Given the representative accesses the analytics tool within the Unified Communication Interface, when they filter data for the past 30 days, then they should see a summary of the top 5 issues reported by customers along with the frequency of each issue.

During a conversation with a customer, the support representative recalls a previous interaction to provide a personalized response.

Given a customer is discussing an issue, when the representative pulls up the historical communication log, then they should be able to see the context of past conversations, including solutions provided and customer feedback in under 3 clicks.

A customer service manager reviews interactions to ensure compliance and identify areas for improvement.

Given the manager uses the historical data tracking, when they generate a report on interactions for a specific period, then the report should include metrics on response times, resolution rates, and customer satisfaction ratings for the reviewed period.

Customer support is implementing a new training program based on previous customer inquiries and interactions.

Given the support team is prepared to begin training, when they analyze historical data over the last quarter, then they should identify at least three key training topics based on the most frequently raised customer issues.

Performance Analytics Dashboard

"As a customer support manager, I want to see performance analytics on our customer interactions so that I can assess team performance and implement improvements where necessary to enhance our support quality."

Description

This requirement specifies the development of an analytics dashboard that aggregates performance data regarding response times, customer satisfaction ratings, and inquiry volumes. By offering insights through visual metrics and trend analysis, support teams can evaluate their performance and identify areas for improvement. Such a tool will help managers with staffing decisions, training needs, and tracking the overall effectiveness of customer service initiatives.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer support representatives access the Performance Analytics Dashboard to analyze the response times and customer satisfaction ratings post-inquiry within the first week of its deployment.

Given the Performance Analytics Dashboard is implemented, when a support representative accesses the dashboard, then they should see aggregated data for response times and customer satisfaction ratings for the past week, displayed in a user-friendly format.

A customer support manager reviews the Performance Analytics Dashboard weekly to identify trends in inquiry volumes and adjust staffing decisions accordingly.

Given the dashboard is live, when the manager views the inquiry volume metrics, then they should be able to filter by time period and identify peak inquiry volumes to make informed decisions about staffing needs.

During a team meeting, support staff present findings from the Performance Analytics Dashboard to highlight areas of improvement in customer service.

Given the Performance Analytics Dashboard provides data insights, when any team member presents data, then the presentation should include visual metrics showing performance trends over the last month, with clear indications of areas needing improvement.

A customer support representative uses the Performance Analytics Dashboard to prepare for a quality assurance review by demonstrating knowledge of their response times and customer satisfaction ratings.

Given the dashboard is functional, when the representative accesses their personal metrics, then they should be able to view their individual response time statistics and customer satisfaction ratings clearly referenced against team averages.

The support team analyzes data from the Performance Analytics Dashboard to track the effectiveness of recent training initiatives aimed at improving response times.

Given the analytics dashboard displays historical data, when the team analyzes response times before and after training, then they should observe a measurable improvement in response times in the subsequent month after the training session.

A usability test is conducted on the Performance Analytics Dashboard to ensure that it is user-friendly for support representatives with varying levels of technical expertise.

Given the dashboard is in use, when diverse users test the dashboard, then at least 80% of participants should indicate that they find the interface easy to navigate and understand the displayed metrics without additional help.

Support representatives receive notifications of major changes in customer satisfaction ratings as indicated on the Performance Analytics Dashboard, allowing them to act promptly.

Given the Performance Analytics Dashboard is active, when there is a significant drop in customer satisfaction ratings, then an automatic notification should be sent to all support representatives immediately so they can address the issues.

Customer Interaction History

Equip support representatives with an integrated history of customer interactions across all channels. This feature enables representatives to provide personalized service by recalling past inquiries, purchase history, and preferences. Understanding the customer’s journey strengthens relationships and enhances the ability to resolve issues swiftly and effectively.

Requirements

Integrated Customer Interaction Log

"As a support representative, I want to access an integrated history of all customer interactions so that I can provide personalized and efficient service, addressing their needs based on previous engagements."

Description

The Integrated Customer Interaction Log requirement mandates the development of a comprehensive database that retains records of all customer interactions across various channels, including emails, chats, phone calls, and in-store visits. This log should be easily accessible to support representatives in real-time, allowing them to quickly pull up prior communications and customer history. The functionality not only assists in delivering personalized customer service but also streamlines the support process, enabling faster issue resolution and enhancing the overall customer experience. As a result, this requirement will help strengthen customer relationships by allowing support staff to engage in informed conversations based on past interactions, thus driving satisfaction and loyalty.

Acceptance Criteria

Support representative handling a customer inquiry about a previous purchase during a phone call.

Given a support representative is on a call with a customer, when the representative accesses the Integrated Customer Interaction Log, then they should see the customer's complete interaction history including past purchases, inquiries, and preferences, displayed in chronological order.

Support representative resolving a customer complaint related to a past in-store visit.

Given a support representative has a customer's details, when they review the Integrated Customer Interaction Log, then they should find all relevant records of the customer's in-store visit, including notes from the visit and any follow-up actions taken, readily available within 5 seconds.

Customer requesting information on a recent product inquiry sent via email.

Given a support representative is responding to an email inquiry, when they access the Integrated Customer Interaction Log, then they should find the email timestamped with the customer’s inquiry and relevant details clearly displayed for swift response.

Support team conducting a weekly review of frequent customer issues.

Given support representatives need to identify common issues among customers, when they analyze data from the Integrated Customer Interaction Log, then they should be able to generate a report showcasing the most common inquiries and complaints across customers in under 10 minutes.

A customer asks about their unresolved issues while chatting with support.

Given a support representative is engaged in a live chat with a customer, when they pull up the Integrated Customer Interaction Log, then they should see all unresolved issues for that customer within 3 clicks, allowing for informed and efficient assistance.

Advanced Search Functionality

"As a support representative, I want an advanced search feature that enables me to find customer interaction histories efficiently so that I can respond to inquiries with speed and precision."

Description

The Advanced Search Functionality requirement is focused on implementing an intuitive and efficient search system that allows support representatives to quickly locate customer interaction histories using various filters such as date ranges, interaction types, and customer segments. This feature is critical for enhancing the speed and efficiency of customer support operations, ensuring that representatives can swiftly find relevant information and respond to customer inquiries without unnecessary delays. Additionally, the search should support keyword recognition to enhance user experience and reduce lookup time, thereby optimizing the overall service engagement process and elevating customer satisfaction levels.

Acceptance Criteria

Support representative uses the Advanced Search Functionality to retrieve a customer interaction history for a specific customer based on their last purchase date.

Given a support representative is on the customer profile page, when they enter the date range for the last purchase in the search filter and click 'Search', then the system should display all interactions within the specified date range.

A support representative wants to filter customer interactions by interaction type to assist a customer with a specific issue.

Given the search functionality is available, when the representative selects 'Email' as the interaction type and clicks 'Search', then only the interactions of that type should be displayed for the customer.

The support team needs to conduct a follow-up with customers who have made inquiries about a specific product.

Given a product name is entered in the search box, when the representative clicks 'Search', then the system should display all customer interactions related to that product across all customers.

A representative wants to quickly access a customer's interaction history to resolve a current support inquiry.

Given the representative has the customer's ID, when they enter the ID in the search field and press 'Enter', then the system should return the customer's complete interaction history in less than 3 seconds.

A support representative attempts to locate interactions from the past six months that required escalation.

Given the representative is on the Advanced Search page, when they set the date range to the last six months and check the 'Escalated' checkbox, then the system should return only escalated interactions within that date range.

The representative needs to find all customer interactions from a specific segment for reporting.

Given the segment is selected from the dropdown menu and the representative clicks 'Search', then the system should display all interactions pertaining to that selected segment.

A representative is searching for interactions but uses a keyword related to a customer's urgency.

Given a keyword related to urgency is entered into the search field, when the representative clicks 'Search', then the system should highlight all relevant interactions containing that keyword in the results.

Real-time Interaction Notifications

"As a support representative, I want to receive real-time notifications of customer interactions so that I can stay informed and respond quickly to customer needs as they occur."

Description

The Real-time Interaction Notifications requirement is designed to deliver immediate updates to support representatives about recent customer interactions and inquiries via push notifications or alerts. This functionality is essential for maintaining an up-to-date view of customer requests and ensuring that support staff can prioritize ongoing tasks effectively. By receiving real-time notifications, representatives are empowered to engage customers proactively, addressing any issues as they arise and enhancing operational responsiveness. The implementation of this feature will significantly aid in mitigating response times and improving overall customer support efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria

Real-time interaction notifications are successfully triggered when a customer submits a new inquiry via the support chat feature.

Given a customer submits a new inquiry through the support chat, When the support representative checks their notifications, Then they should see an alert indicating a new inquiry from the customer including the customer's details and inquiry timestamp.

Support representatives receive notifications when a customer's ticket status is updated.

Given a customer updates their existing ticket through email or chat, When the ticket status changes, Then all relevant support representatives should receive a notification with the updated ticket status and details within 3 seconds of the change.

Real-time interaction notifications must provide information about previous customer interactions for context.

Given a support representative receives a notification for a new customer inquiry, When they view the notification details, Then the notification should include the last 3 interactions the customer had with the support team.

Notifications must maintain a log of all interactions for compliance and follow-up purposes.

Given that a support representative has received multiple notifications about customer interactions, When they access the interaction log, Then they should be able to view all notifications received over the past 30 days.

The system should allow customization of notification settings for each support representative.

Given that a support representative wants to customize their notification preferences, When they access the settings menu, Then they should be able to enable or disable notifications for specific types of interactions (e.g., inquiries, ticket updates) and receive confirmation of the changes made.

Notifications should be delivered in real-time without significant delay to improve response times.

Given that a new customer inquiry is submitted, When the notification is triggered, Then the notification should reach the support representative's device within 5 seconds or less.

Customer Preference Insights

"As a support representative, I want access to insights on customer preferences so that I can personalize my interactions and better meet the individual needs of my customers."

Description

The Customer Preference Insights requirement focuses on developing analytical tools that compile and present critical insights regarding customer preferences and behaviors based on previous interactions and transactions. By leveraging data analytics, the system will identify patterns in customer behavior, such as preferred communication channels and buying habits, allowing support representatives to tailor their engagement strategies effectively. This requirement is pivotal in driving personalized marketing initiatives and creating customer-centric service models that enhance customer relationships and foster loyalty by addressing individual needs and expectations.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer support representative accesses a customer's interaction history to respond to an inquiry about a recent purchase.

Given a customer has a recorded purchase, when the support representative looks up the customer using their profile, then the interaction history and purchase details are displayed accurately.

During a customer interaction, the representative uses insights from the customer's preferences to recommend relevant products.

Given the customer preference insights are available, when a support representative consults the analytics while engaging with a customer, then the system suggests at least three personalized product recommendations based on past purchasing habits.

A customer reaches out via email, and the representative uses historical interaction data to respond efficiently.

Given the previous interaction data is integrated, when a customer sends an email inquiry, then the representative can view the complete communication history with timestamps before responding, ensuring an informed reply.

The system generates a report of customer engagement metrics over the last quarter based on interaction history.

Given the analytics tool is functioning, when the manager requests a report for the last quarter, then the system generates a detailed report indicating trends in customer engagement, including preferred channels and interaction frequency.

A new support representative uses the customer preference insights dashboard for the first time to handle a customer call.

Given the support representative is trained, when they open the dashboard during a call, then they can view customer preference insights and historical interactions without any errors or delays.

A customer updates their communication preferences via the website, which is reflected in the representative's interaction view.

Given a customer updates their preferences, when the representative looks up the customer within five minutes, then the updated preferences are visible in the customer's interaction history.

Mobile Access for Support Representatives

"As a support representative, I want mobile access to customer interaction histories so that I can assist customers efficiently, regardless of my physical location."

Description

The Mobile Access for Support Representatives requirement entails developing a mobile-friendly interface that allows support staff to access customer interaction histories and relevant tools from their smartphones or tablets. This capability is crucial for enabling flexible and remote customer service, particularly in today's fast-paced retail environment. By ensuring that representatives can engage with customers on-the-go, this feature will enhance responsiveness and extend support capabilities beyond traditional office setups, ultimately improving customer satisfaction and loyalty through seamless service delivery.

Acceptance Criteria

Support representatives are in a busy retail environment and need to assist a customer who is inquiring about a recent order using their mobile device.

Given the support representative has logged into the mobile application, when they search for the customer's order using their email address, then the order details should be displayed including status, delivery date, and items purchased.

A support representative receives a call from a customer while on a sales floor and needs to provide information about previous interactions with the customer to offer tailored assistance.

Given the support representative accesses the customer interaction history via the mobile application, when they view the history, then all previous inquiries and support interactions for that customer should be listed chronologically with timestamps.

The support representative is traveling and needs to respond to a customer's query via chat while on the move, utilizing their mobile device to access necessary information.

Given the support representative is in the mobile application, when they respond to the chat inquiry, then the response should include relevant details from the customer's account and interaction history without delays in loading time.

A support representative wants to check a customer's loyalty points history while assisting them to encourage a purchase using their mobile device.

Given the support representative is logged in to the mobile application, when they access the loyalty program section for the customer, then the current loyalty points and recent transactions should be visible and accurate.

A support representative is assisting a customer who has a technical issue and needs to access troubleshooting guides from their mobile device while interacting with the customer.

Given the support representative is using the mobile application, when they search for troubleshooting articles related to the customer's issue, then the relevant articles and solutions should be presented for selection immediately.

The support representative has completed a customer interaction and wants to log notes about the conversation using their mobile device before moving on to the next customer.

Given the support representative is in the mobile application, when they finish a conversation and record notes in the customer's profile, then the notes should be saved successfully and accessible for future reference within seconds.

The support representative needs to escalate a customer's unresolved issue while providing service on the go and should be able to create a follow-up ticket from their mobile device.

Given the representative is in the mobile application, when they select the option to escalate an issue, then a new ticket should be created with the customer's details and issue description, and confirmation of ticket creation should be shown immediately.

Feedback Loop System

Incorporate a system for capturing real-time customer feedback within the hub. This feature enables representatives to easily collect and analyze customer sentiments during or after interactions. By actively gathering feedback, businesses can identify service gaps and areas for improvement, fostering a culture of continuous enhancement in customer service.

Requirements

Real-time Feedback Collection

"As a customer service representative, I want to capture real-time feedback from customers so that I can understand their sentiments and improve our service quality."

Description

This requirement entails implementing a system that enables customer service representatives to collect real-time feedback from customers during and after their interactions. The feedback system should be user-friendly, allowing for quick input via various channels, such as chat, email, or in-person surveys. The goal is to gather valuable customer insights that can be analyzed to identify trends, customer satisfaction levels, and areas needing improvement. Integration with the existing CRM tools within RetailRevive will ensure that feedback data is easily accessible and actionable, ultimately leading to enhanced customer experiences and refined service offerings.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer service representatives interacting with a customer through chat, asking for feedback on their shopping experience at the end of the chat session.

Given a customer has completed a chat session, when the representative sends a feedback request, then the customer should receive a feedback form immediately.

A customer completes a purchase in-store and is prompted via an email to provide feedback on their shopping experience shortly after.

Given a customer has made a purchase, when the email feedback request is sent within 30 minutes of purchase, then the customer should receive a survey link successfully.

Service representatives want to analyze customer feedback data collected over the past month to identify trends.

Given feedback data has been collected, when a representative accesses the analytics dashboard within the CRM, then they should be able to view summarized insights and trends in customer satisfaction levels over that month.

The feedback system must support different input methods for customers, including easy access via a mobile app, web browser, or a physical kiosk in-store.

Given a customer wishes to provide feedback, when they access the feedback system through any of the supported channels, then they should be able to submit feedback within 3 clicks or interactions.

A customer representative conducts a follow-up call after a customer submits feedback to address issues raised.

Given a customer has submitted feedback indicating a service issue, when the follow-up call is made within 48 hours of feedback submission, then the representative should accurately address the customer's concern and log the outcome in the CRM system.

Management wants to ensure customer feedback response time is minimized across all channels.

Given the feedback collection system is in operation, when a feedback request is sent, then the average response time from customers should be tracked and should not exceed 24 hours.

Feedback Analytics Dashboard

"As a business owner, I want to view an analytics dashboard of customer feedback so that I can quickly identify trends and make informed decisions to enhance service quality."

Description

This requirement focuses on the development of an analytics dashboard that aggregates and visualizes customer feedback data collected through the real-time feedback collection system. The dashboard should provide insights into customer satisfaction scores, sentiment analysis, and trends over time. By employing advanced analytics techniques, it should allow businesses to identify service gaps and prioritize areas for improvement. Data visualization tools should be included to facilitate easy interpretation of complex feedback results. Integration with existing reporting tools within RetailRevive ensures seamless access to actionable insights, thus promoting data-driven decision-making.

Acceptance Criteria

Feedback Loop System Integration with Dashboard

Given a customer has provided feedback through the feedback loop system, when the feedback is submitted, then it should be instantly reflected on the Feedback Analytics Dashboard with relevant metrics.

Customer Sentiment Analysis Visualization

Given the feedback collected over the past month, when the data is analyzed, then the dashboard should display a sentiment analysis chart that clearly indicates positive, negative, and neutral sentiments.

Trends Over Time Display

Given customer feedback data for the last three months, when accessing the dashboard, then the trend analysis feature should show a line graph displaying customer satisfaction scores over time with clear indicators of significant changes.

Integration with Reporting Tools

Given that the Feedback Analytics Dashboard is operational, when a user selects the report generation option, then it should successfully export data into existing reporting tools without any errors.

Identification of Service Gaps

Given collected customer feedback data, when the analytics are processed, then the dashboard should highlight at least three service gaps that need immediate attention based on customer ratings below a set threshold.

User Access and Permissions

Given different user roles in RetailRevive, when accessing the dashboard, then roles with permission should be able to view and interact with the customer feedback data, while restricted roles see only summary metrics.

Mobile Compatibility of the Dashboard

Given a user accesses the Feedback Analytics Dashboard from a mobile device, when the dashboard is loaded, then it should be fully functional and visually optimized for mobile interface usage.

Automated Feedback Follow-up

"As a customer, I want to receive a follow-up after I provide feedback so that I feel valued and know that my opinions matter to the company."

Description

This requirement involves creating an automated follow-up mechanism that triggers personalized responses to customers who have submitted feedback. The system should acknowledge receipt of feedback and, where appropriate, offer resolutions or further engagement opportunities, such as a follow-up call or email. This feature is crucial for demonstrating to customers that their opinions are valued and taken seriously, which can enhance customer loyalty and satisfaction. Integration with the CRM will ensure that follow-up actions are personalized based on customer history and feedback context, fostering stronger customer relationships.

Acceptance Criteria

Automated feedback follow-up is triggered immediately after a customer submits their feedback through the RetailRevive platform.

Given a customer submits feedback, When the submission is completed, Then an automated acknowledgment email is sent to the customer within 5 minutes.

The automated follow-up mechanism generates personalized responses based on customer feedback and history.

Given a customer with a purchase history submits feedback, When the feedback reference is analyzed, Then the follow-up email includes personalized recommendations relevant to the customer's previous purchases.

Customers are offered an engagement opportunity within the follow-up communication based on their feedback type.

Given a customer submits a complaint, When the automated follow-up is generated, Then the communication includes an option for a follow-up call or to schedule a meeting with customer service within 24 hours.

The feedback follow-up mechanism is integrated with the existing CRM to enhance personalized interactions.

Given a feedback submission, When the automated response is drafted, Then the system retrieves customer history from the CRM and tailors the message accordingly.

A reporting tool displays metrics related to the effectiveness of the automated feedback follow-up system.

Given the automated feedback follow-up system is in operation, When metrics are reviewed in the reporting tool, Then the system should show at least a 30% increase in positive customer sentiment from feedback collected after follow-ups compared to the previous quarter.

The system allows for customer feedback on the follow-up process itself to ensure continuous improvement.

Given a follow-up communication is sent, When the customer receives the follow-up, Then they should have the option to provide feedback regarding their follow-up experience within the communication.

Dynamic Feedback Templates

"As a customer service manager, I want to customize feedback templates for different scenarios so that I can maximize the relevance of collected feedback and improve response rates."

Description

This requirement entails the creation of customizable feedback templates that can be used by customer service representatives to solicit specific information tailored to various interaction scenarios. These templates should be adaptable based on customer type, interaction context, and feedback goals, ensuring relevance and higher response rates. The ability to customize templates will enhance data quality and improve the overall customer feedback process. Integration with the feedback collection system within RetailRevive allows for seamless usage of these templates in real-time, reinforcing effective communication between representatives and customers.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer Service Representative utilizes a dynamic feedback template during a live chat interaction with a customer to gather real-time feedback about their experience.

Given the representative has access to various feedback templates, when they select the 'Live Chat Feedback' template and start a chat, then the template should display relevant questions tailored for live interactions with at least 80% clarity and relevance to the context.

Customer Service Representative customizes a feedback template based on the customer type (e.g., new vs. returning customer) before sending it out after a service interaction.

Given the representative selects the 'Returning Customer' template, when they customize it by adding two specific questions related to loyalty programs, then the feedback request generated must include the additional questions and maintain a professional format.

A customer receives a feedback request via email after a purchase, utilizing the template designed for post-purchase interactions.

Given the customer received the email with the feedback link, when they click on the link and fill out the survey, then the submitted feedback should save correctly in the customer's profile with a timestamp and be identifiable by the template used.

Customer feedback collected through different templates is analyzed for sentiment trends within the Customer Relationship Management system.

Given various feedback responses have been collected over a month, when the analytics tool is used to assess sentiment trends, then the system should generate a report highlighting at least three key areas of customer satisfaction and dissatisfaction based on the selected templates.

A manager reviews the effectiveness of feedback templates by checking response rates over a defined period.

Given multiple feedback templates have been used for customer interactions, when the manager retrieves the response rate report, then they should see a clearly defined metric demonstrating response rates for each template, with at least 75% of templates showing a response rate of over 10% within the last quarter.

Customer Service Representatives utilize templates to gather feedback after resolving customer issues in the support ticket system.

Given a ticket is marked as resolved, when the representative sends a feedback request using the 'Post Support Ticket' template, then the customer should receive the request within 5 minutes of ticket resolution and have an accurate and tailored set of questions specific to their issue.

Feedback Alerts and Notification System

"As a customer service leader, I want to receive alerts about critical feedback trends so that my team can respond quickly to emerging service issues."

Description

This requirement focuses on implementing an alert and notification system that informs relevant team members of significant customer feedback trends or emerging issues in real-time. The system should allow users to set thresholds for feedback scores or comments that require immediate attention, ensuring that critical issues are addressed promptly. This proactive approach can help mitigate negative customer experiences and facilitate faster resolutions, enhancing overall service quality. Integration with communication tools within RetailRevive will ensure timely alerts reach the right personnel without delay.

Acceptance Criteria

Real-time customer feedback capture during service interactions.

Given a customer interaction occurs, when feedback is provided by the customer, then the Feedback Alerts and Notification System should capture and log the feedback immediately.

Setting thresholds for feedback alerts.

Given a user wants to set feedback thresholds, when they specify a threshold value for high priority feedback, then the system should save this threshold and apply it to monitor incoming feedback.

Receiving notifications for critical feedback trends.

Given a significant change in customer feedback scores above the set threshold, when this occurs, then the relevant team members should receive an immediate notification via the integrated communication tools.

Analyzing customer feedback trends over time.

Given the Feedback Alerts and Notification System is in use, when a user accesses the feedback dashboard, then they should see a visual representation of feedback trends over a defined time period.

Identifying service gaps based on feedback metrics.

Given multiple feedback comments have been collected, when a user runs a report on feedback sentiments, then the system should highlight areas with consistently low ratings as service gaps.

Ensuring timely alerts reach appropriate personnel.

Given a critical feedback issue arises, when an alert is generated, then it should be sent to the designated personnel's email and messaging app within one minute of detection.

Integrating feedback alerts with existing communication tools.

Given a user wants to use external communication tools, when they configure the notification settings, then the system should allow integration with at least three specified communication platforms (e.g., Slack, email, SMS).

Automated Response Suggestions

Leverage AI-driven suggestions for common customer inquiries that appear in the hub. This feature assists customer support representatives by providing instant, preconfigured responses or solutions to frequently asked questions. This tool accelerates response times and ensures that customers receive quick, accurate information, thereby improving the efficiency of customer support.

Requirements

AI Response Suggestions

"As a customer support representative, I want AI-driven response suggestions for common customer inquiries so that I can provide faster and more accurate responses to customers, improving their overall experience and reducing my workload."

Description

This requirement focuses on integrating AI algorithms to analyze common customer inquiries and generate instant, preconfigured response suggestions for support representatives. By deploying natural language processing, the system will identify keywords and patterns in inquiries to present tailored responses, optimizing the efficiency of customer support interactions. This feature aims to reduce the average response times, enhance customer satisfaction by providing timely information, and improve overall productivity of support agents, allowing them to focus on more complex inquiries. The AI will continuously learn from interactions to improve response suggestions over time, thus adapting to changing customer needs and inquiries. Developing this integration involves ensuring seamless compatibility with the existing customer support hub and updating user interfaces to display these suggestions effectively.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer Support Interaction with AI Response Suggestions

Given a customer support representative receives a common inquiry, when they access the support hub, then they should see at least three AI-generated response suggestions relevant to the inquiry within two seconds.

Real-time Learning from Customer Interactions

Given that the AI has processed at least 100 customer inquiries, when a new similar inquiry is received, then the AI should provide a refined response suggestion that demonstrates improved accuracy over previous responses as measured by a feedback score from representatives.

User Interface Display of AI Suggestions

Given the implementation of the AI response suggestions, when a customer support representative opens a customer inquiry, then the suggestions should be clearly displayed in a designated area of the user interface, ensuring they are visible without scrolling or additional clicks.

Performance Measurement of Response Times

Given the integration of AI response suggestions, when measuring the average response time of customer support representatives in the month following implementation, then the response time should decrease by at least 20% compared to the month prior to the integration.

Feedback Loop for AI Improvement

Given an established feedback mechanism, when support representatives rate the usefulness of AI suggestions after each interaction, then the AI system should incorporate this feedback to enhance its suggestion accuracy at least once every two weeks.

Integration Compatibility with Existing Systems

Given the existing customer support hub setup, when the AI response suggestions feature is implemented, then there should be no disruptions in service, and all existing functionalities should operate as intended with an uptime of 99% during the first month post-launch.

User Training and Feedback Collection

Given the rollout of the AI response suggestions feature, when customer support representatives undergo training, then at least 80% of them should report comfort and proficiency in using the new feature within two weeks of training completion.

Customizable Response Templates

"As a customer support representative, I want to customize response templates for frequently asked questions so that I can provide tailored, consistent, and on-brand answers to customers, enhancing their satisfaction and trust in our service."

Description

This requirement involves creating a feature where customer support representatives can customize and manage response templates for frequent inquiries. Users will have the ability to edit, save, and categorize these templates, ensuring that common questions receive consistent and brand-aligned responses. By allowing customization, representatives can adapt the responses to better fit specific situations or customer tones, enhancing the personalized touch in customer service. This supports the goal of better aligning responses with the brand voice and can improve the overall customer experience. The implementation will also include a user-friendly interface for template management and training materials on best practices for using customizable templates effectively.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer support representatives use customizable response templates to reply to frequently asked questions in a consistent manner.

Given that a support representative is logged into the RetailRevive platform, when they navigate to the customizable response templates section, then they should see an option to create a new template, edit existing templates, and categorize them as needed.

A customer support representative modifies an existing response template to better suit a specific customer inquiry during a live chat session.

Given that a response template exists for a common query, when the representative edits the template and saves the changes, then the updated template should reflect immediately in the system and be available for future use.

Training materials are utilized by customer support representatives to learn how to effectively use the customizable response templates feature.

Given that training materials have been provided, when a representative completes the training, then they should demonstrate the ability to create, edit, and categorize response templates efficiently in a mock scenario.

Customizable response templates are categorized to allow representatives to quickly find the appropriate template for various customer inquiries.

Given that templates are categorized, when a representative searches for a template by category, then they should be able to filter and view all templates under that specific category.

Customer feedback is collected after using the customizable response templates to assess their effectiveness.

Given that the representatives have used the templates, when customer feedback is gathered, then at least 80% of responding customers should indicate satisfaction with the speed and accuracy of the support they received.

The system tracks modifications made by support representatives to the response templates.

Given that changes are made to a template, when a support representative saves the changes, then the system should log the modification with a timestamp and the user who made the change for auditing purposes.

Feedback Mechanism for Response Improvement

"As a customer support representative, I want to provide feedback on AI-generated response suggestions so that I can help improve the quality and relevance of the suggestions to better assist my customers."

Description

This requirement outlines the need for a feedback mechanism that allows customer support representatives to provide input on the AI-generated response suggestions. By enabling agents to rate, comment on, and indicate the effectiveness of the suggestions, the system can use this data to refine and enhance the accuracy of future suggestions. This continuous feedback loop will be essential for improving response quality and ensuring the AI adapts effectively to real-world usage and scenarios. This requirement emphasizes the importance of user-driven insights in enhancing the AI's performance, leading to better customer interactions and support outcomes.

Acceptance Criteria

Feedback Mechanism User Interaction

Given a customer support representative is interacting with the AI suggestions, when they rate a suggested response, then the rating is recorded in the feedback system and can be retrieved for analysis.

Comment Submission for Improvement

Given a support representative wishes to provide qualitative feedback, when they submit a comment on a response suggestion, then the comment is associated with the correct suggestion and stored for review.

Effectiveness Indication by Support Agents

Given that a support representative has utilized an AI suggestion, when they indicate the effectiveness of that suggestion, then the system should update the suggestion's status based on this feedback for future improvement.

Access to Historical Feedback Data

Given a manager wants to review feedback trends on AI suggestions, when they access the feedback reports, then they should be able to view data on ratings and comments over time for all suggestions.

Automated Suggestion Refinement

Given aggregated feedback data is analyzed, when the system identifies a suggestion that consistently receives low ratings, then it automatically triggers a review process to refine the suggestion.

User Training on Feedback Usage

Given new customer support representatives are onboarded, when they complete a training session, then they should demonstrate proficiency in using the feedback system to evaluate AI suggestions.

Feedback Acknowledgment Notifications

Given a support representative submits feedback on an AI suggestion, when the feedback is recorded, then the representative receives a confirmation notification acknowledging their input.

Cross-Channel Analytics

Enable detailed analytics tracking across all customer engagement channels. This feature provides insights into customer behavior, service patterns, and interaction effectiveness. By analyzing performance data, businesses can refine their strategies, optimize resource allocation, and tailor customer service approaches to meet evolving customer needs.

Requirements

Omni-Channel Data Integration

"As a retailer, I want to integrate analytics from all my customer engagement channels so that I can understand customer journey patterns and optimize my marketing strategies accordingly."

Description

This requirement focuses on the seamless integration of data from various customer engagement channels including online, in-store, social media, and mobile apps. It allows the system to consolidate analytics from these diverse touchpoints, enabling retailers to gain a holistic view of customer interactions. By aggregating data sources, businesses can better understand customer journey patterns, preferences, and behaviors, leading to informed decision-making and improved marketing strategies. This integration not only enhances data accuracy but also supports personalized customer engagement initiatives, ensuring that retailers can effectively meet the demands of their consumers across all platforms.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer engages with the brand through multiple channels during their shopping journey, starting from online browsing, in-store visits, social media promotions, and mobile app interactions. The retailer needs to analyze the aggregated data to understand customer preferences and purchasing patterns.

Given that the customer has interacted through online, in-store, social media, and mobile app, when the data is integrated, then the system should provide a comprehensive report showing the timeline of interactions across all channels.

A retailer wants to improve customer engagement by identifying the most effective channels based on the detailed analytics provided after integrating data from various customer touchpoints.

Given that the data from all channels has been integrated, when the retailer accesses the analytics dashboard, then it should display performance metrics for each channel, including engagement rates and conversion rates, enabling informed decisions on resource allocation.

During a marketing campaign, the retailer needs to track customer interactions in real-time to adjust strategies based on the performance of different channels.

Given that a marketing campaign is active across channels, when a customer interacts with any channel, then the system should update the analytics in real-time, allowing the retailer to react promptly.

The retailer aims to run personalized marketing campaigns based on aggregated customer data from various platforms to enhance customer experience and response rates.

Given that customer data has been successfully integrated from all engagement channels, when a personalized marketing campaign is formulated, then it should leverage this data to target customers accurately based on their behavior and preferences.

The retailer seeks to utilize historical data to predict future buying trends and stock requirements, based on the comprehensive analysis of multi-channel customer data.

Given that historical data has been integrated with current customer engagement data, when the retailer accesses the predictive analytics tool, then it should provide insights and forecasts on stock requirements and potential customer buying trends for upcoming seasons.

Real-Time Reporting Dashboard

"As a store manager, I want a real-time reporting dashboard so that I can quickly analyze current customer engagement metrics and make informed decisions on the spot."

Description

The requirement entails the development of a customizable reporting dashboard that provides real-time insights into customer behavior and service performance metrics. This dashboard will allow retailers to visualize data dynamically, offering key performance indicators relevant to different areas of the business. Features like drag-and-drop configurations and widget customization will empower users to tailor their view according to specific business needs. The real-time aspect ensures that retailers can react swiftly to trends or issues as they arise, thereby enhancing operational efficiency and customer satisfaction.

Acceptance Criteria

As a retailer, I want to access the Real-Time Reporting Dashboard to monitor customer engagement metrics during peak shopping hours to understand traffic patterns and customer interactions.

Given the user is logged into the dashboard, when they select the 'Customer Engagement' widget, then the dashboard displays real-time metrics on customer interactions along with graphical representations of engagement trends for the last 30 minutes.

As a store manager, I need to customize my reporting dashboard by reorganizing the layout and adding various widgets that showcase different performance metrics relevant to my store's operations.

Given the user is on the dashboard configuration page, when they drag and drop widgets and customize their layout, then the dashboard should reflect these changes accordingly and remain saved upon the next login session.

As a business owner, I want to receive notifications on the dashboard regarding any anomalies in customer behavior, such as sudden drops in engagement, during the sales period to take immediate action.

Given the metrics are being updated in real-time, when there is a significant drop in customer engagement defined as a 20% decrease in active users, then the dashboard should trigger a notification alerting the user of this drop.

As a retailer utilizing the dashboard, I would like to view a performance summary report that aggregates data from various channels, providing a comprehensive overview of service effectiveness at the end of the day.

Given the user completes a day's worth of transactions, when they click on 'Daily Summary Report,' then the dashboard generates a report showcasing aggregated key performance indicators (KPIs) across all channels used in that day.

As a staff member, I need to access specific historical data on customer interactions from the Real-Time Reporting Dashboard to analyze trends over the last two weeks.

Given the user selects a date range for the past two weeks in the dashboard, when they apply the filter, then the dashboard should display all relevant historical customer interaction data as charts or tables accurately within the selected time frame.

Customer Segmentation Tools

"As a marketer, I want to segment my customers based on their behavior and preferences so that I can create targeted marketing campaigns that resonate with each group."

Description

This requirement involves building advanced segmentation tools that allow retailers to categorize their customers based on behavior, demographics, and buying patterns. By utilizing machine learning algorithms, the feature will enable more precise segmentation that adapts over time, allowing for targeted marketing and personalized customer interactions. These segmentation capabilities will support campaigns aimed at specific customer groups, thereby increasing engagement rates and improving sales efficiency. Overall, implementing this feature will empower retailers to develop more effective marketing strategies tailored to their audience.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer segmentation based on purchasing frequency and average transaction value.

Given a retailer with a customer database, When the segmentation tool is applied, Then customers should be categorized into segments: low-frequency, medium-frequency, and high-frequency based on their purchasing behavior and average transaction value.

Customer segmentation based on demographic details such as age and location.

Given a retailer who inputs demographic data, When the segmentation tool is used, Then customers should be sorted into segments based on age groups (e.g., 18-25, 26-35) and geographic locations (e.g., urban, suburban, rural).

Dynamic adjustments of segmentation based on changing customer behavior over time.

Given a retailer using the segmentation tools, When market conditions change or new purchasing data is collected, Then the system should automatically adjust customer segments to reflect new behaviors without manual intervention.

Integration and compatibility with existing CRM tools for seamless data transfer.

Given a retailer with an existing CRM system, When the segmentation tools are enabled, Then they should integrate seamlessly, allowing data to flow between the systems without errors or data loss.

Performance reporting of segmentation effectiveness post-campaign.

Given a retailer has run a marketing campaign targeting specific segments, When the performance report is generated, Then the report should include metrics such as engagement rates, conversion rates, and ROI specific to the segmented groups targeted.

User-friendly interface for creating custom segmentation profiles.

Given a non-technical user, When they access the segmentation tool, Then they should be able to create custom segments using simple prompts and visual aids without needing technical assistance.

Ability to export customer segments for targeted marketing campaigns.

Given retailer access to customer segments, When they select a segment for export, Then the system should allow export in multiple formats (e.g., CSV, Excel) for integration with external marketing tools.

Predictive Analytics Engine

"As a retailer, I want to use predictive analytics to forecast stock needs so that I can efficiently manage my inventory and reduce lost sales due to stockouts."

Description

This requirement outlines the development of an advanced predictive analytics engine that utilizes historical data and machine learning models to forecast future trends in customer behavior, inventory needs, and sales performance. This tool will enable retailers to proactively manage stock, adjust pricing strategies, and tailor promotions based on anticipated customer demand. The predictive capabilities will help retailers minimize overstock and stockouts, thereby optimizing inventory turnover and maximizing profitability. By implementing this engine, retailers can transition from reactive to proactive business operations.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailer utilizes the predictive analytics engine to generate sales forecasts for the upcoming quarter based on historical sales data and current market trends.

Given that the retailer inputs historical sales data and selects the relevant market parameters, when the predictive analytics engine processes this data, then it should output a forecast report detailing expected sales figures for each product category with 90% accuracy based on historical data.

The predictive analytics engine analyzes customer buying patterns and suggests optimal stock levels for each product to minimize stockouts and overstock situations.

Given the historical customer purchasing data and current inventory levels, when the engine analyzes this data, then it should recommend stock levels that minimize the risk of stockouts at least 80% of the time based on previous sales patterns.

A retailer wants to set dynamic pricing strategies based on the predictive insights from the analytics engine regarding customer demand.

Given the predicted customer demand generated by the engine, when the retailer applies these insights to modify pricing strategies, then the system should display suggested pricing adjustments that aim to increase sales by at least 15% during high-demand periods.

After implementing the predictive analytics engine, a retailer reviews the performance data to assess its impact on inventory turnover rates.

Given the data collected from inventory turnover rates before and after implementing the engine, when the retailer compares these rates, then there should be a measurable improvement in the turnover rate by at least 20% within the first six months of implementation.

The predictive analytics engine must provide actionable insights that allow retailers to tailor promotions based on anticipated customer behavior.

Given the predictions generated by the analytics engine, when the retailer designs promotional campaigns, then the campaigns should show a responsiveness rate of at least 25%, as measured by customer engagement metrics like click-through and conversion rates.

Retailers need real-time updates from the predictive analytics engine on future inventory needs to adjust supply orders accordingly.

Given that the retailer has set parameters for inventory thresholds, when the predictive analytics engine identifies a need for inventory restocking, then it should trigger alerts to the retailer with at least two weeks lead time before stock levels reach the predefined threshold.

The retail management team conducts a review meeting to evaluate the effectiveness of the predictive analytics engine over a defined timeframe.

Given the data collected over the specified period, when the management team reviews the reports generated by the engine, then they should find at least three major insights that directly inform strategic decisions for improving sales and inventory management.

Multi-Channel Attribution Tracking

"As a digital marketer, I want to track the attribution of all my marketing channels so that I can analyze their effectiveness and optimize spending for better ROI."

Description

This requirement involves the implementation of multi-channel attribution tracking to determine the effectiveness of each engagement channel on customer acquisition and retention. By analyzing touchpoints and customer conversion paths, retailers can identify which marketing channels yield the highest returns and adjust their strategies accordingly. This feature promotes more effective resource allocation by helping marketers understand the value of each channel in driving sales and customer loyalty, ultimately leading to improved ROI from marketing efforts.

Acceptance Criteria

As a marketing manager, I want to analyze the effectiveness of our social media campaigns on customer acquisition so that I can optimize our marketing spend accordingly.

Given a set campaign period, when the multi-channel attribution tracking is applied, then I should see a report indicating the customer acquisition sourced from various social media platforms with percentage contributions of each channel.

As a sales analyst, I want to track customer interactions across email and web channels so that I can identify their purchasing behavior and adjust sales strategies accordingly.

Given customer interaction data, when I retrieve a report on attribution tracking, then the report should include distinct touchpoints with timestamps and conversion rates for email and web visits.

As a business owner, I need to evaluate the ROI from our paid advertisement campaigns across different channels to determine where to allocate budget effectively.

Given the marketing campaign data, when multi-channel attribution is applied, then the system should calculate and display the ROI for each paid channel in a dashboard view.

As a customer service manager, I want to assess the effectiveness of our support channels in retaining customers so that I can improve our service delivery.

Given customer interaction data with support channels, when I generate an attribution report, then I should see metrics showing retention rates linked to each support channel and their impact on repeat purchases.

As a data analyst, I want the ability to export multi-channel attribution data for deeper analysis in data manipulation tools like Excel or Tableau.

Given multi-channel attribution data, when I select the export option, then the data should be downloadable in CSV format without any loss of information.

As a product manager, I want to visualize channel effectiveness trends over time to understand shifting customer preferences.

Given the multi-channel attribution data, when I access the analytics dashboard, then I should see a time-series line chart representing customer engagement trends across channels over the selected period.

As a marketing team member, I want to receive alerts on channel performance anomalies so that I can react promptly to any issues.

Given ongoing multi-channel attribution tracking, when there is a significant drop in performance on any channel, then the system should trigger an alert to all relevant team members via email.

Enhanced User Experience Analytics

"As an e-commerce manager, I want to analyze user experience data so that I can optimize my website design and improve customer conversion rates."

Description

The requirement focuses on in-depth user experience analytics that captures detailed interaction data across digital platforms. This includes metrics on user navigation paths, engagement times, and drop-off points during the purchasing process. By understanding how customers interact with the digital store, retailers can identify areas for improvement to enhance the overall user experience. Implementing this requirement will lead to smarter design decisions and more engaging interfaces, thereby increasing conversion rates and customer satisfaction.

Acceptance Criteria

User Navigation Paths Analysis

Given a user visits the digital store, when they navigate through various product categories, then the system records the complete navigation path including all category selections and page views within a 30-minute session.

Engagement Time Measurement

Given a user interacts with a product detail page, when they view the page, then the system captures the total time spent on the page in seconds and provides an average for all users in a 24-hour period.

Drop-off Points Identification

Given a user begins the checkout process, when they abandon the cart, then the system logs the drop-off point, including the step at which they left and any associated metrics such as time spent at each step.

Customer Interaction Effectiveness Analysis

Given multiple customer service interactions, when these are analyzed, then the system produces a report detailing user satisfaction scores, response times, and resolution rates to evaluate overall effectiveness across channels.

Resource Allocation Optimization Report

Given performance data collected from all customer engagement channels, when the data is processed, then the system generates a resource allocation report recommending adjustments for optimized staff usage and potential high engagement times.

Continuous Improvement Feedback Loop

Given user experience metrics, when a review process is initiated, then the team documents actionable insights and improvement strategies for implementation in the subsequent development cycle.

Proactive Engagement Alerts

Implement a notification system that alerts support representatives to key customer interactions needing attention—such as unresolved issues or follow-up opportunities. This feature empowers teams to adopt a proactive approach in customer service, ensuring timely follow-ups, enhancing customer relationships, and preventing problems from escalating.

Requirements

Real-Time Customer Interaction Alerts

"As a support representative, I want to receive real-time alerts for unresolved customer interactions so that I can follow up promptly and enhance customer satisfaction."

Description

This requirement entails implementing a real-time notification system within the RetailRevive platform that alerts support representatives to key customer interactions requiring attention. These alerts will focus on unresolved issues, potential follow-up opportunities, and other significant customer engagements that can enhance overall customer service effectiveness. This feature is essential for facilitating a proactive approach to customer service, ensuring timely interventions, and ultimately improving customer satisfaction. By leveraging real-time data, support teams can strategically address concerns before they escalate, thereby fostering stronger customer relationships and loyalty.

Acceptance Criteria

Real-time customer interaction alerts for unresolved issues.

Given a customer has an unresolved issue, When the issue remains open for more than 24 hours, Then the support representative receives an alert notification about the unresolved issue.

Real-time customer interaction alerts for follow-up opportunities.

Given a customer interaction has been marked for follow-up, When the interaction is more than 3 days old and has not been followed up, Then the support representative receives a reminder notification for follow-up

Real-time notifications for escalated customer concerns.

Given a customer has raised a concern that requires escalation, When the concern is flagged by a support representative, Then the support team manager receives an alert about the escalated concern immediately.

Integration of customer interaction alerts with the CRM system.

Given a customer interaction alert is generated, When the alert is created, Then the relevant customer profile in the CRM system is updated with the interaction details and alert timestamp.

Tracking the response time to customer interaction alerts.

Given an alert is sent to the support representative, When the representative acknowledges the alert, Then the system logs the response time taken to acknowledge the alert for reporting purposes.

Real-time notifications for new customer inquiries.

Given a new customer inquiry is received, When the inquiry is logged in the system, Then all available support representatives receive a notification of the new inquiry instantly.

Daily summary of unresolved interaction alerts.

Given that there are unresolved alerts at the end of each business day, When the business day concludes, Then a summary report of all unresolved alerts is generated and sent to the support team.

Customizable Notification Settings

"As a support manager, I want to customize my notification settings so that I only receive alerts that are relevant to my team and our current priorities."

Description

This requirement involves the development of a customizable settings feature for the notification system, allowing support representatives and managers to tailor the types of alerts they wish to receive based on their specific roles, customer segments, or urgency levels. This functionality enhances user experience by reducing notification overload while ensuring that critical issues are prioritized according to the user's preferences. By providing customization options, RetailRevive can accommodate various user needs and improve engagement with the notification feature, thus amplifying its effectiveness in promoting timely customer interactions.

Acceptance Criteria

Customizable Notification Settings for Support Representatives

Given a support representative has logged into the RetailRevive platform, when they access the notification settings page, then they should be able to select and save their preferred types of alerts (unresolved issues, follow-up reminders, etc.) according to their role and urgency level.

User-Specific Alert Customization

Given a user is customizing their notification preferences, when they save their changes, then the system should reflect these changes in their dashboard and affect the notifications they receive moving forward without requiring a system refresh.

Notification Overload Management

Given a support representative has set their notification preferences, when the volume of alerts exceeds the user-defined threshold, then the system should prioritize critical alerts and suppress non-essential notifications to avoid overload.

Role-Based Notification Settings

Given different roles (support representative, manager), when a user accesses the notification settings, then they should have distinct options tailored to their role's responsibilities and the alerts that are most relevant to them.

Testing Notification Functionality after Customization

Given a support representative has customized their notification settings, when they trigger an event that meets their alert criteria (like a new unresolved issue), then the representative should receive the corresponding notification as per their settings.

Adjusting Notification Preferences

Given a support representative wants to modify their notification preferences at any time, when they access the settings and make changes, then the changes should be saved and reflected instantly on their account after submission.

Historical Interaction Tracking

"As a support representative, I want access to a history of customer interactions so that I can provide more informed and personalized assistance during follow-ups."

Description

This requirement focuses on integrating a historical interaction tracking system that records and displays past customer interactions, including resolved issues, follow-ups, and previous notifications. This feature will allow support representatives to review the customer history before engaging with them, providing valuable context that can guide more effective and personalized communication. This depth of information can help representatives better understand customer needs and preferences, enabling them to provide tailored support, thus enhancing overall customer engagement and satisfaction with the RetailRevive platform.

Acceptance Criteria

Support representatives access the customer interaction history before initiating a call or chat with a customer, reviewing past interactions to tailor their approach accordingly.

Given a support representative is logged into the RetailRevive platform, when they access a specific customer's profile, then all historical interactions, including resolved issues and follow-ups, should be displayed in chronological order.

A support representative encounters a customer with unresolved issues and needs to address them promptly, utilizing the historical interaction tracking system for context.

Given a support representative is viewing a customer profile, when there are unresolved issues flagged in the interaction history, then the representative should receive an alert indicating the available issues that need resolution before engaging with the customer.

After resolving a customer's issue, a support representative updates the interaction history with notes on the resolution and any relevant follow-up actions required.

Given a support representative has resolved a customer issue, when they update the interaction history, then the system must allow the addition of notes and automatically timestamp the update for record-keeping.

A support representative wants to review the details of past interactions to prepare for an upcoming customer engagement meeting.

Given a support representative opens the interaction history for a customer, when interaction records are displayed, then the representative should be able to filter interactions by date or type (resolved, unresolved, follow-up) to easily find relevant information.

New support representatives require training on using the historical interaction tracking feature to ensure they understand how to leverage customer insights for effective communication.

Given a new support representative completes training on the RetailRevive platform, when they are tested on the interaction tracking functionality, then they must correctly explain how to access historical interaction data and its purpose in customer engagement.

Support representatives need to access historical interactions from a mobile device while in the field or away from their primary workstation.

Given a support representative is using the RetailRevive mobile application, when they log into a customer profile, then they should be able to view the historical interaction history with the same level of detail as available on the desktop version.

Escalation Protocol Alerts

"As a support representative, I want to receive escalation alerts for critical unresolved issues so that I can ensure they are addressed promptly by the appropriate team members."

Description

This requirement defines the need for a formal escalation protocol within the alert system, triggering specific alerts to designated team members when certain thresholds are met (such as time elapsed without resolution or the number of escalated issues.) This ensures that critical customer issues receive additional attention and resources, reducing the risk of customer churn and dissatisfaction. By implementing an escalation process, RetailRevive empowers teams to promptly address issues that may otherwise go unnoticed, thus upholding high standards of customer service and support.

Acceptance Criteria

A customer has an unresolved issue that has reached a predefined threshold of 48 hours without resolution. The support team has not yet acted on it, triggering an alert to the team lead and customer relations manager.

Given that an issue has not been resolved within 48 hours, When the issue is identified in the system, Then the designated team members receive an escalation alert via email and in-app notification.

A specific customer has multiple unresolved issues within a 24-hour period that require urgent escalation. The alert system should trigger notifications to the assigned support representative and their supervisor.

Given that a customer has more than three unresolved issues in 24 hours, When the escalation protocol is triggered, Then the assigned representative and their supervisor receive an alert specifying the customer's details and issues.

A threshold of 5 escalated issues within an hour is met, necessitating immediate attention from the support leadership team. An alert should be sent to the team within 5 minutes of the threshold being hit.

Given that there are 5 or more escalated issues within an hour, When the threshold is reached, Then an alert is dispatched to the support leadership team within 5 minutes of threshold detection.

A support representative is going to follow up with a customer after an escalation alert was triggered the previous day. They need to document the outcome of this follow-up in the system.

Given that a follow-up is conducted post-escalation, When the representative documents the outcome of the follow-up, Then the system successfully saves the follow-up result and updates the issue status accordingly.

Weekly reports on escalated issues need to be generated for management review. These reports should reflect data on issues escalated, the response time, and resolution outcomes.

Given that the reporting period concludes, When the report is generated, Then it includes all escalated issues, response times, and resolution outcomes, formatted correctly for management review.

During a high-volume sales event, a spike in customer service issues is expected. The alert system must be able to handle increased load without delays in notifications.

Given that a high-volume sales event is occurring, When multiple issues are logged, Then the alert system processes and dispatches escalation alerts without exceeding a 2-minute delay.

In-App Performance Metrics Dashboard

"As a support representative, I want to view performance metrics on my dashboard so that I can track my response rate and identify areas for improvement in my customer engagement."

Description

This requirement involves creating an in-app dashboard that displays key performance metrics related to customer interactions and alert responsiveness. Metrics such as average response time, number of issues resolved, and follow-up success rates can be showcased to help support teams evaluate their performance and identify areas for improvement. By providing access to these metrics, RetailRevive fosters a culture of continuous improvement in customer service practices, driving better collaboration among team members and ultimately enhancing customer experiences through more efficient resolution efforts.

Acceptance Criteria

User views the in-app performance metrics dashboard to assess team performance during peak customer engagement hours.

Given the user is logged into the RetailRevive platform, when they navigate to the performance metrics dashboard, then they should see metrics displayed for average response time, number of issues resolved, and follow-up success rates in real-time.

Support representatives receive real-time notifications of unresolved customer issues displayed on the performance metrics dashboard.

Given the customer support representative is actively monitoring the dashboard, when an unresolved customer issue arises, then the dashboard should display a notification with the customer details and the action required to follow up.

Management reviews the performance metrics over a specific reporting period to evaluate team improvement.

Given the management team wants to assess performance metrics over the last month, when they access the dashboard with specified date filters, then they should be able to view metrics aggregated for that time frame and identify trends in team performance.

A support representative interacts with a notification and resolves the issue, updating the performance metrics in real-time.

Given a support representative clicks on an unresolved issue notification, when they resolve the issue and confirm in the system, then the dashboard should update the resolved issue count and recalculate the average response time and follow-up success rate immediately.

Support representatives use the performance metrics dashboard to set goals for their follow-up success rates.

Given a support representative is viewing their individual metrics on the dashboard, when they set a target follow-up success rate for the next week, then the dashboard should display progress against this target in real-time during the week.

New support representatives access the dashboard to understand team performance metrics and benchmarks during their onboarding process.

Given a new support representative is in the onboarding stage, when they access the performance metrics dashboard, then they should be provided an overview of the key metrics along with tooltips explaining each metric and its importance for team performance.

Knowledge Base Integration

Integrate a comprehensive knowledge base within the Customer Engagement Hub, providing support representatives with easy access to FAQs, troubleshooting guides, and detailed product information. This feature equips teams with the resources they need at their fingertips, leading to faster resolutions and enhanced customer service efficiency.

Requirements

Knowledge Base Content Management

"As a support representative, I want to easily update the knowledge base content so that I can provide customers with the most accurate and up-to-date information, improving the quality of our support."

Description

The requirement entails the ability to create, edit, and manage content within the integrated knowledge base. This includes the addition of FAQs, troubleshooting guides, and detailed product information. It should allow support representatives to easily update information based on customer feedback and changing product specifications, ensuring that the knowledge base remains accurate and relevant. This functionality enhances the customer service team's ability to provide informed responses and supports overall service efficiency by reducing resolution times significantly.

Acceptance Criteria

Support representative updates an FAQ entry in the knowledge base to reflect a recent product change.

Given the support representative has access to the knowledge base, When they edit an existing FAQ entry and save changes, Then the updated FAQ is accurately saved and reflects the changes in real-time in the customer engagement hub.

A customer queries a troubleshooting guide for a specific product using the knowledge base.

Given the customer has access to the customer engagement hub, When they search for the troubleshooting guide of a product, Then the relevant guide is displayed accurately with up-to-date information and easy navigation options.

The support team receives feedback about outdated information in a troubleshooting guide.

Given the support representative reviews customer feedback, When they identify outdated content in the troubleshooting guide, Then they can edit and save the content within the knowledge base, and the changes are immediately reflected in the guide.

Management wants to generate a report on the most accessed articles in the knowledge base.

Given management has access to analytics, When they request a report on the most accessed articles, Then the report is generated accurately showing article popularity and usage trends over a specified timeframe.

A new support representative is trained on using the knowledge base for customer inquiries.

Given the new support representative is being trained, When they demonstrate the ability to navigate and update content in the knowledge base, Then they can efficiently locate information and make edits as needed within a training session.

Search Functionality in Knowledge Base

"As a support representative, I want to use a search function to find information in the knowledge base quickly so that I can resolve customer inquiries faster, leading to increased customer satisfaction."

Description

Implement a powerful search functionality that allows support representatives to quickly find relevant articles, FAQs, and troubleshooting guides within the knowledge base. Users should be able to search using keywords, tags, or categories, enhancing their ability to retrieve necessary information rapidly. This feature is critical for reducing the time spent searching for information and ultimately improving the speed and quality of customer support.

Acceptance Criteria

Search by Keywords

Given a support representative is in the Knowledge Base, when they enter a keyword into the search bar and press enter, then the system should return a list of relevant articles, FAQs, and troubleshooting guides that contain the keyword.

Search by Tags

Given a support representative is in the Knowledge Base, when they select a tag from a pre-defined list and click the search button, then the system should display all articles related to that tag.

Search by Categories

Given a support representative is in the Knowledge Base, when they select a category from the category dropdown menu, then the system should show all relevant articles and guides under that category.

No Results Found

Given a support representative is in the Knowledge Base, when they search for a keyword that does not exist in any article, then the system should display a message indicating 'No results found' along with suggestions for popular articles.

Search Speed

Given a support representative is in the Knowledge Base, when they enter a search term, then the search results should be returned within 2 seconds to ensure a swift user experience.

User-friendly Interface

Given a support representative is on the Knowledge Base search page, then the search functionality should be accessible and intuitive, allowing the user to easily input their query and navigate the results without confusion.

Integration with Support Ticketing System

"As a support representative, I want to link knowledge base articles to support tickets so that customers can access additional resources and potentially resolve their issues without waiting for a response, enhancing their overall experience."

Description

This requirement focuses on the seamless integration of the knowledge base with the existing support ticketing system. When a support ticket is created, representatives should have the ability to link relevant articles from the knowledge base directly to the ticket, providing customers with immediate access to self-help resources. This integration not only improves the support process but also empowers customers to find solutions independently, fostering a more proactive approach to customer support.

Acceptance Criteria

Linking Knowledge Base Articles to Support Tickets by Representatives

Given a support representative accesses the support ticketing system, When they create a new ticket, Then they should see an option to link relevant knowledge base articles to the ticket.

Customer Access to Linked Knowledge Base Articles

Given a customer views their support ticket, When the ticket has linked knowledge base articles, Then they should see a section displaying those articles for immediate access.

Searching Knowledge Base Articles During Ticket Creation

Given a support representative is in the process of creating a support ticket, When they search for knowledge base articles, Then the system should return relevant articles in real-time based on the input keywords.

Notifications for New Knowledge Base Articles

Given a support representative is viewing a support ticket, When a new knowledge base article is published, Then the representative should receive a notification indicating the addition of the new article with the option to link it to open tickets.

Audit Trail for Linked Articles in Support Tickets

Given a support representative has linked knowledge base articles to a support ticket, When the ticket is resolved, Then there should be a record showing which articles were linked in the ticket's history.

Updating Linked Articles in Existing Support Tickets

Given a support ticket with previously linked knowledge base articles, When the articles are updated, Then the support representative should be able to update the articles linked to the ticket accordingly.

Removing Linked Articles from Support Tickets

Given a support ticket with linked knowledge base articles, When the support representative decides the articles are no longer relevant, Then they should have the option to unlink those articles from the ticket.

Knowledge Base Analytics

"As a team leader, I want to review analytics data for the knowledge base so that I can identify which articles need updates or enhancements based on usage trends, ensuring the knowledge base remains effective and relevant."

Description

Develop an analytics feature that tracks the usage and performance of the knowledge base content. This includes metrics such as the number of views per article, search queries, and feedback ratings for articles. Having data on which articles are most frequently referenced will help identify gaps in information and areas for improvement. This feature is vital for continually refining the knowledge base and ensuring that it meets the needs of both support representatives and customers.

Acceptance Criteria

Knowledge Base Analytics for Support Representatives Using FAQs

Given a support representative accesses the knowledge base, when they retrieve FAQ articles, then the system tracks and displays the number of views for each article on the admin panel.

Search Queries Metrics for Knowledge Base Articles

Given a support representative conducts a search query in the knowledge base, when they submit the query, then the system logs the search term and the number of times it was searched in the analytics dashboard.

Feedback Ratings Visibility for Knowledge Base Articles

Given a customer reads an article in the knowledge base, when they submit a feedback rating, then the system records the rating and displays the average rating on the article page and in the analytics section.

Identification of Gaps in Knowledge Base Content

Given the analytics shows frequent searches with no results, when the system compiles this data, then it highlights these gaps in the knowledge base in the content management dashboard.

Reporting on Article Performance for Content Managers

Given a content manager accesses the analytics feature, when they generate a report, then the system provides a detailed summary of articles including views, feedback, and search effectiveness.

User Engagement Trends Over Time for Knowledge Base

Given the knowledge base has been live for a month, when the analytics feature generates a time-series report, then it displays user engagement trends for each article month over month.

Integration of Analytics with Existing CRM Tools

Given the knowledge base analytics feature is integrated, when a support representative views a customer profile, then they can see knowledge base usage and relevant article performance related to that customer.

User Feedback Mechanism

"As a customer, I want to provide feedback on knowledge base articles so that I can contribute to improving the information available to support representatives and myself, ensuring we have the best resources at our disposal."

Description

Incorporate a user feedback mechanism within the knowledge base that allows support representatives and customers to rate articles and provide comments. This feature will enable users to express their satisfaction with the content and suggest improvements, facilitating a responsive approach to knowledge base development. By actively gathering feedback, the knowledge base can evolve to better serve its users, ultimately enhancing the quality of customer support.

Acceptance Criteria

Support representatives access the knowledge base to locate an article on troubleshooting a common issue faced by customers, rate the article's usefulness, and provide comments which will be recorded in the database.

Given a support representative is logged into the Customer Engagement Hub, when they view a knowledge base article, they should see a rating system (1-5 stars) and a comment box. When they submit their rating and comment, the system should confirm submission and display a thank you message. The rating should reflect accurately in the article's overall rating after submission.

A customer accessing the knowledge base finds an article helpful and wants to express their satisfaction by rating it and leaving a comment for potential improvements.

Given a customer is viewing a knowledge base article, when they select a rating (1-5 stars) and provide a comment, and click submit, the system should provide a confirmation message, and the feedback should be recorded and viewable by the support team in the admin dashboard.

An administrator reviews the collected feedback from both support representatives and customers to identify trends in ratings and comments that suggest areas for improvement in the knowledge base articles.

Given an administrator is logged into the admin dashboard, when they access the feedback section, they should be able to filter articles by ratings, view individual comments, and generate reports on average ratings per article to identify areas needing updates.

A support representative accesses a low-rated article and uses the feedback comments to update the content for clarity and completeness before re-publishing it in the knowledge base.

Given a support representative identifies an article with a rating of 2 stars and reviews the comments for suggestions, when they edit the article and submit changes, the revised article should go through an approval process and the previous average rating should be updated upon re-publication.

To ensure the functionality is working correctly, a QA tester simulates the actions of both a support representative and a customer to validate the user feedback mechanism.

Given the QA tester accesses the system, when they simulate rating an article as both a support representative and a customer, both submissions should be recorded accurately with timestamps, and should reflect correctly when viewing the feedback statistics in the admin dashboard.

Trend Line Visualization

This feature provides interactive graphs that display predicted sales trends over time alongside historical data. By visually representing sales trajectories, Data Analysts can quickly identify upward or downward trends, making it easier to adjust strategies and inventory levels accordingly.

Requirements

Interactive Graphing Tools

"As a Data Analyst, I want to visualize predicted sales trends and historical data on interactive graphs so that I can quickly identify trends and adjust strategies to optimize inventory levels and sales performance."

Description

The Interactive Graphing Tools requirement involves the development of dynamic, interactive graphing capabilities that allow users to visualize predicted sales trends alongside historical sales data. This requires integration with existing data analytics systems to ensure that the graphs are populated with accurate data. Features such as zooming, panning, and the ability to compare different time periods or categories of products should be included to enhance user experience. The successful implementation of this requirement will enable Data Analysts to make informed decisions based on visual data representations, ultimately leading to better inventory management and strategic planning.

Acceptance Criteria

Data Analysts need to generate a sales trend report for the last quarter to identify key trends and adjust inventory management accordingly.

Given the user selects the last quarter in the date range, when the graph is generated, then it displays predicted sales trends and historical sales data for that period accurately.

A Data Analyst wants to visually compare sales trends of two different product categories over the past year to make informed marketing decisions.

Given the user selects two product categories and a one-year date range, when the graph is generated, then it shows overlapping trend lines for both categories and allows the user to differentiate them easily.

As a user, I want the ability to zoom in on specific sections of the trend graph for more detailed analysis of sales data.

Given the user hovers over a specific area of the trend graph, when the zoom feature is activated, then the graph should display an enlarged and detailed view of the selected time frame without losing data accuracy.

A Data Analyst wants to change the time period of the sales trend visualization to evaluate performance month over month.

Given the user selects a different month using the date filter, when the graph is refreshed, then it should accurately update to reflect the new selected month’s predicted and historical sales data.

A user needs to export the currently displayed sales trend graph for use in a presentation.

Given the user requests an export of the graph, when the export option is selected, then the graph should be downloaded as a high-resolution image or PDF format without any data distortion.

A Data Analyst wishes to track the accuracy of predicted sales against actual sales data over the last year.

Given the user overlays the predicted sales data with actual sales data on the graph, when the graph is generated, then there should be clear visual indicators of both datasets for easy comparison.

A Data Analyst wants to access tooltips that provide additional details on specific data points within the sales trend graph.

Given the user hovers over a data point on the graph, when the tooltip is activated, then it should display relevant information including sales figures and dates clearly and concisely.

Real-time Data Integration

"As a Retail Manager, I want to receive real-time updates on sales and inventory data so that I can make informed decisions quickly and adjust our strategies in response to market conditions."

Description

The Real-time Data Integration requirement focuses on ensuring that sales data, inventory levels, and customer interactions are updated in real-time within the platform. This involves creating a robust API that connects various data sources, including POS systems, e-commerce platforms, and CRM tools. Real-time data will improve the accuracy of trend analysis, allowing for more timely and responsive decision-making. Implementing this requirement is essential for supporting dynamic pricing strategies and inventory forecasting, ensuring that data analysts have access to the most current and relevant information.

Acceptance Criteria

As a Data Analyst, I want to visualize sales trends in real-time so that I can make informed decisions regarding inventory and pricing strategies.

Given that the data integration API is correctly set up, when I load the Trend Line Visualization feature, then I should see updated graphs reflecting the most recent sales data without any delays.

As a Store Manager, I need to ensure that all inventory levels are current in real-time so that I can effectively manage stock and prevent overstock or stockouts.

Given that the inventory update process is triggered by a sale, when an item is sold, then the inventory level displayed in RetailRevive should decrease immediately and reflect the updated count across all platforms.

As a Retail Executive, I want to compare predicted sales trends with historical data in real-time to assess the accuracy of our sales forecasting models.

Given that the real-time data is being integrated, when I access the Trend Line Visualization feature, then I should see a seamless overlay of historical data and predicted trends that updates in less than 5 seconds.

As a Data Analyst, I want to ensure that customer interaction data is integrated in real-time to improve our customer engagement strategies.

Given that a customer interaction occurs, when the event is logged in the CRM, then it should trigger an immediate update in the RetailRevive dashboard showing the latest customer engagement metrics.

As a Store Manager, I want to be alerted when stock levels drop below a certain threshold so I can reorder supplies to maintain sales flow.

Given that the real-time integration is active, when stock levels fall below the defined threshold, then the system should generate a notification alerting me of the low stock status.

Customizable Analytics Dashboard

"As a Data Analyst, I want to customize my analytics dashboard so that I can prioritize and access the data that is most relevant to my tasks efficiently and effectively."

Description

The Customizable Analytics Dashboard requirement is designed to give users the ability to tailor their dashboard view according to their specific analytical needs. Users should be able to select which metrics are displayed, arrange the layout, and even save different configurations for quick access later. This customization will enhance user engagement and allow for a personalized experience, enabling users to focus on the data that matters most to them. Implementing this feature will significantly improve user satisfaction and efficiency in data analysis.

Acceptance Criteria

User customizes the analytics dashboard to display monthly sales data, adjusting the layout to prioritize key performance indicators for easier access.

Given the user is logged into their RetailRevive account, When they navigate to the dashboard settings, Then they should be able to select 'Monthly Sales Data' as a metric, arrange the layout by dragging the key performance indicators to the top, and save the configuration for future use.

A data analyst accesses the customizable dashboard and switches between different saved configurations to analyze various metrics during a weekly meeting.

Given the user has previously saved multiple configurations, When they click on the 'Configurations' dropdown, Then they should see all saved setups, select one, and have the dashboard update to reflect that configuration instantaneously.

User wants to adjust the chart types of displayed metrics on their dashboard to better visualize sales data.

Given that the user is on the analytics dashboard, When they click on a metric chart and select 'Change Chart Type', Then they should be able to choose from at least three different types (e.g., line, bar, pie), and the chart should update accordingly.

The user personalizes their analytics dashboard for the first time and wishes to reset it to default settings.

Given the user is on their customized dashboard, When they access the settings and select 'Reset to Default', Then the dashboard should revert to its original state with all metrics and layouts returning to predefined settings.

User requires confirmation that changes made to the dashboard settings have been successfully applied and saved.

Given the user customizes their dashboard settings, When they click 'Save Changes', Then a confirmation message should appear stating 'Your dashboard settings have been saved successfully.'

A user with limited permissions attempts to modify the dashboard configuration and is restricted access.

Given the user has restricted access rights, When they try to customize the dashboard layout, Then they should receive an error message indicating 'You do not have permission to modify this setting.'

The user wants to view help resources regarding how to customize their analytics dashboard effectively.

Given that the user is on the dashboard page, When they click on the 'Help' icon, Then they should be redirected to a comprehensive guide detailing the steps for customizing the dashboard, including video tutorials and FAQs.

Automated Reporting

"As a Data Analyst, I want to receive automated sales trend reports so that I can save time on manual data preparation and focus on strategic analysis and recommendations."

Description

The Automated Reporting requirement involves creating a system that generates periodic sales trend reports automatically, pulling data directly from the analytics engine and providing insights based on predefined criteria. This feature should enable users to schedule reports daily, weekly, or monthly and include customizable parameters for the data. The implementation of this feature will save time for Data Analysts and provide consistent insights without the need for manual data extraction and analysis, making it easier to track performance over time.

Acceptance Criteria

Scheduled report generation for daily sales trends to assist Data Analysts in understanding performance insights at the end of each day.

Given that the user has scheduled a report for daily sales trends with a specific time, when the scheduled time occurs, then the system should generate and send the report automatically to the user's email without errors.

Weekly sales trend reports are generated for retail performance analysis during weekly team meetings.

Given that a user has configured a weekly report that includes both predicted and historical sales data, when the report is generated, then it should include accurate data from the last seven days and be accessible from the user dashboard.

Monthly sales trend reports created for long-term strategic planning by management teams.

Given that a user requests a monthly sales trend report, when the report generation is triggered, then it should include all relevant sales data and insights for the entire month, correctly formatted as specified in the report settings.

Customizable parameters for automated reports to ensure relevant insights are being delivered to different stakeholders.

Given that the user specifies certain parameters (such as product categories or geographical regions) for the report, when the automated report is generated, then it should reflect the customized settings provided, and only include data that meets those criteria.

Validation of data accuracy in generated sales trend reports to ensure reliability of insights.

Given that a report has been generated, when it is reviewed, then at least 95% of the sales data included in the report should match the raw data available in the analytics engine for the specified date range.

User interface for scheduling report generation to be intuitive and user-friendly for Data Analysts.

Given that the user accesses the report scheduling feature, when they interact with the scheduling interface, then they should be able to easily set the frequency (daily, weekly, monthly), specify parameters, and save the schedule without encountering any usability issues.

Predictive Analytics Enhancements

"As a Retail Strategist, I want to leverage enhanced predictive analytics to generate accurate sales forecasts so that I can make better decisions regarding inventory and marketing efforts, thereby increasing profitability."

Description

The Predictive Analytics Enhancements requirement aims to refine the algorithms used for predicting sales trends. This includes incorporating machine learning techniques to analyze historical sales data and customer behavior to generate more accurate forecasts. The enhancements should be able to consider various factors such as seasonality, promotions, and economic indicators. By improving predictive analytics, the platform will provide users with more reliable insights and forecasts, helping to optimize inventory and marketing strategies.

Acceptance Criteria

Data Analysts use the Predictive Analytics Enhancements feature to generate future sales forecasts during a quarterly strategy meeting in order to adjust inventory levels accordingly.

Given the historical sales data and current customer behavior, When the predictive analytics algorithm is executed, Then the system should provide a forecast accuracy of at least 90% as compared to actual sales data from the last three quarters.

A retail manager reviews the trend line visualization feature during a promotional campaign to optimize stock levels and inventory placement.

Given a promotional campaign with specific dates and expected customer engagement, When the predictive analytics feature is activated, Then the visual graphs should update within 5 seconds to reflect real-time predictions aligned with current sales trends.

Data Analysts analyze the impact of seasonality on product sales using the predictive analytics enhancements to plan for the upcoming holiday season.

Given the seasonal sales data for the previous two years, When the predictive analytics algorithms are adjusted to account for seasonality effects, Then the generated forecasts should show a clear distinction in sales trends between seasonal and non-seasonal months.

During a monthly review, the operations team utilizes the trend line visualization to assess trends based on updated predictive analytics.

Given that the machine learning model has been trained with at least six months of historical data, When the users access the visualization tool, Then they should see a comprehensive graph displaying both historical and predicted sales, with an option to filter results by category and timeframe.

A business analyst compares the effectiveness of promotions against predicted sales data to evaluate the success of marketing strategies.

Given a set of promotions and their historical sales data, When the predictive analytics is applied, Then the system should provide comparative results of predicted sales against actual sales, demonstrating a correlation of at least 85% in promotional effectiveness.

What-If Analysis Tool

Empower users to simulate various market scenarios and their potential impact on sales. This tool allows Data Analysts to input different variables—such as promotional efforts or economic changes—and see how these factors could influence sales forecasts, enabling proactive decision-making.

Requirements

Dynamic Variable Input

"As a Data Analyst, I want to input different variables into the What-If Analysis Tool so that I can see how changes in promotions and market conditions might impact sales forecasts, enabling me to make informed decisions for the business."

Description

The What-If Analysis Tool must allow users to input various variables including promotional efforts, economic conditions, and customer behaviors to simulate market scenarios. This feature should support flexible data types and allow for easy adjustment of variables by Data Analysts, promoting an intuitive user experience. The benefit of this requirement lies in empowering users to explore multiple scenarios, enhancing their decision-making capabilities by visualizing the potential impact of different inputs on sales forecasts. Integration with existing data streams within RetailRevive's ecosystem is essential for real-time analyses and accurate forecasting.

Acceptance Criteria

Dynamic Variable Input for Promotional Efforts Simulation

Given the user is on the What-If Analysis Tool page, when they input a promotional effort variable and adjust its parameters, then the tool should display a recalculated sales forecast reflecting the impact of the promotional campaign.

Dynamic Variable Input for Economic Conditions Simulation

Given the user is on the What-If Analysis Tool page, when they input an economic condition variable such as inflation rate changes, then the tool should allow the user to visualize potential sales outcomes based on these economic inputs.

Dynamic Variable Input for Customer Behavior Changes Simulation

Given the user has input multiple customer behavior variables, when they run the analysis, then the tool should generate a report detailing sales forecasts under varying customer engagement scenarios.

User-Friendly Variable Adjustment

Given the data analyst is using the Dynamic Variable Input interface, when they adjust variable sliders or input fields, then the system should instantly reflect changes in the sales forecast without requiring a page refresh.

Integration with Existing Data Streams

Given that the user has linked their RetailRevive account to external data sources, when they input variables, then the system should integrate these data streams to ensure accurate sales forecasts are generated based on the latest available information.

Support for Multiple Data Types in Inputs

Given that the user is entering variables into the Dynamic Variable Input fields, when they input data types such as numerical values, percentages, or descriptive text, then the system should accept and appropriately categorize these inputs for analysis.

Saving and Retrieving Market Scenarios

Given that a data analyst has created a specific market scenario, when they save this scenario, then they should be able to retrieve it later for review or further adjustments without data loss.

Scenario Visualization

"As a Data Analyst, I want the What-If Analysis Tool to visualize different sales forecasts so that I can easily interpret the results and present them to my team, ultimately supporting data-driven decisions."

Description

The What-If Analysis Tool should provide a visual representation of the simulated market scenarios, including graphical charts and trend lines to depict the potential impact of various inputs on sales forecasts. This requirement emphasizes the need for clear and interactive visualizations, enabling users to easily interpret complex data and gain insights at a glance. By presenting data in an accessible format, users can better understand potential outcomes, facilitating strategic decision-making and enhanced communication of findings to stakeholders. Integration with RetailRevive's analytics dashboard is necessary for seamless data visualization.

Acceptance Criteria

Retail analyst is using the What-If Analysis Tool during a quarterly review meeting to demonstrate potential sales impacts of various promotional strategies to stakeholders.

Given the user is in the What-If Analysis Tool, when they input different promotional scenarios, then the graphical representation of sales forecasts updates dynamically to reflect those changes accurately.

A small retailer is planning a seasonal promotion and needs to assess the potential impact on sales before executing the campaign using the What-If Analysis Tool.

Given the user selects a seasonal promotion scenario, when the simulation is processed, then the tool must display trend lines indicating projected sales growth compared to the previous year's data.

Data analysts need to compare multiple scenarios in the What-If Analysis Tool to recommend the best promotional strategy to the retail management team.

Given the user is comparing multiple scenarios, when they toggle between different visual representations, then the tool should allow for clear and interactive comparisons of the sales forecasts across all selected scenarios.

A user is preparing a report on the performance of past promotional campaigns using insights generated from the What-If Analysis Tool.

Given the user generates a report, when the report is viewed, then it must include interactive charts that allow stakeholders to drill down into specific variables and their effects on sales.

During a training session, new users are being introduced to the What-If Analysis Tool and its visualization capabilities.

Given the training is ongoing, when users apply various inputs into the tool, then they should receive instant feedback through visual representations, ensuring clarity on how different inputs affect the forecasts.

RetailRevive users are experiencing issues interpreting the results from the What-If Analysis Tool due to unclear visualizations.

Given that multiple users access the tool, when they view the graphical charts, then the visualizations must be clear, accurately labeled, and include legends and tooltips for easy interpretation of the data.

Comparative Scenario Analysis

"As a Data Analyst, I want to compare multiple market scenarios using the What-If Analysis Tool so that I can identify which strategies would most likely maximize our sales and optimize our resources accordingly."

Description

The tool should enable users to compare different simulated scenarios side by side, allowing Data Analysts to identify trends, discrepancies, and opportunities more effectively. This requirement ensures that users can analyze multiple strategies simultaneously and make direct comparisons to determine the most effective approaches for maximizing sales. Implementing this functionality is crucial for refining decision-making processes and allows for better resource allocation based on empirical data, ultimately contributing to RetailRevive's goal of enhancing operational efficiency for its users.

Acceptance Criteria

Data Analysts want to compare two promotional strategies for the upcoming holiday season using the What-If Analysis Tool. They input different discount percentages and product bundles into the tool, and they expect to see a side-by-side comparison of projected sales for each strategy.

Given the user has input two different promotional strategies into the What-If Analysis Tool, when they select the 'Compare' option, then they should see a side-by-side comparison of projected sales figures, highlighting key differences in trends and total sales.

A Data Analyst needs to evaluate the impact of an economic change on inventory needs. They will input a projected decrease in consumer spending into the What-If Analysis Tool and expect to derive insights on inventory adjustments needed.

Given the user inputs a decrease in consumer spending into the What-If Analysis Tool, when they run the analysis, then they should receive a clear report detailing recommended adjustments in inventory levels aligned with the new sales forecasts.

A Data Analyst is testing multiple strategies to increase sales conversion rates. They input different variables, such as changing the display layout of products and enhancing customer engagement through marketing messages.

Given the user has input various display layout strategies and marketing messages, when they execute the comparative analysis, then the tool should generate a report showing conversion rates for each strategy, allowing the user to identify which approach yields higher rates.

The analytics team wants to assess the impact of varying return policies on customer purchases. They set different return policy scenarios to see how it affects sales.

Given the user has input multiple return policy scenarios, when they view the results of the analysis, then the comparison report should clearly indicate the projected increase or decrease in sales for each return policy scenario evaluated.

Data Analysts prepare for a quarterly board meeting and need to present a comparative analysis between last quarter's actual sales and projected sales for the upcoming quarter under different promotional campaigns.

Given the user has uploaded last quarter's sales data and projected data for various promotional campaigns, when they access the comparative scenario analysis, then the tool should provide a visualization comparing actual vs. projected sales, including trend graphs and insights.

The marketing team is developing a new loyalty program and needs to compare its effects against the current loyalty program to see which yields better customer retention.

Given the user has input data for both the current loyalty program and the proposed program into the What-If Analysis Tool, when they execute the scenario comparison, then the tool should highlight differences in projected customer retention rates between the two programs and suggest the most effective option.

A Data Analyst is evaluating the effectiveness of different pricing strategies on sales volume in the lead-up to a major sales event.

Given the user has input various pricing strategies and associated sales volume metrics into the What-If Analysis Tool, when they run the comparative analysis, then the output should include a detailed breakdown of estimated sales volume under each pricing strategy, enabling informed decision-making.

User Permissions and Accessibility

"As a team lead, I want to ensure that only authorized Data Analysts can access the What-If Analysis Tool so that our sensitive sales data remains secure and complies with company policies regarding data access."

Description

Establish defined user roles and permissions for the What-If Analysis Tool to ensure that sensitive data is handled appropriately. This requirement includes the development of user authentication and role-based access controls, enabling only authorized users to access specific analytical features and data. This is essential for maintaining data security and fostering an environment where data can be analyzed safely, promoting compliance with regulatory standards and safeguarding company-sensitive information. Integration with RetailRevive’s existing user management system is mandatory for streamlined access and security protocols.

Acceptance Criteria

User Role Definition and Management for the What-If Analysis Tool

Given a user is logged into RetailRevive, when they navigate to the user roles section, then they should be able to create, modify, and delete user roles with appropriate permissions defined for accessing the What-If Analysis Tool.

User Authentication for the What-If Analysis Tool

Given a user attempts to access the What-If Analysis Tool, when they enter their credentials, then the system should authenticate the user and grant access only if the credentials match the defined roles and permissions.

Access Verification for Unauthorized Users

Given a user without the appropriate role tries to access the What-If Analysis Tool, when they attempt to load the tool, then they should receive an access denied message indicating insufficient permissions.

Integration with Existing User Management System

Given the User Permissions and Accessibility features are implemented, when a user is created or updated in the existing user management system, then their roles and permissions should automatically sync with the What-If Analysis Tool without manual intervention.

Reporting on User Access Logs

Given that user access controls are in place, when a report is generated for the What-If Analysis Tool access logs, then it should accurately reflect all user access attempts, including successful logins and access denied events, over the past 30 days.

Role-Based Access to Specific Features in the What-If Analysis Tool

Given a user has a specific role assigned, when they access the What-If Analysis Tool, then they should only see the features and data that their role permits them to access, ensuring data security and compliance with privacy policies.

Result Export Functionality

"As a Data Analyst, I want to export the results of my market scenario analyses so that I can share my insights with my team and assist in strategic planning discussions."

Description

The What-If Analysis Tool should allow users to export simulation results in various formats, including CSV, PDF, and Excel, to facilitate sharing and reporting. This requirement will enhance the functionality of the tool by enabling users to disseminate their findings effectively across teams and to stakeholders. Providing an export feature aligns with the operational needs of RetailRevive users, ensuring that insights gained from the What-If analysis can be documented and utilized outside of the platform. Integration with third-party reporting tools may also be considered.

Acceptance Criteria

User exports simulation results in CSV format after conducting a What-If analysis to share with the sales team.

Given the user has completed a What-If analysis, when they select the 'Export' option and choose 'CSV', then the simulation results should be successfully downloaded as a CSV file with accurate data matching the on-screen results.

User exports simulation results in PDF format to create a report for stakeholders reviewing projections.

Given the user has conducted a What-If analysis, when they select the 'Export' option and choose 'PDF', then a well-formatted PDF report containing the analysis results should be generated and downloadable.

User exports simulation results in Excel format to analyze the data further using spreadsheet formulas.

Given the user has finished a What-If analysis, when they choose the 'Export' option and select 'Excel', then an Excel file should be created, containing all relevant data, including charts and tables as displayed in the application.

User needs to verify that the exported data in CSV, PDF, and Excel formats match the data displayed during analysis.

Given the user has exported results in any format, when they open the file, then the data should match exactly with the results presented in the What-If analysis tool, ensuring no discrepancies exist.

Users require integrated access to third-party reporting tools after exporting their analysis results.

Given a user exports their results, when they attempt to link the exported data to a third-party reporting tool, then the data should be seamlessly importable into the third-party application without errors.

Automated Adjustment Alerts

Utilize machine learning to notify Data Analysts when actual sales deviate significantly from predicted trends. With real-time alerts, users can quickly reassess inventory needs and staffing levels, ensuring that operations remain aligned with actual market demands.

Requirements

Real-time Sales Monitoring

"As a Data Analyst, I want to receive real-time alerts when sales deviate from predictions so that I can quickly adjust inventory and staffing levels to meet current demand."

Description

Implement a real-time sales monitoring system that utilizes machine learning algorithms to continuously track actual sales against predicted trends. This system will notify Data Analysts when there are significant deviations, enabling proactive decision-making regarding inventory adjustments and staffing. It integrates seamlessly with existing inventory management and CRM tools, providing synchronized data across the platform. This functionality is crucial in ensuring retailers can respond swiftly to market changes, maintaining optimal inventory levels and customer satisfaction.

Acceptance Criteria

Real-time Sales Monitoring during peak hours of operation

Given that the system is monitoring sales data in real-time, when a deviation of more than 15% from predicted sales occurs, then an automated alert should be sent to Data Analysts within 2 minutes.

Sales monitoring integration with existing inventory system

Given that the real-time sales monitoring system is integrated with the inventory management system, when an alert is triggered for low stock items, then the system should automatically suggest inventory restock levels based on current sales trends.

User interface for monitoring alerts

Given that a Data Analyst is logged into the RetailRevive platform, when an alert for significant sales deviation is triggered, then the alert should be displayed prominently in the dashboard and logged in the alert history section.

Performance evaluation of machine learning algorithm

Given that the machine learning model is trained on historical sales data, when the model is used to predict sales for the upcoming week, then the prediction accuracy should be at least 90% when compared to actual sales data post week.

Notification preferences for Data Analysts

Given that a Data Analyst has different notification preferences, when setting up their account, then the system should allow them to choose between email or in-app notifications for alerts regarding sales deviations.

Testing alert response time

Given that the sales monitoring system is actively tracking sales data, when a significant deviation occurs, then the alert response time should be monitored to ensure it does not exceed 2 minutes.

Analysis of past alert effectiveness

Given that alerts have been triggered for sales deviations over the past month, when a Data Analyst reviews these alerts, then at least 80% should have resulted in successful inventory adjustments and staffing changes.

Machine Learning Model Update

"As a Data Scientist, I want to improve the machine learning model so that the sales predictions remain accurate and useful for retail decision-making."

Description

Develop and integrate a robust machine learning model that continually learns from new sales data and market trends. This model will be responsible for generating accurate sales predictions, training itself to enhance its predictive capabilities over time. By leveraging a variety of data sources, including historical sales, promotional events, and seasonal trends, the system will improve its accuracy and relevance. This requirement is essential for the longevity and adaptability of the automated adjustment alerts feature, ensuring it remains effective in a dynamic market.

Acceptance Criteria

Real-time Sales Data Integration and Adjustment Notification

Given that the machine learning model has been trained with sufficient historical sales data, when actual sales data is inputted, then the system should send an alert to data analysts if the sales deviate from predicted trends by more than 10% within the first hour of data processing.

Validation of Sales Prediction Accuracy

Given that the machine learning model has processed historical sales data, when a new set of sales data is available, then the model's predictions must fall within a 5% margin of error compared to the actual sales for at least 90% of the predicted products over a two-week period.

Continuous Learning from Market Trends

Given that the machine learning model has been deployed, when new sales data and market trends are provided, then the model should adjust its learning parameters and improve its prediction capability within two weeks based on the processed data, as evidenced by a decrease in prediction error rates.

Performance Monitoring and Alert System

Given that alerts are generated when sales deviate from predictions, when anomalies or trends in the sales data are detected, then the system should log these alerts in real-time and categorize them by severity to prioritize analyst review.

User Feedback Incorporation into Model Updates

Given that data analysts interact with the alert system, when they provide feedback on the relevance and timeliness of alerts, then the machine learning model should incorporate this feedback bi-weekly for refinement of its prediction algorithms.

Gaining Insights from Predictive Analytics

Given that the machine learning model has been functioning for a full sales cycle, when analyzed, the predictions should help identify at least three actionable insights regarding inventory management and staffing requirements, showing practical application of the alerts in operational decisions.

Integration with Existing IT Infrastructure

Given that RetailRevive is part of an existing system, when the machine learning model is integrated, then the system should maintain operational stability with zero downtime, and all relevant data streams should connect without data loss during the transition period.

User Interface for Alert Management

"As a Data Analyst, I want to customize the alert settings and view historical data so that I can tailor my responses to alerts based on my specific needs."

Description

Create a user-friendly interface within the RetailRevive platform that allows Data Analysts to manage alert settings effectively. This interface should enable users to customize alert thresholds, view historical alerts, and track their responses to these alerts. An intuitive design will facilitate quick adaptations to changing business needs and improve user engagement with the alert system. This feature is important to ensure that users can maximize the effectiveness of the automated alerts based on their unique operational requirements.

Acceptance Criteria

Data Analyst customizes alert thresholds for sales predictions during peak retail seasons.

Given a Data Analyst is logged into the RetailRevive platform, when they navigate to the Alert Management interface and set a custom threshold for sales deviation, then the system should save the new settings and display a confirmation message of the updated threshold.

Data Analyst reviews historical alerts to analyze past sales trends and responses.

Given a Data Analyst selects the historical alerts tab in the Alert Management interface, when they view past alerts, then the system should display a list of alerts with the date, sales deviation, and user response for each entry.

Data Analyst responds to an alert indicating significant deviation in sales trends.

Given a Data Analyst receives an alert notification about a significant sales deviation, when they acknowledge the alert and input a response action in the system, then the system should log the response and change the alert status to 'resolved'.

Data Analyst adjusts staffing levels based on real-time alert notifications.

Given a Data Analyst receives a real-time alert about declining sales, when they utilize the Alert Management interface to take action on staffing levels, then the system should allow them to adjust staffing information and confirm the changes with a success notification.

Data Analyst tests the alert configuration to ensure correct functionality of the notifications.

Given a Data Analyst is in the Alert Management interface, when they utilize a test feature to simulate a sales deviation alert, then the system should trigger a test alert notification and confirm the alert settings are correctly configured.

Data Analyst examines the user guide for the Alert Management interface functionalities.

Given a Data Analyst accesses the user guide section within the Alert Management interface, when they search for information regarding customizing alerts, then the system should provide comprehensive and easily understandable documentation on the customization process.

Integration with Inventory Management

"As a Retail Manager, I want the alert system to automatically adjust inventory levels so that I can avoid stockouts and maintain optimal inventory levels."

Description

Ensure that the automated adjustment alerts feature integrates with the existing inventory management system, allowing for seamless communication between the two components. This integration will enable automatic updates to inventory levels based on sales deviations and alerts received. By enhancing synchronization between sales tracking and inventory management, retailers can significantly reduce stockouts and overstock situations, leading to increased operational efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria

Automated Alert Notification for Sales Deviation

Given the automated adjustment alerts feature is integrated with inventory management, when actual sales deviate from predicted trends by more than 15%, then the system should trigger a real-time alert to the Data Analyst's dashboard and via email notification.

Seamless Inventory Level Update on Sales Deviation

Given the integration with the inventory management system, when an alert is triggered, then the system should automatically update the inventory levels to reflect the new sales data within 10 minutes of the alert being issued.

Analysis of Alerts Effectiveness

Given that alerts are generated for sales deviations, when a Data Analyst reviews the alerts over a 30-day period, then at least 80% of the alerts should correspond to actionable changes in inventory levels or staffing adjustments.

Threshold Configuration for Alerts

Given access to the settings of the automated adjustment alerts, when a Data Analyst adjusts the deviation threshold from 15% to 10%, then the system should start generating alerts based on the new threshold within the next sales cycle.

Historical Data Reflection in Alerts

Given the automated adjustment alerts are based on machine learning, when historical sales data from the last six months is analyzed, then the accuracy of the alerts should improve by at least 20% compared to the baseline performance before integration.

User Interface for Alert Monitoring

Given the automated adjustment alerts feature is live, when a Data Analyst accesses the alert dashboard, then they should see a clear and organized display of all triggered alerts, including timestamp, sales deviation percentage, and suggested inventory adjustments.

Reporting Dashboard for Alerts

"As a Retail Executive, I want to analyze alert effectiveness through a reporting dashboard so that I can make better strategic decisions based on actionable insights."

Description

Develop a comprehensive reporting dashboard that visualizes alert data and sales predictions over time. This feature will allow stakeholders to analyze patterns in sales trends relative to alerts, providing insights into factors that may be influencing deviations. The dashboard will be integral in facilitating strategic discussions around inventory management and sales strategies, enabling data-driven decision-making. This requirement emphasizes the importance of analytics in supporting retail operations.

Acceptance Criteria

Data Analyst receives an automated alert indicating that actual sales have deviated significantly from predicted trends during a peak sales event, such as a holiday season.

Given the alert system is active, When actual sales deviate from predicted trends by more than 20%, Then a notification should be sent to the Data Analyst within 5 minutes.

The Reporting Dashboard displays sales predictions and alerts for the past 30 days, allowing stakeholders to analyze trends and deviations.

Given the Reporting Dashboard is loaded, When a user selects the 'Sales Trends' tab, Then the dashboard must show a graph plotting sales predictions against actual sales, along with corresponding alert markers for the past 30 days.

A stakeholder evaluates the effectiveness of inventory management strategies using the Reporting Dashboard during a quarterly review meeting.

Given a user has access to the Reporting Dashboard, When the user filters data to show alerts and sales trends for the past quarter, Then the dashboard must update to reflect the correct data within 3 seconds.

Data Analysts analyze how different factors (like promotions, seasonal changes) influence sales deviations using the Reporting Dashboard.

Given the Reporting Dashboard includes an 'Insights' feature, When the user clicks on a deviation alert, Then the dashboard must display contextual factors such as promotions and seasonal data associated with that alert.

The Reporting Dashboard allows users to export alert data for further analysis using external tools.

Given a user is on the Reporting Dashboard, When the user selects 'Export Data', Then a CSV file containing all alerts and sales trends must be generated and downloaded successfully.

Stakeholders conduct a training session on using the Reporting Dashboard to ensure all team members understand its functionality and usage.

Given the training session is completed, When team members are quizzed on the key functionalities of the Reporting Dashboard, Then at least 90% of team members should answer correctly about its features and navigation.

Seasonal Trend Analyzer

This feature analyzes seasonal patterns in sales data and provides insights into when certain products typically peak in demand. By understanding these cycles, retailers can optimize inventory and marketing strategies to capitalize on trends during peak seasons.

Requirements

Seasonal Demand Insights

"As a retail manager, I want to be able to view seasonal demand patterns for my products so that I can optimize inventory levels and marketing strategies accordingly."

Description

The Seasonal Demand Insights requirement involves developing a system that analyzes previous sales data to identify seasonal trends for various products. This feature will pull historical sales information from the database and use predictive analytics to forecast peak demand periods for specific items. By integrating this functionality within RetailRevive, retailers can utilize these insights to refine inventory management, ensuring optimal stock levels ahead of peak seasons. This will enhance profitability by reducing excess stock during low-demand periods and improving customer satisfaction by ensuring popular items are available when needed.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailer uses the Seasonal Trend Analyzer to assess the predicted peak demand for winter clothing based on past sales data.

Given historical sales data for winter clothing, when the retailer accesses the Seasonal Trend Analyzer, then the system should display a report highlighting the predicted peak demand periods for winter clothing over the next 12 months.

Store manager reviews seasonal insights before placing an order for holiday-themed products for the upcoming season.

Given access to the Seasonal Demand Insights, when the store manager reviews the insights, then they should see a clear recommendation on stock levels and ordering timelines for holiday-themed products based on predicted demand.

Retailer monitors the performance of the Seasonal Trend Analyzer after the holiday season to evaluate the accuracy of the predictions.

Given the end of the holiday season, when the retailer compares actual sales data against the predictions made by the Seasonal Trend Analyzer, then the accuracy of the predictions should be reported as a percentage, with an expected accuracy rate of at least 80%.

The system automatically adjusts inventory levels based on predicted seasonal demand for top-selling items.

Given the predictions from the Seasonal Demand Insights, when the retailer implements inventory adjustments, then the inventory system should reflect optimal stock levels for top-selling items within 24 hours of the prediction being generated.

Retailer receives notifications for upcoming seasonal trends that may affect their inventory decisions.

Given that seasonal trends have been identified, when the Seasonal Trend Analyzer detects a significant upcoming trend, then the retailer should receive a notification with actionable insights at least three weeks prior to the expected peak period.

Retail staff attend a training session on how to effectively utilize seasonal insights for inventory planning.

Given the scheduled training session on the Seasonal Trend Analyzer, when the staff completes the training, then they should be able to demonstrate the ability to generate and interpret seasonal insights reports successfully.

Automated Trend Alerts

"As a store owner, I want to receive alerts when specific products show an increase in demand so that I can act quickly to adjust my inventory and marketing efforts."

Description

The Automated Trend Alerts requirement focuses on creating a notification system that automatically alerts retailers when certain products are trending based on sales data analysis. This feature will monitor real-time sales patterns and compare them with historical data to detect significant increases in sales velocity. By integrating these alerts into the RetailRevive platform, retailers can proactively adjust marketing strategies and inventory levels, ensuring they can capitalize on growing trends timely, enhancing their ability to respond to market demands effectively.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailer Sign-In and Initial Setup for Automated Trend Alerts

Given a retailer is signed into the RetailRevive platform, When they navigate to the Automated Trend Alerts section and complete their product selection and parameters for alerts, Then they should receive a confirmation message indicating that alerts have been successfully set up for their selected products.

Real-Time Sales Data Monitoring

Given that the Automated Trend Alerts are active, When there is a significant increase in sales velocity for a selected product, Then the system should automatically trigger an alert notification to the retailer within 15 minutes of detection.

Alert Notification Delivery

Given that an alert is triggered due to a trending product, When the retailer is within the platform's notifications section or has notifications enabled via email, Then they should receive the alert via both the platform and their registered email, ensuring the alert is delivered within 5 minutes.

Historical Data Comparison for Trend Validation

Given that an alert for a trending product has been generated, When the retailer accesses the trend analysis report, Then they should see a visual representation of the sales velocity compared to historical data, confirming the trend is based on valid data.

User Interface for Managing Alerts

Given the retailer is on the Automated Trend Alerts management screen, When they want to modify alert settings for products, Then they should be able to easily adjust product selections and notification preferences, with changes saved and confirmed with a success message.

Alert Performance Analytics

Given the retailer has been using Automated Trend Alerts for at least 30 days, When they review their alert performance metrics, Then they should see analytics indicating the number of alerts received, actions taken in response, and any corresponding increases in sales or inventory turnover rates.

Customizable Trend Reports

"As a data analyst, I want the ability to customize reports analyzing seasonal trends so that I can gain deeper insights into sales performance and make informed business decisions."

Description

The Customizable Trend Reports requirement entails creating a feature that allows retailers to generate and customize reports focused on analyzing seasonal sales data. Users will be able to select specific date ranges, product categories, and sales metrics to create tailored reports that best fit their analysis needs. This feature is critical for enabling retailers to quickly assess key performance indicators and understand the impact of seasonal trends on their business. By allowing customization, retailers can derive more meaningful insights and make data-driven decisions that align with their operational goals.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailers want to generate a seasonal trend report for the past quarter to assess product performance during festive seasons.

Given a user selects the date range as the last quarter and product category as 'Clothing', When they request a report, Then the system generates a report displaying sales metrics for that category with trends highlighted.

A retailer needs to customize their trend report by adding specific metrics such as units sold and revenue generated for a selected product category.

Given a user selects the product category 'Electronics' and chooses metrics 'Units Sold' and 'Revenue', When they generate a report, Then the report displays only the selected metrics accurately reflecting sales data for that category.

Retailers want to analyze the performance of a new product line during the holiday season.

Given a user selects the date range from November to December and the product category 'New Arrivals', When the report is generated, Then it includes insights on sales performance compared to previous years' data for the same period.

A store manager needs to export the customized trend report for further analysis by the accounting team.

Given a user has generated a report with customized parameters, When they choose to export the report, Then the system successfully exports the report in CSV format and provides a confirmation message.

Retail staff want to filter their trend report by multiple criteria to get a more granular view of sales data.

Given a user selects multiple product categories and a specific sales metric, When they apply the filter, Then the report updates to display data only relevant to the selected categories and metrics without errors.

Retailers want to view a visual representation of the seasonal sales trends within the generated report.

Given a user generates a trend report, When the report is displayed, Then it includes visual charts illustrating the seasonal sales trends alongside tabular data for easy interpretation.

Collaborative Insights Sharing

Facilitate team collaboration by allowing Data Analysts to share predictive insights and forecasts with relevant stakeholders through customizable reports. This feature ensures that all team members are aligned on forecasts and can devise collective strategies based on shared insights.

Requirements

Customizable Report Generation

"As a Data Analyst, I want to create customizable reports so that I can share tailored insights with my team, allowing them to make informed decisions based on relevant data."

Description

The ability for Data Analysts to create customizable reports that generate insights based on specific parameters and filters. This feature will enable users to tailor their reports according to the needs of different stakeholders, including sales figures, inventory levels, and customer engagement metrics. By providing this level of customization, teams can focus on the most relevant data, thereby enhancing decision-making processes and improving team collaboration. Users will also have the option to save report templates for future use, streamlining the reporting process further and ensuring consistency in how data is presented.

Acceptance Criteria

Data Analyst creates a customized report for the sales team to review quarterly sales figures and inventory status.

Given a user with Data Analyst role, when they select 'Create Report' and customize parameters for quarterly sales and inventory, then the system generates a report with accurate data reflecting the specified date range and filters applied.

Data Analyst shares a customized report with stakeholders via email or direct link.

Given a generated report, when the Data Analyst chooses the 'Share' option and inputs email addresses or selects users, then all intended recipients receive a shareable link or attachment of the report within 5 minutes.

User saves a report template for future use based on customized reporting parameters.

Given a customized report, when the Data Analyst selects 'Save as Template' and names the template, then the system saves the report format and parameters, allowing it to be accessed from a 'Saved Templates' section later.

Data Analyst applies multiple filters to custom report generation.

Given a Data Analyst wants to create a report, when they apply multiple filters (e.g., sales region, product category, and time period), then the generated report accurately reflects data based on all selected filters without data loss.

System generates a report with visual data representations for stakeholder clarity.

Given a customized report including numerical data, when the Data Analyst requests visual representations, then the report displays charts and graphs, enhancing the view of key insights derived from the data.

User modifies an existing report template to meet new stakeholder requirements.

Given a saved report template, when the Data Analyst modifies its parameters and saves the changes, then the template updates in the system without creating a duplicate, ensuring only one version exists.

Real-time Insights Sharing

"As a Data Analyst, I want to share real-time insights with my team so that we can quickly adapt our strategies based on the most current data, fostering an agile working environment."

Description

This feature will allow Data Analysts to share predictive insights and forecasts instantaneously with stakeholders through the platform. It will include functionality for alerts and notifications, ensuring that relevant team members are updated in real-time about any significant changes or forecasts. This is crucial for ensuring that all team members are aligned on the latest data and can adjust strategies promptly. The integration with existing communication tools such as email or messaging platforms will enhance collaboration by enabling direct sharing of insights with a few clicks.

Acceptance Criteria

Data Analyst sharing real-time predictive insights with the sales team during a weekly strategy meeting.

Given the Data Analyst has generated a predictive insight report, when they click on the 'Share' button, then the report should be sent as a notification to all relevant stakeholders' emails and displayed in the team's messaging app.

Stakeholders receiving alerts for significant changes in predictive insights that affect inventory management decisions.

Given that a significant change occurs in the predictive insights, when the alert is triggered, then all relevant stakeholders should receive an immediate alert notification through both email and the in-platform messaging system.

Real-time collaboration with stakeholders accessing shared predictive insights for review and discussion.

Given a shared predictive insights report is available, when stakeholders access the report, then they should see the most up-to-date data and have the ability to leave comments or questions directly on the report.

Integration of real-time insights with existing communication tools for seamless sharing.

Given the Data Analyst shares a report using an integrated communication tool, when they select the report and click 'Send', then the report must be sent correctly to the selected communication tool without errors or disruptions.

Assessing the usability of the real-time insights sharing feature among Data Analysts.

Given Data Analysts are using the real-time insights sharing function, when they share a report, then at least 80% of the users should report satisfaction with the ease of use and effectiveness in communicating insights.

Evaluating the responsiveness of stakeholders receiving insights on their mobile devices.

Given a predictive insight is shared, when stakeholders open the notification on their mobile devices, then they should be able to access the report and its insights within 3 seconds on average.

Stakeholder Access Control

"As a Product Manager, I want to control stakeholder access to reports so that I can ensure sensitive data is protected while facilitating collaboration among the team."

Description

Implementing user access controls will allow for different levels of access to be assigned to various team members based on their roles. This feature is essential for ensuring that sensitive data is shared appropriately, and only authorized personnel can view or edit specific reports. It will enhance security and data privacy while allowing greater collaboration among team members. By assigning roles such as Admin, Editor, and Viewer, the system can ensure that users have access to the information they need without compromising on security.

Acceptance Criteria

Admin User Assigns Access Roles to Team Members

Given an Admin user is logged in, When they navigate to the user management section and attempt to assign roles (Admin, Editor, Viewer) to team members, Then the roles should be successfully assigned, and a confirmation message should be displayed.

Editor User Edits a Shared Report

Given an Editor user has access to a shared report, When they make changes to the report and save it, Then the changes should be visible to all users with access to that report, and a version history should be maintained.

Viewer User Attempts to Edit a Report

Given a Viewer user is logged in, When they attempt to edit a report they have access to, Then an error message should be displayed indicating insufficient permissions to edit the report.

Admin User Revokes Access from Team Member

Given an Admin user is logged in, When they revoke access for a team member, Then the team member should no longer be able to view or edit any reports, and the Admin should receive a confirmation message of the revocation.

System Logs Role Changes

Given any user role assignment or revocation occurs, When a role change happens, Then the system should log this change with a timestamp, the user's details, and the action taken in the audit log.

Access Control List Displays User Roles

Given an Admin user is logged in, When they view the access control list, Then the list should display all team members along with their assigned roles and access levels correctly.

Interactive Data Visualizations

"As a Data Analyst, I want to create interactive data visualizations in my reports so that my team can better understand the insights and engage with the data effectively."

Description

This requirement focuses on providing Data Analysts with interactive visualization tools for presenting their reports and insights. Users will be able to create charts, graphs, and dashboards that can visually represent data trends and forecasts. Interactive elements will allow stakeholders to engage with the data directly, providing the ability to drill down into specifics or view different perspectives without cluttering the reports with excessive detail. This will enhance understanding and engagement with the insights being shared, ultimately leading to better strategic discussions.

Acceptance Criteria

Data Analysts need to present quarterly sales forecasts to the executive team using interactive dashboards that showcase trends and performance metrics.

Given the Data Analyst has selected the quarterly sales forecast report, when they share it with the executive team, then the dashboard should display interactive charts that allow stakeholders to filter data by product category and region.

A marketing team member wants to analyze customer engagement data over the last year and share findings with the product development team.

Given the marketing team member has accessed the customer engagement report, when they drill down into the monthly engagement data, then the visualizations should update to reflect the selected month without reloading the entire page.

During a team meeting, multiple stakeholders want to collaboratively assess the risk levels of various stock items based on predictive analytics.

Given the data is shared in a collaborative meeting environment, when stakeholders interact with the risk assessment chart, then they should be able to highlight specific items and view detailed tooltips with forecasts and recommendations.

Sales team members need to review weekly performance metrics to strategize upcoming sales strategies in their weekly meeting.

Given the sales team members access the weekly performance metrics dashboard, when they engage with the graphical data, then they should be able to export the visualizations into a PDF report for distribution.

A product manager wants to see real-time inventory levels and sales forecasts to make informed decisions about reordering supplies.

Given the product manager is on the inventory dashboard, when they look at the interactive visualizations, then the data should update in real-time as new sales data comes in.

Data Analysts need to compare past and present sales data to identify trends over the last two years during a quarterly strategy meeting.

Given the Data Analyst has selected the two-year sales comparison report, when the data is visualized, then the report should allow side-by-side comparisons with the ability to switch between different time periods dynamically.

Feedback Mechanism for Reports

"As a team member, I want to provide feedback on the reports shared with me so that we can improve our collective understanding and effectiveness in decision-making."

Description

A built-in feedback mechanism will allow stakeholders to provide their input on the reports shared with them. This feature will enable users to comment directly on specific insights or sections of the report, fostering a collaborative environment where continuous improvement is encouraged. Analysts can track these feedback responses, leading to more refined reports in the future that better meet stakeholder needs. This will also create a more interactive and engaged experience around the reports.

Acceptance Criteria

Stakeholders access a shared predictive insights report and comment on specific insights, leading to discussions about future strategies.

Given a shared report is available, when a stakeholder views the report, then they can add comments to specific sections and submit feedback.

Data Analysts receive notifications for every comment or feedback left by stakeholders on the reports they shared.

Given a stakeholder submits a comment, when the comment is posted, then the Data Analyst receives an email notification with the details of the comment.

A summary of stakeholder feedback is generated and displayed to Data Analysts for review, showing trends and satisfaction levels with the insights provided.

Given multiple stakeholders provide feedback, when all feedback is collected, then a summary report is generated showing the average satisfaction rating and key themes identified.

For reports shared weekly, Data Analysts analyze stakeholder feedback trends to adjust upcoming insights.

Given end-of-week data exchange, when Data Analysts review the feedback trends, then they must adjust the insights reported for the next week based on feedback received on previous reports.

Stakeholders can rate the usefulness of each section of the report on a scale from 1 to 5, enabling quantitative analysis of report value.

Given a report section, when a stakeholder submits a rating, then the system records the rating and calculates an overall usefulness score for the report.

Stakeholders can request clarifications or follow-up questions related to specific insights directly within the comment section of the report.

Given a stakeholder has a question about a report insight, when they post that question in the comments, then the Data Analyst must receive the question tagged to the relevant section of the report.

A mechanism is in place for stakeholders to track responses to their comments and questions over time, enhancing collaboration.

Given a comment or question is posted, when stakeholders view the report later, then they can see responses or any updates made by Analysts related to their feedback.

Forecast Accuracy Dashboard

An analytical dashboard that displays the accuracy of previous forecasts, comparing predicted sales to actual outcomes. By evaluating forecasting performance over time, Data Analysts can refine their methodologies, learning what techniques yield the best accuracy.

Requirements

Forecast Data Integration

"As a Data Analyst, I want to integrate real-time sales data from all channels into the Forecast Accuracy Dashboard so that I can accurately compare forecasts against actual sales outcomes and enhance my forecasting techniques."

Description

Implement a system that seamlessly integrates real-time sales data from different channels (e.g., online, in-store) to enhance the Forecast Accuracy Dashboard. This integration will allow Data Analysts to pull in a comprehensive dataset that reflects actual sales against forecasts. The accurate aggregation of data sources will ensure that the dashboard provides a reliable evaluation of forecasting performance. This requirement is vital as it enables a single source of truth, eliminates silos of information, and supports robust analysis, ultimately leading to refined forecasting methods and improved business decision-making.

Acceptance Criteria

Real-time Integration of Sales Data into the Forecast Accuracy Dashboard.

Given that real-time sales data from online and in-store channels are available, when the integration system processes the data, then the Forecast Accuracy Dashboard should display the updated sales information accurately within 5 minutes of data collection.

Validation of Forecast Accuracy Using Integrated Data.

Given that historical sales data has been integrated into the dashboard, when a Data Analyst generates a forecast accuracy report, then the report must reflect an accuracy rate calculated by comparing actual sales to predicted sales over the last 30 days, with at least 90% accuracy.

User Access to the Integrated Dashboard Features.

Given that a Data Analyst has been granted access to the dashboard, when they log in and navigate to the Forecast Accuracy Dashboard, then they should have access to view and analyze sales data from all integrated channels without error.

Update Frequency of Integrated Data Displayed.

Given that real-time sales data is continuously collected, when the integration is active, then the Forecast Accuracy Dashboard must refresh the displayed data automatically every 10 minutes without user intervention.

System Performance During High Data Volume Loads.

Given that sales volumes can vary significantly, when the data integration system experiences high transaction loads (e.g., during seasonal sales), then it must maintain a response time of less than 3 seconds to display updated dashboard information.

Error Handling for Integration Disruptions.

Given that there may be occasional disruptions in data flow, when an error occurs during data integration, then the system must display a clear and informative error message on the dashboard and log the error details for further analysis.

Historical Data Analysis

"As a Data Analyst, I want to analyze historical sales data within the Forecast Accuracy Dashboard so that I can identify trends and refine my forecasting methods based on past performance."

Description

Develop functionalities within the Forecast Accuracy Dashboard that allow Data Analysts to analyze historical sales data over customizable time frames. This feature will enable users to assess the accuracy of past forecasts and identify trends or patterns that impact forecasting accuracy. By providing advanced analytical tools and visualizations, like graphs and comparative metrics, this requirement aims to furnish analysts with insights necessary for improving future forecasting accuracy and overall business strategy.

Acceptance Criteria

Data Analysts want to analyze sales data from the past year to evaluate the accuracy of their forecasting models.

Given that the Data Analyst selects a custom time frame of one year, When they input the time frame into the Forecast Accuracy Dashboard, Then the dashboard should display historical sales data alongside predicted sales, including a visual representation of accuracy metrics such as a percentage and graph comparison.

A Data Analyst is reviewing quarterly forecasts to identify seasonal trends that affect sales accuracy.

Given that the Data Analyst selects a quarterly time frame in the Forecast Accuracy Dashboard, When they apply the analysis, Then the dashboard should provide detailed analytics on sales performance and forecast accuracy for each quarter, showing a comparative graph of predicted vs actual sales.

A Data Analyst notices discrepancies in forecast predictions for a particular month and wants to dig deeper into the data.

Given that the Data Analyst selects a specific month and clicks on the inquiry option in the Forecast Accuracy Dashboard, When the data is retrieved, Then detailed insights including predictive modeling techniques and historical influences on that month should be displayed in a report format.

Data Analysts frequently need to share forecasting accuracy insights with management to propose strategy adjustments.

Given that the Data Analyst creates a report from the Forecast Accuracy Dashboard, When they generate the report, Then the report should include visual graphs, key findings, and comments on forecast accuracy trends, formatted for easy sharing and presentation.

A Data Analyst wants to compare the performance of different forecasting models used over the past year.

Given that the Data Analyst selects multiple forecasting models in the Forecast Accuracy Dashboard, When they run the comparison analysis, Then the dashboard should provide a side-by-side comparison of accuracy metrics for all selected models, highlighting the best-performing one.

Data Analysts need to adjust the time frame of their analysis to better understand forecast accuracy for different sales periods.

Given that the Data Analyst accesses the date selection tool in the Forecast Accuracy Dashboard, When they adjust the start and end dates, Then the dashboard should refresh and show updated accuracy metrics for the newly selected time frame without any delays.

User Access Controls

"As an Admin, I want to implement role-based access controls for the Forecast Accuracy Dashboard so that sensitive data is protected and only authorized personnel can access or modify forecasting information."

Description

Establish role-based access controls for the Forecast Accuracy Dashboard to ensure that only authorized users can view or manipulate sensitive data. This requirement should include creating different access levels for Data Analysts, Managers, and Admins, while providing audit logs to track changes and access patterns. By implementing strict security measures, the integrity of data is safeguarded, and compliance with data protection regulations is ensured, empowering users to conduct analyses confidently and securely.

Acceptance Criteria

Data Analysts accessing the Forecast Accuracy Dashboard to review accuracy metrics and identify improvements for their forecasting methods.

Given a Data Analyst is logged into the system, when they attempt to access the Forecast Accuracy Dashboard, then they should be able to view forecast accuracy metrics but not alter any settings or data.

Managers reviewing the Forecast Accuracy Dashboard to assess team performance and make strategic decisions based on forecast accuracy.

Given a Manager is logged into the system, when they access the Forecast Accuracy Dashboard, then they should be able to view all metrics and historical data but should not have permissions to change access controls.

Admins managing user access controls for the Forecast Accuracy Dashboard to ensure proper security measures and compliance.

Given an Admin is logged into the system, when they access the user management settings, then they should be able to create, modify, and delete user roles with appropriate permissions for the Forecast Accuracy Dashboard.

Auditing user access and changes made to the Forecast Accuracy Dashboard to ensure compliance and accountability.

Given an Admin wants to review audit logs, when they access the audit log feature, then they should see a comprehensive history of user access and any changes made in the Forecast Accuracy Dashboard, including timestamps and user IDs.

A Data Analyst attempting to access the Forecast Accuracy Dashboard without proper authorization.

Given a user without the Data Analyst role attempts to access the Forecast Accuracy Dashboard, when they try to log in, then they should receive an access denied message and be redirected to the login page.

Managers generating reports based on data from the Forecast Accuracy Dashboard to share with stakeholders.

Given a Manager is on the Forecast Accuracy Dashboard, when they attempt to generate a report, then the report should include accurate data as displayed on the dashboard and should have options to export in multiple formats (PDF, CSV).

Visual Analytics Enhancements

"As a Data Analyst, I want to have advanced visual analytics features in the Forecast Accuracy Dashboard so that I can easily interpret and communicate forecasting accuracy insights to stakeholders."

Description

Incorporate advanced visual analytics features in the Forecast Accuracy Dashboard, including charts, graphs, and interactive elements that allow users to easily understand their forecasting accuracy at a glance. By utilizing data visualization best practices, this requirement aims to transform complex data into intuitive insights, making it easier for Data Analysts and stakeholders to interpret results and communicate findings effectively. Enhanced visual analytics will facilitate better decision-making and strategy formulation based on accurate forecasting analysis.

Acceptance Criteria

Data Analysts accessing the Forecast Accuracy Dashboard to compare previous sales forecasts against actual sales data in order to evaluate forecasting methodologies.

Given that a Data Analyst is logged into the Forecast Accuracy Dashboard, when they select a specific date range for past sales forecasts, then a line chart should display the predicted sales against actual sales for that period, with clear labels and legend.

A Data Analyst reviewing the accuracy of forecasts over quarterly periods to identify trends and patterns that can inform future stocks.

Given that a Data Analyst views the Forecast Accuracy Dashboard for the quarter, when they hover over any point on the accuracy line graph, then a tooltip should display the exact percentage accuracy for that point in time.

Stakeholders participating in a monthly review meeting to assess the effectiveness of forecasting methods based on the latest data presented in the dashboard.

Given that stakeholders are reviewing the Forecast Accuracy Dashboard, when they request to visualize forecast accuracy over a year, then a bar chart should represent monthly accuracy percentages, allowing for easy comparison and identification of outliers.

A Data Analyst wants to explore different predictive analytics techniques to improve accuracy based on past results shown in the dashboard.

Given that a Data Analyst is reviewing the Forecast Accuracy Dashboard, when they apply filters for specific forecasting techniques, then the dashboard should update to show separate accuracy metrics for each technique applied, presented as distinct datasets in the graph.

Support team needs to train new users on interpreting forecasting analytics accurately using the dashboard's features.

Given that new users are accessing the Forecast Accuracy Dashboard for training, when they click on the ‘Help’ icon, then a guided tutorial should launch, explaining how to interpret each visual element on the dashboard.

The dashboard data needs to be refreshed to include the latest sales data for real-time accuracy assessment.

Given that a Data Analyst clicks the 'Refresh' button on the Forecast Accuracy Dashboard, when the data refresh process is completed, then the charts and graphs should automatically update to reflect the latest sales data without any delay of more than 2 seconds.

Performance Feedback Loop

"As a Data Analyst, I want a feedback mechanism to suggest improvements in forecasting methods within the Forecast Accuracy Dashboard so that I can contribute to a continuous improvement process in forecasting accuracy."

Description

Create a feedback mechanism within the Forecast Accuracy Dashboard that allows Data Analysts to submit evaluations of the accuracy of forecasts and suggest improvements in methodology. The feedback would be gathered to assess the effectiveness of different forecasting techniques over time. This feature will enhance collaborative analysis, drive continuous improvement, and foster a culture of innovation in forecasting practices, ultimately increasing the Dashboard's utility and accuracy.

Acceptance Criteria

Data Analyst submits feedback for a forecast that had a 20% deviation from predicted sales to suggest methodological improvements.

Given a forecast with a known deviation, when the Data Analyst submits feedback, then the feedback should be recorded with an associated reason for the deviation and suggested improvements.

Data Analyst accesses the Forecast Accuracy Dashboard to review previous forecasts and their accuracy over the past six months.

Given the Dashboard displays historical forecast data, when the Data Analyst filters data by month, then the Dashboard should update to show only forecasts from the selected month with accuracy metrics displayed.

Data Analyst checks if the feedback submission affects the dashboard metrics over time.

Given the feedback is submitted and associated with a forecast, when the feedback is analyzed after one month, then the Dashboard should reflect changes in forecasting accuracy metrics if the suggested improvements have been implemented.

Multiple Data Analysts submit feedback on different forecasts in the same reporting period to gauge collective insight on forecasting practices.

Given multiple submissions from different Analysts, when feedback is summarized, then the Dashboard should aggregate feedback and highlight common improvement themes or recommendations.

Data Analyst reviews the impact of feedback on forecasting techniques at the end of each quarter.

Given quarterly data is available, when the Analyst reviews the Dashboard, then it should display the performance of forecasting techniques before and after feedback implementation with clear visual comparisons.

Data Analyst evaluates the user interface for submitting feedback to ensure it is user-friendly and intuitive.

Given the feedback interface is designed, when the Data Analyst uses the interface to submit feedback, then it should require no more than three clicks to complete the submission process and receive confirmation of receipt.

Integrative Data Sourcing

This feature harnesses data from various internal and external sources—including e-commerce platforms, market trends, and economic indicators—to enrich the forecasting model. By aggregating diverse data sets, retailers can enhance the accuracy of their sales predictions and stay ahead of market shifts.

Requirements

Data Integration API

"As a retail manager, I want to integrate data from multiple sources so that I can enhance the accuracy of my sales forecasts and make informed decisions based on the latest market trends."

Description

The Data Integration API requirement enables seamless connection and data exchange between RetailRevive and various internal and external data sources, such as e-commerce platforms, market analysis services, and economic databases. This integration allows for real-time data retrieval and updates, ensuring that RetailRevive has access to the most current and relevant information. Benefits include improved forecasting accuracy, enhanced decision-making capabilities, and the ability to quickly adapt to changing market conditions. The successful implementation of this API is crucial for users to leverage diverse datasets to enrich their sales predictions and optimize inventory management as part of their operational strategy.

Acceptance Criteria

Data Retrieval from E-commerce Platforms

Given that the Data Integration API is properly configured, when a request for data is made from an e-commerce platform, then the API should successfully retrieve and return the relevant sales data within 2 seconds.

Integration with Market Analysis Services

Given that the Data Integration API is active, when it connects to a market analysis service, then it should successfully aggregate data from at least three different market indicators without error.

Real-time Data Updates

Given that data sources are active, when changes occur in any integrated data source, then the Data Integration API should update RetailRevive's database within 5 minutes to reflect the most current information.

Error Handling for Failed Data Connections

Given that the Data Integration API attempts to connect to an external data source, when the connection fails, then the API should log the error and send an alert to the system administrator without crashing.

User Authentication and Security

Given that the Data Integration API is in use, when a data request is made, then the API should validate the user's access credentials and only grant access to users with appropriate permissions.

Data Integrity Check

Given that data has been integrated through the API, when the data is retrieved, then the retrieved dataset should match the original source data with at least 99% accuracy, verified by a checksum comparison.

Analytics Dashboard Update

Given that the Data Integration API has processed new data from integrated sources, when the data is updated, then the analytics dashboard within RetailRevive should reflect these updates in real-time, showing changes in key performance indicators.

Automated Data Aggregation

"As a data analyst, I want automated aggregation of data from different platforms to save time and reduce errors in my reports, enabling me to focus on analyzing trends rather than collecting data."

Description

This requirement involves the automation of data aggregation processes to consolidate information from various sources into a unified reporting structure. By automating data collection and processing, RetailRevive users can significantly decrease the time spent on manual data entry and analysis. This feature is essential for maintaining accurate records while providing users with timely insights into sales trends and customer behaviors. The automation process will eliminate human errors, improve reliability, and enable retailers to focus on strategic initiatives rather than operational tasks. To achieve the desired results, the automated system will be designed to handle various data formats and sources robustly.

Acceptance Criteria

Automated Data Aggregation for Real-time Sales Reporting

Given that the user has connected multiple data sources, when the automated data aggregation process is triggered, then all relevant data should be consolidated into a unified report within 5 minutes of the trigger.

Integration of Diverse Data Formats

Given that various data formats (CSV, JSON, XML) are used by different sources, when the data aggregation process occurs, then the system should successfully ingest and process at least 95% of the provided data formats without errors.

Error Handling during Data Aggregation

Given that there are potential issues with the data sources, when an error occurs during the aggregation process, then the system should log the error and notify the user immediately, providing details on the source of the error and possible steps to resolve it.

Real-time Data Update Frequency

Given that new data can be generated at any time, when the data aggregation system is running, then it should refresh and update sales reports at least every 10 minutes without user intervention.

User Access and Permissions for Data Aggregation

Given that the platform has multiple user roles, when accessing the automated data aggregation feature, then users should only see the data relevant to their role or permissions as defined in the system settings.

Performance Benchmark for Data Processing Speed

Given a specific volume of data from multiple sources, when the automated data aggregation process is initiated, then it should process a dataset of 10,000 entries in under 3 minutes, ensuring system efficiency.

User Feedback on Data Accuracy and Insights

Given that users rely on the system for decision-making, when the data aggregation is complete, then at least 80% of users should report that the insights provided are accurate and actionable within 24 hours of the report generation.

Predictive Analytics Dashboard

"As a store owner, I want to access a predictive analytics dashboard so that I can visualize trends and make data-driven decisions regarding inventory and promotions before problems arise."

Description

The Predictive Analytics Dashboard requirement encompasses the development of a user-friendly interface that synthesizes information from integrated data sources into predictive models. The dashboard will provide visual representations of forecasts, highlighting trends and insights that can assist retailers in making proactive decisions. By utilizing advanced analytics, users can identify potential market shifts, inventory needs, and customer preferences before they occur. This feature aligns with RetailRevive's goal of transforming retail operations from reactive to proactive and is essential for guiding strategic planning and inventory management.

Acceptance Criteria

Display the Predictive Analytics Dashboard with synthesized data from integrated sources for various retail scenarios such as seasonal sales analysis and inventory forecasting.

Given the user is logged into the RetailRevive platform, when they navigate to the Predictive Analytics Dashboard, then the dashboard should display real-time data visualizations that aggregate information from all connected data sources correctly.

Allow users to customize the view of the Predictive Analytics Dashboard by selecting specific metrics and data sources relevant to their retail operations.

Given the user is on the Predictive Analytics Dashboard, when they select preferred data sources and metrics from the customization options, then the dashboard should update instantly to reflect the selected metrics and sources without lag.

Provide actionable insights on inventory needs based on predictive analytics data for the next quarter.

Given the user accesses the inventory forecasting section of the Predictive Analytics Dashboard, when they view the insights, then the dashboard should present accurate predictions of inventory needs, highlighting potential shortages or overstock situations based on predictive analytics.

Ensure that the Predictive Analytics Dashboard generates alerts for market shifts based on the aggregated data trends.

Given the dashboard is tracking market trends and user-defined thresholds, when a significant shift is detected, then the system should automatically generate alerts and notify users through email or push notifications.

Facilitate a user-friendly experience by ensuring that the Predictive Analytics Dashboard has intuitive navigation and help resources.

Given a new user accesses the Predictive Analytics Dashboard for the first time, when they explore the interface, then the navigation should be clear and intuitive, and help resources should be accessible within two clicks from any section of the dashboard.

Test the performance of the Predictive Analytics Dashboard by simulating data inputs from multiple sources simultaneously to evaluate response time and accuracy.

Given the system is loaded with real-time simulated data from multiple data sources, when the data is processed, then the dashboard should render updated visuals within a maximum of 3 seconds with 100% accuracy of the displayed information.

Ensure that users can download and export reports generated from the Predictive Analytics Dashboard to share insights with their teams.

Given the user is viewing a report on the Predictive Analytics Dashboard, when they choose to download or export the report, then the file should successfully download in at least three formats (PDF, Excel, CSV) without errors.

Interactive Learning Modules

Engage employees with interactive training modules that incorporate quizzes, scenarios, and media. These modules not only make the learning experience more effective but also enhance retention of knowledge, allowing staff to grasp essential concepts and skills quickly.

Requirements

Module Creation Interface

"As a training manager, I want to easily create interactive learning modules so that my team can quickly upskill and adapt to changing retail needs."

Description

The Module Creation Interface allows administrators to effortlessly create and customize interactive training modules within the RetailRevive platform. This interface should support various formats, including text, video, quizzes, and scenarios, promoting an engaging learning environment. By streamlining the module creation process, it enables retailers to quickly adapt training content to meet specific employee needs and evolving market conditions, ultimately enhancing workforce adaptability and performance.

Acceptance Criteria

Module Creation Process for New Training Content

Given the administrator is logged into the RetailRevive platform, when they navigate to the Module Creation Interface, then they must be able to create a new interactive training module using a combination of text, video, quizzes, and scenarios without any errors.

Customization Options for Training Modules

Given an administrator is in the Module Creation Interface, when they select a module type, then they should be able to customize the content, including adding images, videos, and specific quiz questions, ensuring all elements can be modified as needed.

Saving and Publishing a Created Module

Given an administrator has completed creating a training module, when they click the save and publish button, then the module should be saved and made available for employee access immediately, with a confirmation message displayed.

Interactive Features Engagement

Given an employee is accessing the training module, when they complete a quiz or scenario included in the module, then their performance should be recorded in the system, and they must receive immediate feedback on their answers.

Editing an Existing Training Module

Given an administrator has an existing training module, when they select the edit option, then they should be able to modify the content and settings without losing any previously saved data, and changes should be reflected upon saving.

Adding User Roles and Permissions

Given an administrator is setting up the training module, when they specify user roles, then only designated employees should have access to specific modules based on their assigned roles within the organization.

Analytics and Reporting of Training Module Usage

Given training modules have been published, when administrators access the analytics dashboard, then they should be able to view details about employee engagement, quiz scores, and completion rates in real-time.

Progress Tracking Dashboard

"As a store manager, I want to see the progress of my employees in the interactive learning modules so that I can identify areas where additional training is needed."

Description

The Progress Tracking Dashboard provides real-time insights into employee performance, engagement, and completion rates of the interactive learning modules. This dashboard will help managers identify knowledge gaps, track learning efficiency, and assess the overall effectiveness of the training modules. By leveraging this data, retailers can optimize training strategies, ensuring employees are well-prepared and knowledgeable, which in turn enhances customer service quality.

Acceptance Criteria

Employee accesses the Progress Tracking Dashboard after completing the interactive learning module to view their individual performance metrics.

Given an employee has completed an interactive learning module, when they access the Progress Tracking Dashboard, then they should see their completion status, quiz scores, and engagement metrics for that module.

A manager reviews the Progress Tracking Dashboard to analyze the overall engagement and completion rates of the interactive learning modules across the team.

Given a manager is on the Progress Tracking Dashboard, when they filter for a specific learning module, then they should see aggregate completion rates and average scores for all employees who completed the module.

A manager identifies an employee who is struggling with completion rates based on data from the Progress Tracking Dashboard.

Given a manager reviews the Progress Tracking Dashboard, when they see that an employee has a low completion rate for the interactive learning modules, then they should be able to view detailed performance analytics for that employee and schedule follow-up training.

A new employee uses the Progress Tracking Dashboard for the first time after completing several modules to check their learning progress and overall performance.

Given a new employee has completed multiple interactive learning modules, when they navigate to the Progress Tracking Dashboard, then they should see a summary of their progress including completed modules, engagement scores, and areas for improvement.

The system automatically updates the Progress Tracking Dashboard in real time as employees complete interactive learning modules.

Given employees are completing interactive learning modules, when they finish a module, then the Progress Tracking Dashboard should reflect their updated completion status and learning metrics within 5 minutes.

A manager wants to assess the effectiveness of the training modules over a quarter using data from the Progress Tracking Dashboard.

Given a manager is reviewing the Progress Tracking Dashboard, when they select a quarterly report option, then they should see metrics that compare current engagement and completion rates to the previous quarter.

Mobile Accessibility

"As an employee, I want to access the training modules on my mobile device so that I can learn at my convenience during my shifts or commute."

Description

Mobile Accessibility ensures that the interactive learning modules are fully responsive and usable on various mobile devices. This feature allows employees to engage with training content anytime, anywhere, increasing accessibility and flexibility in their learning process. By facilitating mobile access, retailers can enhance training participation and accommodate diverse work schedules, leading to a more knowledgeable and flexible workforce.

Acceptance Criteria

Employees can access interactive learning modules on their mobile devices during breaks or in transit, enhancing their training experience by allowing learning on-the-go.

Given an employee has a mobile device, when they navigate to the RetailRevive app and select an interactive learning module, then the module should load without errors and be fully functional.

Retail managers can track employee engagement with mobile learning modules across different devices, ensuring all employees have equal access to training.

Given a manager views the training dashboard, when they filter results by mobile device usage, then the dashboard should accurately reflect each employee's engagement statistics for mobile learning modules.

Employees using various mobile operating systems (iOS and Android) must experience consistent functionality of the interactive learning modules, ensuring uniform training access.

Given an employee accesses the interactive learning module on both iOS and Android devices, when they complete a training session, then the progress and completion status should be synchronized and consistent on both platforms.

Employees must be able to pause and resume learning modules on their mobile devices without losing progress, facilitating flexible learning.

Given an employee is engaged in a learning module on any mobile device, when they pause the module, then they should be able to resume from the same point later without losing progress.

The learning modules must adapt to different screen sizes and orientations on mobile devices, providing a user-friendly experience across all devices.

Given an employee accesses the interactive module on devices ranging from smartphones to tablets, when they rotate or resize the device, then the content should automatically adjust to fit the screen appropriately without scrolling issues.

Interactive learning modules should load quickly on mobile devices to prevent user frustration and dropout rates during training.

Given an employee attempts to access a learning module on their mobile device, when they initiate the loading of the module, then it should load within 5 seconds to ensure a seamless experience.

Employees should be able to complete quizzes and receive instant feedback on their mobile devices, enhancing the learning process.

Given an employee completes a quiz within a learning module on their mobile device, when they submit their answers, then they should receive immediate feedback on their performance along with tips for improvement.

Feedback and Assessment Mechanism

"As an employee, I want to receive instant feedback on my quiz results so that I can understand where I need to improve my skills."

Description

The Feedback and Assessment Mechanism allows employees to receive instant feedback on their performance within interactive training modules. This feature should include assessments that gauge comprehension and retention of the material. By providing immediate feedback, employees can understand their strengths and areas needing improvement, fostering a continuous learning culture that enhances overall competency and service standards.

Acceptance Criteria

Employee completes an interactive learning module on customer service skills and receives immediate feedback on their quiz performance.

Given the employee has finished the quiz, When they submit their answers, Then they should receive instant feedback on their performance with detailed explanations for correct and incorrect answers.

An employee retakes a module’s quiz after receiving feedback and aims to improve their score to enhance their understanding of the material.

Given the employee has taken the quiz a second time, When they submit their answers, Then the system must compare the new score with the previous one and display the score improvement and the updated feedback accordingly.

A manager reviews employee feedback reports to identify strengths and areas for improvement based on assessment results from interactive training modules.

Given the manager accesses the feedback report, When they filter by employee performance, Then they should be able to view individual scores and strengths/weaknesses for each employee, ensuring comprehensive overview and analytics.

An employee views their progress in an interactive learning module to track their learning journey and completion status.

Given the employee is within their training portal, When they navigate to the progress section, Then they should see a visual progress tracker that indicates modules completed, ongoing modules, and scores achieved across assessments.

An employee engages in an interactive training module on sales techniques and completes the associated feedback survey at the end.

Given the employee finishes the training module, When they complete the feedback survey, Then the system should record their insights and satisfaction level to improve future training sessions while confirming receipt of their feedback.

Employees participate in group training sessions and need collective feedback on their performance in module assessments to encourage teamwork.

Given the group has completed the training module, When the assessment feedback is generated, Then the system should provide aggregated results showing the group’s overall performance compared to individual contributions, fostering a collaborative learning environment.

Gamification Elements

"As an employee, I want to earn rewards and compete with colleagues while completing the training modules so that I feel motivated to engage with the learning process."

Description

Gamification Elements will incorporate game-like features such as points, badges, and leaderboards into the interactive learning modules. These elements are designed to enhance engagement and motivation among employees, making the learning experience more enjoyable. By fostering a competitive spirit and rewarding progress, retailers can drive participation and retention rates, resulting in a more competent and enthusiastic workforce.

Acceptance Criteria

Employees complete an interactive training module with gamification elements where they can earn points for participation and correct answers.

Given an employee is logged into the training module, When they answer a question correctly, Then they should receive the corresponding points immediately credited to their profile.

A leaderboard displays the top performers based on points earned in the interactive training modules on a weekly basis.

Given multiple employees have completed the training modules, When the leaderboard is accessed, Then it should display the top 10 employees ranked by their total points earned with their names and points visible.

Employees can earn badges upon completion of specific milestones within the training module.

Given an employee completes a module, When they meet the milestone criteria, Then they should receive a badge that is displayed on their profile and can be shared with others.

Employees review their points and progress within their user profile after completing several training modules.

Given an employee has completed multiple training modules, When they access their profile page, Then they should see their total points, badges earned, and a summary of completed modules.

Employees participate in a competitive training event facilitated by the gamification elements of the learning modules.

Given a scheduled training event is live, When employees participate in the interactive modules during the event, Then they should see real-time updates to their points and leaderboard standings reflected within the module interface.

Management analyzes participation and progress data from the gamified learning modules to assess effectiveness.

Given management accesses the analytics dashboard, When they review the training module data, Then they should see metrics such as average scores, completion rates, and total points awarded to employees, allowing for informed decision-making.

Skill Assessment Tools

Integrate assessments at the end of each training module to evaluate employee understanding and retention of material. This feature enables managers to identify areas for improvement, ensuring that training is tailored to meet the specific needs of each employee and boosting overall competency.

Requirements

Assessment Creation Tool

"As a training manager, I want to create customizable assessments for each training module so that I can effectively evaluate employee understanding and retention of the material."

Description

The Assessment Creation Tool allows trainers to develop and customize skill assessments for each training module. This functionality includes a user-friendly interface where trainers can select question types (such as multiple-choice, true/false, and open-ended questions) and set grading criteria. The tool also integrates with the training module to automatically link assessments to specific content, ensuring relevance. By utilizing this feature, managers can tailor assessments to the unique needs of their workforce, promoting targeted skill development and improving training outcomes.

Acceptance Criteria

Trainer creates a multiple-choice assessment for a newly developed training module focused on customer service skills.

Given the trainer is on the Assessment Creation Tool interface, When the trainer selects 'Multiple Choice' as the question type, Then the trainer should be able to add at least 5 questions, set correct answers, and save the assessment successfully.

Trainer customizes an open-ended question for a skill assessment after a training module on inventory management.

Given the trainer accesses the Assessment Creation Tool, When the trainer selects 'Open-Ended' as the question type and enters a question, Then the trainer should be able to set a grading rubric and link the assessment to the specific training module successfully.

Manager reviews the assessments created for a specific training module to ensure they align with training objectives.

Given the manager opens the list of assessments linked to the training modules, When the manager views the assessment details, Then the manager should see the assessment type, questions, and grading criteria clearly outlined and aligned with the training content.

Trainer attempts to create an assessment without selecting a question type in the Assessment Creation Tool.

Given the trainer is on the Assessment Creation Tool, When the trainer clicks 'Save' without selecting a question type, Then an error message should appear indicating that a question type must be selected before saving the assessment.

Trainer links a previously created assessment to a new training module.

Given the trainer has an existing assessment, When the trainer chooses the assessment from the list and links it to a new training module, Then the system should confirm the successful linking of the assessment to the training module.

System generates a report on assessment results for a training module after employees complete their assessments.

Given employees have completed the assessments linked to a training module, When the manager requests a report, Then the system should generate a report showing each employee's scores and overall average score for the module within 5 minutes.

Automated Grading System

"As an employee, I want to receive immediate feedback after completing my skill assessment so that I can understand my strengths and areas for improvement right away."

Description

The Automated Grading System automatically assesses employee performance on the skill assessments. This system provides immediate feedback to employees and reports results to managers. The functionality includes the ability to customize scoring rubrics and automatic recording of results in the employee's training record. This efficiency not only saves time for managers but also allows for swift identification of areas where employees excel or require further training, fundamentally enhancing the training evaluation process.

Acceptance Criteria

Automated grading system provides instant feedback to employees after completing skill assessments.

Given an employee completes a skill assessment, when they submit the assessment, then the system should automatically calculate the score and provide feedback within 5 seconds.

Managers receive a detailed report of assessment results for their team after assessments are completed.

Given all employees have completed their assessments, when the manager requests a report, then the system should generate and deliver a report summarizing individual scores and areas for improvement within 10 minutes.

Managers can customize the scoring rubric for different types of assessments.

Given a manager is setting up a skill assessment, when they choose to customize the rubric, then they should be able to add, edit, and remove scoring criteria on the rubric as per the training requirements with changes saved successfully.

The system records assessment results automatically in the employee's training record.

Given an assessment has been completed and graded, when the grading process is finalized, then the results should be automatically logged into the employee's digital training record without any manual intervention required.

Employees can view their assessment scores and feedback post-assessment.

Given an employee has completed an assessment, when they check their training dashboard, then the system should display their latest scores and feedback clearly and accurately.

The grading system ensures that assessments are fair and consistent across all employees.

Given that multiple employees take the same assessment, when their scores are compared, then the variance in scores should not exceed the threshold of 10% for similar performance levels according to the grading criteria.

The grading system alerts employees for retakes in areas they scored below a predefined threshold.

Given an employee receives a score below the threshold for a specific skill, when the grading is finalized, then the system should automatically notify the employee about the retake opportunity and provide them with resources for improvement.

Progress Tracking Dashboard

"As a manager, I want to access a dashboard that tracks employee progress in training so that I can identify who may need additional support and guidance."

Description

The Progress Tracking Dashboard provides managers with an overview of employee performance across all training modules, displaying completion rates, average scores, and individual assessment results. This dashboard is designed to highlight training effectiveness and gauge improvement over time. It offers graphical representations of data for easy interpretation, allowing for informed decision-making regarding training strategies and areas of focus. This feature enhances managerial oversight of employee development and facilitates proactive engagement with underperforming team members.

Acceptance Criteria

Displaying Employee Progress for Managers

Given a manager accesses the Progress Tracking Dashboard, when they view the dashboard, then they should see a graphical representation of employee performance containing completion rates and average scores for each training module.

Accessing Individual Assessment Results

Given a manager is on the Progress Tracking Dashboard, when they select an individual employee, then they should see a detailed report showing the employee's assessment results and areas needing improvement.

Filtering Data by Training Module

Given the manager is viewing the Progress Tracking Dashboard, when they apply a filter to view performance based on a specific training module, then only the data relevant to that module should be displayed on the dashboard.

Tracking Trend of Employee Performance Over Time

Given a manager is using the Progress Tracking Dashboard, when they select a time period, then they should see a graphical trend that represents employee performance metrics over that period.

Identifying Underperforming Employees

Given the manager views the Progress Tracking Dashboard, when they analyze the average scores and completion rates, then they should be able to identify employees who fall below a predefined performance threshold within specific training modules.

Exporting Dashboard Data for Reporting

Given a manager is on the Progress Tracking Dashboard, when they choose to export the dashboard data, then a report should be generated that includes all visible data in a CSV format for further analysis.

Receiving Insights and Recommendations

Given a manager utilizes the Progress Tracking Dashboard, when they examine the data presented, then they should receive actionable insights and recommendations based on the assessment results and completion rates.

Feedback Collection Mechanism

"As an employee, I want to provide feedback on my training experience so that I can contribute to the improvement of future training sessions and modules."

Description

The Feedback Collection Mechanism allows employees to provide feedback on the training modules and assessments. This component includes a survey tool that can be customized to assess various aspects of the training experience, such as clarity of instruction and relevance of content. Analyzing this feedback will help improve future training programs and understand the employee experience, fostering a culture of continuous improvement and engagement in employee development.

Acceptance Criteria

Employee submits feedback after completing a training module through the integrated feedback collection tool.

Given an employee has completed a training module, when they access the feedback collection tool and submit their feedback, then the feedback should be recorded in the system and acknowledged with a confirmation message.

Manager analyzes feedback data to identify areas for improvement in training modules.

Given a manager accesses the feedback collection summary report, when they review the responses from employees, then they should be able to filter, sort, and export feedback data for further analysis.

Employee experiences issues with the clarity of the training module instructions and uses the feedback mechanism to indicate this.

Given the feedback collection tool includes a question on clarity of instructions, when an employee rates this aspect, then their response should be used in the compilation of metrics for future training enhancements.

Training modules are updated based on feedback received from employees regarding content relevance.

Given feedback indicates low relevance, when a training module is reviewed, then the content should be updated or modified to better reflect employee needs as determined by the feedback analysis.

Employees are reminded to provide feedback on training modules by the system.

Given the training module is completed, when the system prompts employees for feedback through email or notification, then they should receive a reminder to submit feedback within a specific timeframe after the module completion.

Performance Review Integration

"As a HR manager, I want to integrate assessment results into performance reviews so that I can ensure that employee training outcomes contribute to their overall development and career growth."

Description

The Performance Review Integration feature enables seamless incorporation of assessment results into the employee's overall performance evaluations. This includes aligning training outcomes with established performance metrics and ensuring that skill assessments contribute to formal reviews. Implementing this requirement ensures that both training and performance management processes are synchronized, providing a holistic view of employee competency and supporting targeted career development conversations.

Acceptance Criteria

Integration of assessment results into the quarterly performance review process.

Given an employee has completed a training module with an assessment, When the manager reviews the employee's performance metrics, Then the assessment results should automatically populate the performance review report, reflecting the employee's training outcomes clearly.

Managers can view assessment results during performance review discussions with employees.

Given the performance review report includes assessment results, When a manager accesses the report during a review meeting, Then the manager should be able to reference the assessment results in real-time and discuss them with the employee for targeted feedback and development.

Alignment of training outcomes with performance metrics in the HR system.

Given the integration of the assessment results, When the training outcomes are compared to the performance metrics in the HR system, Then there should be a direct correlation visible in the analytics dashboard indicating the impact of training on employee performance levels.

Customization of performance review templates to include skill assessment results.

Given the performance review process, When a manager selects the template for the review, Then the template should automatically include sections for skill assessment results, allowing for comprehensive evaluations.

Feedback mechanism for employees on their skill assessments.

Given an employee's assessment results have been incorporated into their performance review, When the employee views their review report, Then they should have access to feedback comments regarding their assessment results to enhance their understanding and development opportunities.

Security and privacy compliance for performance review data.

Given that employee assessment results are sensitive data, When the integration takes place, Then all data should be encrypted and only accessible to authorized personnel, ensuring compliance with privacy regulations.

Reporting functionalities to track trends in employee competency over time.

Given the integration of performance reviews with assessment results, When managers generate competency reports, Then the system should display trends over time showing progress and areas needing improvement, enabling strategic workforce planning.

Gamified Training Experience

Utilize gamification elements such as badges, leaderboards, and rewards to motivate employees during their training journey. This feature creates a fun and competitive environment, encouraging staff participation and increasing completion rates of training modules.

Requirements

Badge System Implementation

"As a training manager, I want employees to earn badges for completing training modules so that I can motivate them to engage more fully in their training journey and recognize their achievements."

Description

The Badge System will allow employees to earn virtual badges as they complete training modules. Badges will serve as recognition of their achievements and encourage them to engage with more training content. This system will integrate seamlessly with the existing training platform, providing a visual representation of employee progress and motivating them to reach new milestones. The implementation will include criteria for earning badges, a display system on the user dashboard, and potentially social sharing options for employees to showcase their accomplishments.

Acceptance Criteria

User earns a badge after completing a training module.

Given an employee completes all steps of a training module, when the training module is marked as complete, then the employee should earn the corresponding badge and it should be displayed on their dashboard.

Badges must be visually represented on the user dashboard.

Given an employee has earned badges, when they navigate to their user dashboard, then all earned badges should be displayed with clear graphics indicating the badge name and achievement date.

Employees should be able to share earned badges on social media.

Given an employee has received a badge, when they access the badge details, then there should be an option to share the badge on at least two social media platforms (e.g., Facebook, LinkedIn).

Criteria for earning badges should be clear and accessible to users.

Given a training module, when an employee views the module details, then the specific criteria for earning associated badges should be described clearly alongside the module information.

Leaderboard functionality must display employees with the most earned badges.

Given multiple employees have earned badges, when an administrator accesses the leaderboard feature, then the leaderboard must accurately reflect the ranking of employees based on the number of badges earned.

Leaderboard Integration

"As a retail employee, I want to see how I rank against my peers on a leaderboard so that I can feel motivated to improve my training performance and earn recognition."

Description

The Leaderboard will display the top employees based on their training progress and achievements. This competitive element will not only motivate individuals but also foster a sense of community within the team. The leaderboards will be updated in real-time and visible on employees' dashboards, showcasing their standings relative to their peers. This integration will include filters for different training modules and the ability to reset leaderboards monthly to maintain ongoing engagement.

Acceptance Criteria

Displaying the Leaderboard Based on Employee Training Progress

Given that an employee is logged into their dashboard, when they navigate to the Leaderboard section, then they should see their ranking and points compared to their peers in real-time based on their training progress.

Real-Time Updates of Leaderboard Rankings

Given that an employee completes a training module, when the module is marked as complete in the system, then the leaderboard should automatically update within 5 minutes to reflect changes in rankings and points immediately.

Filters for Training Modules on the Leaderboard

Given that an employee is viewing the Leaderboard, when they select a filter for a specific training module, then the leaderboard should refresh to display rankings relevant only to that selected module.

Monthly Reset of Leaderboard

Given that a new month has started, when the system resets the leaderboard, then all rankings should be cleared, and the leaderboard should display starting points for all participants, allowing for a fresh competition.

Visibility of Leaderboard Across Devices

Given that an employee accesses their dashboard from a mobile device, when they navigate to the Leaderboard, then they should see the same leaderboard layout and information as on the desktop version, ensuring accessibility and consistency.

Reward System Development

"As a retail employee, I want to earn rewards for my training achievements so that I have tangible incentives to complete training modules and improve my skills."

Description

The Reward System will allow employees to redeem points accumulated through completing training modules and earning badges for various incentives such as gift cards, extra break time, or other perks. This system will be integrated within the training platform, where employees can track their points and explore available rewards. The introduction of rewards aims to enhance employee engagement and encourage completion of training modules by providing concrete incentives for their efforts.

Acceptance Criteria

User Redeems Points for Gift Card

Given that an employee has accumulated at least 100 points, when they visit the rewards section of the training platform and select a gift card option, then the system should successfully process the redemption and provide a confirmation message with the details of the gift card.

Badge Display on User Profile

Given that an employee has completed a training module and earned a badge, when they access their profile on the training platform, then the earned badge should be displayed clearly and prominently on their profile.

Points Accumulation After Completing Training Module

Given that an employee has completed a training module, when they refresh their points balance, then their total points should reflect the addition of the points earned from that particular module completion.

Leaderboard Display for Training Engagement

Given that multiple employees are participating in training modules, when the leaderboard is accessed, then it should display the top 10 employees based on points accumulated, updated in real-time after each training module completion.

Employee Points Tracking

Given that an employee is logged into the training platform, when they navigate to the points tracking section, then they should see a detailed breakdown of how points were earned, including module completions and badges acquired.

Reward Redemption History Access

Given that an employee has redeemed rewards in the past, when they view their redemption history in the points section, then they should see a record of all rewards redeemed including date, type of reward, and points used.

Training Analytics Dashboard

"As a training manager, I want to access an analytics dashboard so that I can monitor employee progress and engagement levels, helping me identify opportunities for training improvements."

Description

The Training Analytics Dashboard will provide managers with insights into employee engagement and training progress. This feature will compile data such as completion rates, average scores, and badge awards into an easily digestible format. The dashboard will facilitate decision-making regarding training needs and highlight areas where additional support may be necessary. Integration with existing reporting tools will allow for a holistic view of employee development across multiple dimensions.

Acceptance Criteria

Training Analytics Dashboard displays completion rates and scores accurately for each training module.

Given the manager accesses the Training Analytics Dashboard, When they view the training progress for all employees, Then the dashboard should show accurate completion rates and average scores for each training module.

Training Analytics Dashboard provides a breakdown of badge awards for employees.

Given the manager accesses the Training Analytics Dashboard, When they review the badge awards section, Then the dashboard should display the number of badges awarded to each employee for their training achievements.

Integration of Training Analytics Dashboard with existing reporting tools is seamless and functional.

Given the manager accesses a reporting tool, When they request training analytics data, Then the data should be populated from the Training Analytics Dashboard without errors or delays.

Dashboard updates in real-time as training data changes.

Given an employee completes a training module, When the completion status is updated in the system, Then the Training Analytics Dashboard should reflect this change in real-time within 5 minutes.

User interface of the Training Analytics Dashboard is intuitive and user-friendly for managers.

Given the manager navigates the Training Analytics Dashboard, When they attempt to access different sections, Then they should be able to do so without assistance, demonstrating ease of use.

Dashboard allows filtering of data by various parameters like department and training type.

Given the manager is on the Training Analytics Dashboard, When they select filtering options for departments or training types, Then the dashboard should display the filtered data accurately reflecting the selected parameters.

The Training Analytics Dashboard shows trends over time regarding employee training progress.

Given the manager accesses the trends section of the Training Analytics Dashboard, When they view the training progress graphs over the last quarter, Then the dashboard should depict clear trends regarding training completion and scores over time.

Social Sharing Features

"As an employee, I want to share my training achievements on social media so that I can celebrate my success and inspire my peers in the workplace."

Description

The Social Sharing Features will enable employees to share their achievements, such as earning badges or high leaderboard rankings on social media platforms. This functionality aims to promote a culture of recognition and pride among employees, encouraging others to participate actively in training. Integration will include various social media platforms and allow employees to customize their messages before sharing their achievements publicly.

Acceptance Criteria

Employees post their training achievement on their social media account after earning a badge through the gamified training experience.

Given an employee earns a badge, When they choose to share this achievement, Then they can customize their message and share it on at least one social media platform successfully, including a visible badge image.

An employee successfully ranks on the leaderboard for completing the highest number of training modules during the month and wishes to share this ranking.

Given an employee appears on the leaderboard, When they select the share option, Then the application generates a shareable message that includes their ranking position and allows customization.

The Social Sharing Features need to ensure the correct integration with popular social media platforms.

Given the employee shares their achievement, When they post on Facebook or Twitter, Then the post is displayed correctly with the intended content and links back to the training module.

Employees should be able to view the shared content on their social media profile after sharing their achievements.

Given an employee shares their achievement on social media, When they navigate to their social profile, Then they can see the shared achievement post with all details intact.

The system should log and track all social sharing activities for performance analysis and future improvements.

Given an employee shares an achievement, When the action is complete, Then the system logs this interaction with a timestamp, employee ID, and the social media platform used.

The customization feature for sharing should be user-friendly and intuitive.

Given an employee is in the sharing interface, When they use customization options, Then they can easily edit the message and choose privacy settings without any errors or confusion.

On-Demand Learning Library

Provide a comprehensive library of learning resources, including videos, articles, and case studies that employees can access at any time. This feature allows staff to explore topics at their own pace, ensuring ongoing development and supporting diverse learning styles.

Requirements

Comprehensive Resource Categorization

"As a retail employee, I want to browse learning resources by category so that I can find relevant materials quickly and enhance my skills effectively."

Description

The On-Demand Learning Library must categorize learning resources into distinct topics and formats, including videos, articles, and case studies. This categorization will allow employees to easily navigate the library and find specific resources that match their learning preferences and needs. This feature ensures that learning is structured and accessible, increasing user engagement and retention of knowledge, while also supporting various learning styles across the organization.

Acceptance Criteria

Categorizing learning resources by format and topic in the On-Demand Learning Library.

Given the library interface, when a user selects a specific topic, then only resources related to that topic should be displayed, categorized by format (videos, articles, case studies).

Allowing employees to filter resources based on their learning preferences.

Given the filtering options, when an employee selects both 'Video' and 'Articles' under resource type, then only learning resources categorized as videos and articles should appear in the results.

Ensuring the search functionality retrieves correctly categorized resources.

Given the search bar, when an employee enters a keyword relevant to a specific topic, then the search results should display resources from that topic, categorized correctly by format.

Providing a user-friendly interface for navigating the learning library.

Given the learning library, when an employee navigates through the topics, then the interface should enable easy access to all main categories without confusion or excessive clicks.

Ensuring diverse learning styles are supported by the categorization.

Given the categorized library, when an employee accesses the library, then the resources should include at least 3 different formats for every major topic to cater to various learning styles.

Enabling users to bookmark their favorite resources for future reference.

Given a resource in the library, when an employee clicks the 'bookmark' option, then the resource should be saved in the employee's personal library for easy access later.

Updating the categorization system as new resources are added to the library.

Given the addition of new resources, when a new video or article is uploaded, then it should be automatically categorized into the appropriate topic and format without manual intervention.

Offline Access Functionality

"As a retail employee, I want to download learning resources and access them offline so that I can study without needing an internet connection, especially during breaks or commutes."

Description

The On-Demand Learning Library must support offline access, allowing employees to download resources for later use without an internet connection. This functionality is crucial for staff who may not always have reliable internet access, enabling them to continue their learning uninterrupted. Offline access promotes continuous learning and adaptability in various work environments, ensuring maximum accessibility to educational resources.

Acceptance Criteria

Employees want to access learning resources while traveling to remote locations where internet connectivity is limited.

Given an employee downloads a resource from the On-Demand Learning Library, when they access the library offline, then the downloaded resource should open without any internet connection.

A staff member wishes to review multiple training videos during their lunch break without an available internet connection.

Given an employee selects multiple resources to download, when they initiate the download, then all selected resources should be available offline within 5 minutes.

Employees need to ensure they have access to the latest training materials even when away from the office or in areas with unstable internet access.

Given the On-Demand Learning Library is updated with new materials, when an employee checks for updates while online, then the option to download the new materials for offline use should be available and easily accessible.

A retail employee wants to prepare for a certification exam without internet access during their commute.

Given an employee has previously downloaded exam study materials, when they attempt to open the materials offline during their commute, then the study materials should open without errors.

Managers want to ensure that all staff can access crucial training documents during off-peak internet usage hours.

Given that an employee has previously downloaded critical training documents, when they open those documents during off-peak internet hours, then the documents should load without delay or issues.

Employees need to access specific case studies for a project while attending a workshop in a location with poor internet service.

Given that an employee has downloaded relevant case studies, when they access the downloaded materials at the workshop, then the case studies should display correctly and without any connectivity requirement.

A staff member needs access to onboarding resources while working in a retail location with no Wi-Fi access.

Given that the onboarding resources are available in the On-Demand Learning Library, when a new employee downloads these resources before starting their shift, then the resources must be accessible offline without any additional setup.

Progress Tracking and Reporting

"As a team leader, I want to view reports on my employees' learning progress so that I can encourage their development and identify areas where they may need additional support."

Description

The On-Demand Learning Library should include a feature for tracking individual learning progress and generating reports on completed and pending resources. This feature enables employees to monitor their development over time and provides managers with insights into team learning engagement. It enhances accountability and motivation within the workforce, ensuring that employees are actively engaging with the provided learning materials.

Acceptance Criteria

Employee accesses the On-Demand Learning Library and views their progress on the dashboard.

Given an employee is logged into their account, when they navigate to the progress tracking section, then they should see a summary of completed and pending learning resources, including visual indicators for completion status.

Manager requests a report on team learning engagement metrics.

Given the manager accesses the reporting feature, when they generate a report for their team, then the report should include insights into individual progress, completed resources, and time spent on learning activities, all within a downloadable format.

Employee completes a learning resource and the system records this completion.

Given an employee finishes a learning video, when they click 'Complete', then the system should automatically update their progress and reflect the new status in their individual learning dashboard.

Employee receives reminders about pending learning resources they have not yet completed.

Given an employee has pending resources, when their scheduled reminder notification is triggered, then they should receive an email notification listing the pending resources and encouraging them to complete their learning activities.

System logs all learning activity for compliance and accountability.

Given an employee engages with learning resources, when they complete, pause, or exit a resource, then these activities should be logged in the system with timestamps and linked to their profile for accountability purposes.

Manager views the overall learning engagement across their team.

Given a manager is in the reporting section, when they select 'Team Overview', then they should see metrics displaying the total number of resources completed by the team and average engagement time per employee for the selected reporting period.

Search Functionality with Filters

"As a retail employee, I want to use a search bar with filters to find specific learning content quickly so that I can address my learning goals without wasting time."

Description

The On-Demand Learning Library must include a robust search functionality that allows employees to search for specific topics, keywords, or resource types. Additionally, this feature should have filters to narrow results based on content type, difficulty level, or recency. This capability will streamline the resource discovery process and ensure users can quickly find relevant information to meet their immediate learning needs.

Acceptance Criteria

Employees need to quickly find resources on customer engagement strategies for an upcoming training session.

Given the employee is on the On-Demand Learning Library page, when they enter 'customer engagement' in the search bar and click search, then the results should display all resources containing the keyword 'customer engagement' within the title or description.

An employee wants to limit their search results to only videos after entering a keyword in the search bar.

Given the employee has entered a keyword in the search bar, when they select the filter option for 'Videos' and apply it, then the system should only show video resources relevant to the entered keyword.

A manager is looking for the most recent articles on inventory management from the On-Demand Learning Library.

Given the manager has selected the filter for 'Article' and sorted by 'Recency', when they view the results, then the first few resources displayed should be the articles published most recently regarding inventory management.

A new employee wants to learn about advanced CRM features but is unsure of the complexity of the available resources.

Given the employee searches for 'CRM features', when they apply a filter for 'Difficulty Level: Beginner', then the resources displayed should only include those categorized as beginner-level content related to CRM features.

An employee is utilizing the search functionality during a busy workday and requires quick access to relevant resources.

Given the employee types a specific keyword and selects multiple filters (e.g., 'Articles', 'Medium Difficulty') at the same time, when they click search, then the system should return results that match all selected filters efficiently, within 2 seconds.

An employee encounters an issue where no results are returned for a specific search query.

Given the employee performs a search with a keyword that does not exist in the database, when they submit their search, then the system should notify the employee with a friendly message indicating no results were found and suggest alternative keywords.

A team leader wants to evaluate how many resources are available on specific skills before a training program.

Given the team leader uses the search functionality with a specific keyword and applies filters for resource types, when they review the results, then they should be able to see a count of resources available under each category for that keyword.

User Feedback Mechanism

"As a retail employee, I want to provide feedback on learning resources so that I can help improve the library's offerings and ensure it's beneficial for everyone."

Description

The On-Demand Learning Library should incorporate a user feedback mechanism, allowing employees to rate resources and provide comments on their effectiveness. This feature enables continuous improvement of the content offered in the library by gathering user insights on resource quality and relevance. It fosters a culture of feedback and ensures that the learning materials meet the evolving needs of users.

Acceptance Criteria

User attempts to access the feedback mechanism after viewing a learning resource in the On-Demand Learning Library.

Given a user has completed viewing a resource, when they navigate to the feedback section, then they should be able to submit a rating (1-5 stars) and provide comments.

A user submits feedback on a learning resource and expects to see their submission reflected in the system.

Given a user submits feedback, when they refresh the feedback page, then their submitted feedback should be displayed under the resource they rated.

An administrator reviews aggregated user feedback on resources to make content improvement decisions.

Given user feedback has been submitted, when an administrator accesses the feedback report, then they should be able to view average ratings and common user comments for each resource.

A user wants to report an issue with a resource through the feedback mechanism.

Given a user is viewing a resource, when they click on the 'Report an Issue' button, then they should be able to fill out a form detailing the issue and submit it.

The system should notify users when their feedback leads to an update or improvement in a resource.

Given feedback has triggered a content update, when the user accesses that resource again, then they should see a notification indicating that the content has been updated based on user feedback.

Progress Tracking Dashboard

Offer a visual dashboard that tracks each employee’s training progress and completion status. This feature empowers both employees and managers to monitor development, set training goals, and celebrate achievements, fostering a culture of continuous improvement.

Requirements

Real-time Progress Tracking

"As a manager, I want to view each employee's training progress on a dashboard, so that I can support their development and identify any additional training needs."

Description

The Progress Tracking Dashboard must provide real-time monitoring of each employee's training progress, displaying metrics such as completion percentage, modules undertaken, and skills acquired. This feature is crucial as it fosters accountability and motivation among employees, enabling them to self-manage their training processes. For managers, it offers valuable insights into employee development, allowing for more informed discussions during performance reviews and ensuring resources are allocated efficiently to support ongoing training. Integration with existing CRM tools is essential, as it will enable seamless updates and analysis of training outcomes alongside employee performance data.

Acceptance Criteria

Employee views the Progress Tracking Dashboard to check their own training progress before a scheduled performance review.

Given the employee is logged into the system, when they access the Progress Tracking Dashboard, then the dashboard should display their current training completion percentage, modules undertaken, and skills acquired in real-time.

Manager checks an employee's training progress on the dashboard to prepare for a performance review meeting.

Given the manager is logged into the system, when they select an employee's profile from the dashboard, then the system should show a detailed breakdown of that employee's training progress, including completion rate, previously taken modules, and a visual representation of skill development.

Employee finishes a training module and returns to the dashboard to see updated metrics in real-time.

Given that an employee has completed a training module, when they refresh the Progress Tracking Dashboard, then the completion percentage should increase accordingly, and the list of completed modules should reflect the newly completed module within five minutes.

Manager analyzes training progress across multiple employees using the dashboard to evaluate overall team development.

Given the manager accesses the Progress Tracking Dashboard, when they use the filtering options to sort employees by completion percentage, then the dashboard should accurately display employees ranked by their training progress and the total number of skills acquired by the team.

Employee utilizes a mobile version of the Progress Tracking Dashboard to track their training progress while on the go.

Given that the employee accesses the mobile version of the Progress Tracking Dashboard, when they log in, then the dashboard should adapt to mobile view and display the same training metrics as the desktop version, ensuring proper functionality and data visibility.

Dashboard integrates with existing CRM tools to reflect employee performance data alongside training metrics.

Given the system is integrated with current CRM tools, when updates to employee training progress are made, then these should automatically synchronize with employee performance data in the CRM, ensuring all metrics reflect real-time updates clearly and accurately.

Goal-setting Capability

"As an employee, I want to set training goals on my dashboard, so that I can track my progress and motivate myself to complete my training effectively."

Description

The dashboard should allow employees and managers to set specific training goals tailored to individual development plans. This capability is vital for fostering a culture of continuous improvement, as it encourages employees to take ownership of their learning paths. The system should facilitate tracking these goals visually, enabling both employees and managers to see progress against set objectives. Integration with notification systems for reminders about upcoming goals and deadlines will enhance engagement and help maintain focus on development targets.

Acceptance Criteria

Goal Setting by Employees and Managers

Given an employee logged into the Progress Tracking Dashboard, when they navigate to the goal-setting section and enter a new training goal, then the system should save the goal and display it in the employee's goal list.

Visualization of Training Goals Progress

Given an employee has set training goals, when they access the dashboard, then the progress for each goal should be visually represented as a percentage of completion.

Notification for Training Goals Deadline

Given a training goal has been set with a deadline, when the deadline is approaching, then the employee and their manager should receive an automated notification reminding them of the upcoming goal due date.

Editing Established Training Goals

Given an employee has an established training goal, when they choose to edit that goal, then they should be able to update the goal's description and deadline, which should reflect immediately on the dashboard.

Celebration of Completed Goals

Given an employee has successfully completed a training goal, when they view the dashboard, then a celebratory notification should appear, and the completed goal should be archived in goal history.

Achievement Recognition System

"As an employee, I want to receive recognition for completing training milestones, so that I feel motivated and valued within my organization."

Description

The Progress Tracking Dashboard must include an achievement recognition system that celebrates milestones such as course completions and skill acquisitions. This feature serves to motivate employees by acknowledging their hard work and dedication to professional growth. It should support customizable notifications and certificates that can be shared within the platform. Integration with social features can allow employees to share their achievements with colleagues, fostering peer recognition and contributing to a positive workplace culture.

Acceptance Criteria

Employee Milestone Celebration Notification Scenario

Given an employee completes a training course, When the course completion event is triggered, Then an achievement notification is sent to the employee's dashboard and an email is dispatched to the employee.

Customizable Certificate Issuance Scenario

Given an employee completes a skill acquisition milestone, When the achievement is confirmed, Then a customizable certificate is generated and made available for download or sharing on the platform.

Peer Recognition Sharing Scenario

Given an employee receives an achievement, When the employee opts to share this achievement, Then it is posted on the social features of the platform for colleagues to see and comment on.

Manager View of Employee Progress Scenario

Given a manager accesses the Progress Tracking Dashboard, When the manager selects an individual employee, Then the dashboard displays the employee’s training progress, milestones achieved, and any recognitions received.

Achievement History Access Scenario

Given an employee logs into their dashboard, When the employee views their profile, Then they can see a history of all achievements and milestones earned along with the corresponding dates.

System Performance during High Usage Scenario

Given a period of high user activity, When multiple users access the achievement recognition system simultaneously, Then the system should maintain optimal performance without lag or errors in displaying notifications or achievements.

Data Analytics and Reporting

"As a manager, I want to generate reports on employee training effectiveness, so I can assess our training strategies and improve them as necessary."

Description

The dashboard should include data analytics capabilities that allow managers to generate reports on training effectiveness, employee engagement metrics, and completion rates. This functionality is essential for evaluating the impact of training programs and making data-driven decisions regarding future training investments. The analytics should be user-friendly, enabling managers to filter by various parameters such as department, training type, and individual performance over time. Integration with business intelligence tools will enhance the visualization and accessibility of this data.

Acceptance Criteria

Employee Training Progress Tracking and Reporting

Given an employee has completed a training module, When the manager accesses the Progress Tracking Dashboard, Then the dashboard should display the employee's completion status as 'Completed' along with the date of completion.

Filter Reports by Department

Given a manager wants to evaluate training effectiveness, When the manager selects a specific department from the filters on the dashboard, Then the system should display training completion rates and engagement metrics only for that department.

Visual Representation of Training Engagement Metrics

Given that training data is available, When the manager views the dashboard, Then the dashboard should visually represent key engagement metrics like training hours per employee and completion rates using graphs or charts.

Generate Training Effectiveness Reports

Given that training data is available, When the manager requests a report on training effectiveness, Then the system should generate a report that includes overall completion rates, engagement metrics, and recommendations based on the data.

Integration with Business Intelligence Tools

Given the requirement for enhanced data visualization, When the manager connects the dashboard to a business intelligence tool, Then the system should allow for seamless data transfer and visualization within the BI tool.

User-Friendly Filtering Options

Given a manager is viewing the dashboard, When the manager wants to filter data, Then the dashboard should provide intuitive filtering options by training type, date range, and individual performance, ensuring easy navigation.

User-friendly Interface

"As an employee, I want an easy-to-use dashboard for tracking my training progress, so that I can navigate the system without difficulty."

Description

The Progress Tracking Dashboard should have an intuitive and user-friendly interface that simplifies navigation and enhances user experience for both employees and managers. This requirement ensures that users can easily access training modules, progress metrics, and goals without frustration or confusion. Incorporating visual elements such as charts and progress bars will help communicate information effectively. Additionally, accessibility features must be integrated to accommodate diverse user needs, ensuring that all employees can engage with the training platform equally.

Acceptance Criteria

Navigation Ease for Employees

Given an employee accesses the Progress Tracking Dashboard, when they select a training module, then they should be able to open the module within 3 seconds without confusion.

Progress Metrics Visibility

Given an employee views their training progress, when they look at the dashboard, then they should see their completion percentage displayed prominently along with visual progress bars and charts.

Manager's Oversight Capability

Given a manager logs into the Progress Tracking Dashboard, when they view their team's training progress, then they should be able to sort and filter by completion status, training goals, and individual team member metrics without any errors.

Mobile Accessibility

Given an employee accesses the Progress Tracking Dashboard from a mobile device, when they navigate through the interface, then all functionality should be fully usable and responsive, and the layout should not break or become unviewable.

Accessibility Compliance Verification

Given a user utilizes assistive technology, when they access the Progress Tracking Dashboard, then they should be able to navigate all features and content through keyboard shortcuts or screen readers without barriers or loss of functionality.

Visual Clarity of Interface Elements

Given an employee views the Progress Tracking Dashboard, when they look at all visual elements such as buttons, charts, and progress bars, then all should display with clear contrast and identifiable icons to support easy understanding.

Live Q&A Sessions

Host scheduled live Q&A sessions with experts to provide employees an opportunity to ask questions and clarify concepts learned in training. This interactive feature builds a supportive learning community and encourages open discussions, enhancing overall understanding.

Requirements

Interactive Q&A Interface

"As a retail employee, I want to participate in live Q&A sessions with experts so that I can clarify concepts from my training and improve my knowledge more effectively."

Description

Develop a user-friendly interactive interface for hosting live Q&A sessions where employees can submit questions and engage with experts in real-time. This interface should support multimedia features such as video and screen sharing while ensuring a smooth user experience. The goal is to enhance employee understanding and engagement with the training material and encourage active participation in discussions, fostering a collaborative learning environment.

Acceptance Criteria

A training session is scheduled and employees log into the RetailRevive platform to submit their questions during a live Q&A with an expert.

Given I am logged into the RetailRevive platform and in the live Q&A session, When I submit a question, Then I should see my question appear in the question queue for the expert to address.

During a live Q&A session, users want to participate by asking questions verbally and through text.

Given I am in the live Q&A session, When I choose to ask a question verbally, Then I should be able to use my microphone to speak my question and it should be heard by all participants without delay.

The expert conducting the Q&A session needs to share their screen to explain a training concept to the employees.

Given I am an expert in the live Q&A session, When I share my screen, Then all participants should be able to see my shared content clearly without any lag or disruptions.

An employee has a question that requires a multimedia response during the Q&A session.

Given an employee has asked a question during the session, When the expert responds with a video or presentation, Then all participants should be able to view the multimedia content smoothly with no interruptions in streaming.

Employees want to reference previous questions and answers during a live Q&A session for context.

Given the Q&A session is in progress, When I click on the 'View Previous Questions' option, Then I should be able to see a list of previously submitted questions and their corresponding answers clearly displayed.

After the live Q&A session ends, employees want to review the session content and discussions.

Given the live Q&A session has ended, When I access the session recap feature, Then I should be able to view a summary of the questions asked, answers given, and any shared multimedia materials.

Session Scheduling Module

"As an expert, I want to schedule live Q&A sessions conveniently so that I can maximize attendance and provide support to as many employees as possible."

Description

Implement a scheduling module that allows experts to plan live Q&A sessions at convenient times for employees. This module should include features such as calendar integration, time zone adjustments, and notifications to ensure participants are reminded of upcoming sessions. The goal is to enhance attendance and ensure that employees make the most of these interactive learning opportunities, promoting a culture of continuous learning.

Acceptance Criteria

Calendar Integration for Session Scheduling

Given an expert has logged into the platform, when they create a new live Q&A session, then the session should automatically sync with their calendar and reflect any changes made.

Time Zone Adjustments for Participants

Given an employee is in a different time zone than the scheduled live Q&A session, when they view the session details, then the time should be displayed in their local time zone without discrepancies.

Notification System for Upcoming Sessions

Given an employee has registered for a live Q&A session, when the session is within 24 hours, then the employee should receive an automated email notification reminding them of the session.

User-Friendly Interface for Session Scheduling

Given the expert is on the scheduling module, when they are filling in the session details, then they should be able to complete the process within four clicks with clear prompts at each step.

Max Participation Limits for Q&A Sessions

Given an expert is scheduling a live Q&A session, they should be able to set a maximum participant limit and receive notifications if the limit is reached prior to the session.

Feedback Mechanism Post-Session

Given the live Q&A session has ended, when participants access the feedback option, they should be able to submit their feedback and ratings easily within two minutes.

Reporting on Attendance and Engagement

Given the session has concluded, when the expert views the session report, they should see metrics on attendance rates and participant engagement scores based on interaction during the session.

Question Moderation System

"As a moderator, I want to manage questions during the live Q&A sessions so that we can focus on the most important queries and provide the best possible responses to employees."

Description

Create a moderation system for the live Q&A sessions that enables designated moderators to prioritize and select questions to be answered during the session. This system should include features for filtering, voting, and flagging questions to ensure that the most relevant and pressing inquiries are addressed. The objective is to maintain quality and relevance in discussions, improving the overall value of the sessions.

Acceptance Criteria

As a moderator during a live Q&A session, I need to be able to view and manage a list of incoming questions from participants, ensuring that I can filter and prioritize them effectively.

Given there are multiple questions submitted, When I access the moderation panel, Then I should see a list of all submitted questions sorted by their submission time, allowing me to filter them by categories such as 'Urgent', 'General', or 'Follow-up'.

As a participant in a live Q&A session, I want to be able to vote on questions that I find most relevant, so that the moderators can prioritize those questions during the session.

Given there is an active Q&A session, When I view the questions, Then I should be able to click a 'Vote' button next to each question, and my vote should increment a counter visible to all participants, indicating the question's popularity.

As a moderator, I need the ability to flag inappropriate questions in real-time during the Q&A session to maintain a professional environment and ensure the focus remains on relevant topics.

Given I am viewing the list of questions, When I click the 'Flag' option next to a question, Then the question should be marked as flagged, and a notification should be sent to the moderators indicating that the question requires review.

As a moderator, I want to be able to review flagged questions before they are answered to ensure a respectful and valuable discussion is maintained.

Given I have flagged a question during the live session, When I navigate to the 'Flagged Questions' section, Then I should be able to see all flagged questions along with a reason for flagging provided by the users, allowing me to decide if they should be addressed or removed from the list.

As a participant, I want to see which questions have been selected for answering during the live Q&A so I can understand the flow of discussion.

Given I am attending the live Q&A session, When a question is selected for answering by the moderator, Then that question should be displayed prominently in the session window with a clear indication that it is being answered, along with the name of the moderator responding.

As a host of the live Q&A session, I want to ensure that the session ends with a summary of unanswered questions to keep participants engaged for future sessions.

Given the live session has ended, When I click on 'End Session', Then a summary of all unanswered questions should be generated and emailed to all participants for their reference, promoting ongoing engagement.

Feedback and Analytics Dashboard

"As a manager, I want to view analytics on live Q&A sessions so that I can assess their effectiveness and make improvements to meet our employee learning needs better."

Description

Develop a feedback and analytics dashboard to capture employee satisfaction and engagement metrics from live Q&A sessions. This dashboard should visualize data on attendance, participation levels, and feedback ratings, providing insights into the effectiveness of the sessions. The aim is to use this data for continuous improvement of future Q&A sessions, ensuring they are relevant and valuable to employees.

Acceptance Criteria

Dashboard User Authentication and Access Control

Given that a user is logged into the RetailRevive platform, when they navigate to the feedback and analytics dashboard, then they should see a prompt for user authentication if they are not logged in. Additionally, only users with appropriate roles should be able to access the dashboard data and features.

Display of Attendance Metrics

Given that a user views the feedback and analytics dashboard, when the live Q&A session data is loaded, then the dashboard should display total attendance numbers as well as attendance by individual sessions for the past month.

Participation Levels Visualization

Given that an administrator accesses the feedback and analytics dashboard, when selecting a specific live Q&A session, then the system should visually represent participation levels through graphs or charts that indicate user engagement during the session.

Feedback Ratings Overview

Given that a user is looking at the feedback and analytics dashboard, when they click on the feedback section, then the dashboard should display average feedback ratings from participants for all live Q&A sessions conducted in the last quarter.

Insights Export Functionality

Given that an administrator is reviewing data on the feedback and analytics dashboard, when they click on the export button, then they should be able to download the dashboard data as a CSV file for further analysis.

Continuous Improvement Recommendations

Given that enough data has been collected from live Q&A sessions, when the administrator reviews the insights on the dashboard, then the system should provide automated recommendations for improving future Q&A sessions based on participation and feedback metrics.

Post-Session Resource Sharing

"As a participant, I want to receive resources after the live Q&A sessions so that I can review the information and enhance my understanding of the topics covered."

Description

Implement a feature that allows experts to share additional resources, such as documents, videos, or links, during and after the live Q&A sessions. This feature aims to enrich the learning experience by providing employees with materials that reinforce the concepts discussed in the sessions, thus supporting continuous learning beyond the live interaction.

Acceptance Criteria

User shares additional resources during a live Q&A session, making them available immediately to all participants.

Given that the expert is logged into the platform during a live Q&A session, when they upload a resource, then all participants can access the resource in real-time via a dedicated resource-sharing section.

User accesses shared resources after a live Q&A session to review materials.

Given that the Q&A session has ended, when the employee navigates to the session replay page, then they can view and download all resources shared during the session.

Experts provide feedback on resources shared during live Q&A sessions.

Given that an expert has shared resources, when they receive feedback from participants, then they can see aggregated feedback ratings and comments in their dashboard.

Users receive notifications for newly shared resources during and after live Q&A sessions.

Given that the expert shares a new resource, when it is uploaded, then all participants receive an in-app notification with a link to access the resource immediately.

Users can filter and search shared resources based on type or keyword.

Given that resources are shared during a Q&A session, when users access the resource-sharing section, then they can filter resources by type (documents, videos, links) or search using keywords.

Users can provide feedback on resources to enhance future sessions.

Given that employees have accessed a shared resource, when they click the feedback option, then they can rate the resource and leave comments for improvement.

Users can view resource usage statistics during Q&A sessions.

Given that resources have been shared during a live Q&A, when the expert checks their dashboard, then they can see how many participants accessed each resource and the average rating given to it.

Compliance and Certification Tracking

Include tools to track compliance training and employee certifications, ensuring that all staff meet industry standards and best practices. This feature streamlines the process of keeping records and helps retailers maintain legal compliance, ultimately reducing operational risks.

Requirements

Compliance Training Management

"As a store manager, I want to track compliance training for all staff members so that I can ensure we meet industry regulations and avoid potential legal issues."

Description

This requirement focuses on the creation and management of an intuitive dashboard where retailers can schedule, track, and record compliance training sessions for employees. It will include reminders for upcoming training deadlines and an integrated calendar for easy planning. The benefits include ensuring that all employees receive the necessary training on compliance standards, thus reducing legal risks and enhancing operational efficiency. Additionally, it reduces administrative overhead associated with manual tracking and maintaining compliance records, which can be beneficial for audits and inspections.

Acceptance Criteria

Employee schedules a compliance training session using the intuitive dashboard.

Given the employee is logged into the RetailRevive platform, when they select a date and time for training and submit the request, then the training session should be scheduled and confirmed in the system with a notification sent to the employee and the manager.

User receives reminder notifications for upcoming compliance training sessions.

Given the training session is scheduled, when the reminder is due (e.g., one week and one day prior), then the employee should receive an email and push notification reminding them of the upcoming training session.

Administrator verifies that all employees have received compliance training by viewing the dashboard.

Given the administrator is on the compliance training management dashboard, when they generate a report for employee training records, then the report should accurately reflect the training status for all employees, showing who has completed the training and who has not.

User interacts with the integrated calendar to plan training sessions efficiently.

Given the employee is on the compliance training management dashboard, when they access the integrated calendar, then they should be able to view existing sessions, drag and drop to reschedule, and save the changes successfully without errors.

System provides easy access to compliance training resources.

Given the employee is on the compliance training dashboard, when they click on any training session listed, then they should be redirected to a page containing relevant training materials and resources needed for the session.

Compliance training records are maintained for auditing purposes.

Given the compliance training management system stores training records, when an auditor requests for records of completed training sessions, then the system should provide a downloadable report in the requested format (e.g., PDF, CSV) that accurately reflects all compliance training records.

System allows the user to edit or cancel an existing training session.

Given an existing training session is scheduled, when the user selects the option to edit or cancel it and confirms the action, then the system should update the session information accordingly and notify all involved parties of the changes.

Certification Expiration Alerts

"As an HR officer, I want to receive alerts for employee certification expirations so that I can ensure our staff remains qualified and compliant with industry standards."

Description

This requirement entails developing an alert system that notifies managers and employees about upcoming certification expirations. The alerts will be customizable, allowing users to select preferred notification methods (email, SMS, in-app notifications). This feature is vital for maintaining an up-to-date workforce that holds all necessary certifications, ensuring the business operates legally and effectively. It promotes proactive management of employee certifications, minimizes risks associated with expired credentials, and fosters a culture of accountability within the team.

Acceptance Criteria

Certification Expiration Alerts for Managers

Given a manager is logged into RetailRevive, when certifications are within 30 days of expiration, then the manager receives an email alert with the list of employees whose certifications are expiring.

Employee Notification Preferences

Given an employee's notification preferences are set in their profile, when a certification is about to expire within 30 days, then the employee receives an alert via their selected notification method (email, SMS, or in-app notification).

Customization of Alert Frequency

Given a manager is logged into RetailRevive, when they access the alert settings, then they can customize the frequency of certification expiration alerts (daily, weekly, or monthly).

Tracking of Certification Renewal Status

Given a manager has received a certification expiration alert, when they check the certification renewal status, then they can see the current status (not renewed, in process, renewed) of each employee's certification.

Alert for Multiple Certifications

Given an employee holds multiple certifications, when any of their certifications are within 30 days of expiration, then alerts are generated for each expiring certification accordingly.

Audit Log for Alert Notifications

Given alerts have been sent out, when an auditor checks the system, then they can see a log of all sent certification expiration alerts, including timestamps and the employees notified.

Centralized Certification Repository

"As a compliance officer, I want a centralized repository for employee certifications so that I can efficiently manage and retrieve important documents for audits and compliance checks."

Description

Creating a centralized repository for all employee certifications will allow retailers to easily access, verify, and manage employee credentials. The repository will provide an organized method to store documents, track certification statuses, and quickly retrieve information during compliance audits. This feature is crucial to streamline the management of certifications, reduce the risk of lost documents, and enhance the ability to demonstrate compliance to regulatory bodies. An accessible digital format will facilitate better communication with staff about their certification status and responsibilities.

Acceptance Criteria

Centralized Certification Repository Access for Compliance Audits

Given that the user is logged in and has the necessary permissions, when they attempt to access the certification repository, then they should see a user-friendly interface displaying all employee certifications organized by status and category.

Certification Document Upload Functionality

Given that the administrator is on the certification management page, when they upload a certification document for an employee, then the document should be stored securely in the centralized repository and linked to the corresponding employee's profile.

Certificate Status Tracking and Notifications

Given that an employee's certification is nearing expiration, when the certification status is checked, then the system should send an automated reminder notification to both the employee and their supervisor.

Audit Compliance Report Generation

Given that the user has selected the audit compliance report feature, when they generate the report, then it should compile all necessary certification statuses and relevant employee data for the specified time period in a downloadable format.

Search and Filter Capability in Certification Repository

Given that the user is accessing the certification repository, when they enter a search term or use filters, then the results should dynamically display the relevant certifications that match the criteria applied.

User Activity Log for Certification Repository Access

Given that a user accesses the certification repository, when they view or modify any certifications, then the system should log the user activity with timestamps for audit purposes.

Employee Self-Service Certification Status View

Given that an employee is logged into their account, when they navigate to the certification section, then they should be able to view their current certification statuses and any upcoming expiration dates clearly.

Reporting and Analytics Dashboard for Compliance Metrics

"As a business owner, I want an analytics dashboard that shows compliance training metrics so that I can assess our staff's readiness and effectiveness in meeting industry standards."

Description

This requirement involves the development of a reporting and analytics dashboard that provides insights into compliance training participation, certification statuses, and overall employee readiness. Retailers will be able to generate reports on training completion rates and identify areas where additional training may be required. This insight supports data-driven decision-making and helps in optimizing training processes. The dashboard will integrate with existing HR and operational data to offer a comprehensive view and facilitate strategic planning toward improving compliance.

Acceptance Criteria

Dashboard Load Time for Compliance Metrics Reporting

Given the user accesses the compliance metrics dashboard, when the dashboard is fully loaded, then it should not take more than 3 seconds to load all data elements.

User Access Controls for Compliance Dashboard

Given an HR manager attempts to access the compliance dashboard, when they log in with their credentials, then the system should only grant access if the user has the 'Dashboard Access' permission assigned.

Training Participation Reporting

Given the retailer wants to see training participation, when the user selects 'Training Completion' report on the dashboard, then the system should display a report showing completion rates for all employees over the selected period.

Certification Status Visibility

Given a manager views the compliance dashboard, when they look at an individual employee's profile, then the certification status should clearly indicate whether the employee is up to date, expired, or needs renewal, along with the expiration dates.

Integration with HR Systems

Given that the compliance dashboard is integrated with existing HR systems, when the user updates an employee's training record in the HR system, then the compliance dashboard should reflect that change within 10 minutes.

Alerts for Expiring Certifications

Given that a certification is approaching its expiration date, when a user accesses the dashboard, then they should see an alert notifying them of certifications that will expire within the next 30 days.

Integration with HR Systems

"As an IT administrator, I want to integrate compliance tracking with our HR system so that I can eliminate manual data entry and ensure accurate employee records across platforms."

Description

This requirement focuses on creating a seamless integration between the compliance tracking tools and existing HR systems, allowing for automatic updates of employee records related to training and certifications. This integration will eliminate redundant data entry and reduce the risk of errors. It ensures that compliance training records are synchronized with payroll, performance reviews, and other HR functions, ultimately promoting operational efficiency and accuracy in employee data management.

Acceptance Criteria

Integration with HR Systems for Compliance Tracking during Onboarding Process

Given a new employee is onboarded, when the compliance tracking system is integrated with HR systems, then the employee's training and certification records should automatically populate in the HR system without manual input.

Real-Time Updates for Employee Compliance Records

Given an employee completes a compliance training, when the training record is updated in the compliance tracking tool, then the HR system should reflect this update in real-time without discrepancies.

Automatic Synchronization of Certification Expirations

Given an employee's certification is nearing expiration, when the compliance tracking system checks the HR records, then an alert should be sent to the employee and HR manager 30 days prior to expiration.

Comprehensive Reporting on Compliance Status

Given the compliance tracking system is integrated with HR, when generating a compliance report, then the report should accurately reflect the status of all employees regarding their training and certifications, including details of upcoming expirations.

User Access Control for HR and Compliance Data

Given the integration of HR and compliance systems, when accessing employee compliance records, then only authorized HR personnel should be able to view or modify these records to protect sensitive information.

Audit Trail for Compliance Record Changes

Given the compliance records can be modified, when changes are made in either the compliance tracking tool or the HR system, then a complete and detailed audit trail should be maintained, logging who made the changes and when.

Error Handling During Data Synchronization

Given the integration is active, when data synchronization fails due to a technical issue, then the system should display an error message and log the incident for further investigation without losing any data integrity.

Instant Feedback Surveys

This feature allows retailers to deploy quick, customizable surveys immediately after a purchase or interaction. By gathering instant feedback, retailers can assess customer satisfaction on the spot, enabling them to pinpoint areas for improvement and promptly address any issues that may arise.

Requirements

Survey Customization Options

"As a retailer, I want to customize feedback surveys so that they reflect my brand and gather relevant customer insights tailored to my specific products."

Description

This requirement involves enabling retailers to customize survey questions, formats, and branding elements to align with their store's identity and customer engagement strategy. This functionality allows for the tailoring of questionnaires based on specific product categories or customer demographics, enhancing the relevance of the feedback gathered. It is essential for ensuring retailers can gather insights that are specific to their target audience and operational style, thus maximizing the effectiveness of the feedback mechanism.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailer customization of survey questions based on product category.

Given a retailer is in the survey customization module, when they select a product category, then they should have the ability to add, modify, or delete specific questions relevant to that category.

Branding elements can be integrated into surveys by retailers.

Given a retailer is customizing a survey, when they access the branding section, then they should be able to upload their logo, select color schemes, and choose font styles that align with their store's identity.

Real-time preview of the customized survey for retailers.

Given a retailer has customized their survey, when they click on the 'Preview' button, then they should see a real-time rendering of the survey as it will appear to customers, including all questions and branding elements.

Dynamic question formats are available for survey customization.

Given a retailer is editing survey questions, when they choose to add a question, then they should be presented with multiple formats (multiple choice, open-ended, rating scale) to select from according to their needs.

Survey question tailoring based on customer demographics.

Given a retailer has access to customer demographic data, when creating a survey, then they should have the option to tailor specific questions based on the selected demographic groups, ensuring relevance.

Retailer can test survey functionality before deployment.

Given a retailer has completed their survey customization, when they initiate a test run of the survey, then they should be able to send the survey to a sample group and receive feedback on its functionality and effectiveness.

Automated Feedback Collection

"As a customer, I want to receive a quick feedback survey after my purchase so that I can share my thoughts while my experience is still fresh."

Description

This requirement focuses on the automation of sending feedback surveys immediately after a purchase or customer interaction without manual intervention. The system should automatically trigger an email or SMS survey request post-transaction, ensuring timely feedback collection. This allows retailers to capture fresh customer experiences while they are most relevant, leading to actionable insights that can be addressed quickly.

Acceptance Criteria

Instantly sending a feedback survey via email after a customer completes a purchase on the RetailRevive platform.

Given a completed purchase transaction, when the system processes the transaction, then an automatic email survey should be sent to the customer's registered email address within 5 minutes of the transaction completion.

Automatically triggering an SMS feedback survey after a customer interaction in-store.

Given a customer interaction recorded in the system, when the customer finishes their interaction, then an SMS survey request should be sent within 2 minutes to the customer's phone number associated with their account.

Allowing retailers to customize the feedback survey questions and layout before activation.

Given a retailer is setting up their feedback survey, when they customize questions and layout, then the system should save these customizations and apply them to all surveys sent post-purchase or interaction.

Ensuring feedback surveys are sent only to verified customers who completed a transaction.

Given a list of completed transactions, when the system identifies a customer who did not complete payment, then no survey should be sent to that customer for the designated transaction.

Monitoring the response rate of sent feedback surveys to assess engagement.

Given feedback surveys sent to customers, when analyzing the survey results, then the response rate should be available to the retailer, showing the percentage of customers who completed the survey within 24 hours of receipt.

Providing an option for customers to opt-out from future feedback surveys.

Given a customer receives a survey, when they select the opt-out option, then their preference should be saved in the system, and no further surveys should be sent to that customer unless they opt-in again.

Real-time Analytics Dashboard

"As a retailer, I want to view real-time analytics from customer feedback so that I can make immediate improvements to my service and products."

Description

This requirement includes the development of a real-time analytics dashboard specifically for displaying survey responses and customer satisfaction metrics. Retailers will have immediate access to data visualizations that highlight survey trends, sentiment analysis, and areas requiring attention. This real-time capability enables retailers to make proactive decisions to enhance customer satisfaction and optimize their operations based on feedback trends.

Acceptance Criteria

Real-time Feedback Analysis after Purchase Interaction

Given a retailer has deployed the Instant Feedback Survey after a purchase, When the customer submits their survey responses, Then the Real-time Analytics Dashboard should update to reflect the new customer satisfaction metrics within 2 minutes.

Visual Representation of Survey Trends

Given that the retailer accesses the Real-time Analytics Dashboard, When they view customer feedback data, Then the dashboard must provide visual graphs that display survey trends over the past 30 days without any data discrepancies.

Sentiment Analysis of Customer Feedback

Given a set of survey responses collected, When the retailer analyzes the data on the Real-time Analytics Dashboard, Then the sentiment analysis feature must categorize customer feedback accurately into positive, negative, or neutral within 90% accuracy.

Alert System for Low Satisfaction Scores

Given that a retailer is monitoring customer satisfaction metrics on the Real-time Analytics Dashboard, When the average satisfaction score drops below a predefined threshold, Then an automated alert should be triggered and sent to the retailer's designated email address.

Integration with Retailer’s CRM System

Given the retailer's existing CRM system, When survey responses are collected, Then the Real-time Analytics Dashboard must automatically sync relevant feedback data to the CRM system without manual intervention.

User Accessibility of the Analytics Dashboard

Given that multiple users need access to the Real-time Analytics Dashboard, When they attempt to log in with provided credentials, Then all authorized users should be able to access the dashboard without encountering access errors or functionality limitations.

Mobile Compatibility of the Real-time Dashboard

Given that retailers may use different devices, When they access the Real-time Analytics Dashboard from a mobile device, Then the dashboard must maintain functionality and usability across screen sizes and devices without losing data or interactivity.

Post-Survey Follow-up Actions

"As a retailer, I want to follow up with customers after they complete a survey so that I can acknowledge their feedback and address any concerns raised."

Description

This requirement entails implementing follow-up actions based on customer feedback. Retailers can automate responses or thank-you messages for completed surveys, and flag critical responses for immediate managerial attention. This functionality is essential for enhancing customer engagement, demonstrating that the retailer values customer input, and ensures that urgent issues raised in surveys are addressed promptly.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer completes a purchase and receives an email prompting them to fill out a survey within one hour of their transaction.

Given a customer completed a purchase, when they submit the survey, then an automated thank-you email is sent within 5 minutes of survey completion.

A customer provides negative feedback regarding a product experience through the survey.

Given the customer selects a rating of 1 or 2, when the survey is submitted, then the feedback is flagged for immediate managerial review.

A retailer wants to customize the thank-you message for completed surveys based on product type.

Given a retailer has set different thank-you messages for various product categories, when a customer completes a survey, then the appropriate thank-you message is sent based on their purchased product category.

A customer leaves positive feedback and suggests an improvement in the survey.

Given the customer selects a rating of 4 or 5, when the survey is submitted, then a thank-you message is sent, and the suggestion is logged for future reference.

A survey collects feedback about shipping times after a purchase.

Given the customer completes a survey questioning shipping times, when critical shipping concerns (e.g., 5 or more negative comments) are flagged, then the operational team is notified within 2 hours.

The retailer wants to review trends in survey feedback over the last month.

Given the retailer accesses the feedback dashboard, when they view the previous month's data, then they should see visual trend analysis of customer satisfaction ratings and common feedback themes.

Multi-channel Survey Distribution

"As a customer, I want to receive feedback surveys through my preferred communication channel so that it is convenient for me to respond."

Description

This requirement focuses on enabling the distribution of surveys across multiple channels, such as social media, in-app notifications, and email. By allowing retailers to reach customers through their preferred communication methods, this feature significantly increases survey response rates and provides a broader understanding of customer satisfaction across different platforms. It is critical for tailoring customer engagement strategies to diverse customer preferences.

Acceptance Criteria

Distribution of surveys via email post-purchase confirmation.

Given a customer has completed a purchase, when the survey is distributed via email, then at least 70% of recipients should open the email within 24 hours.

Deployment of surveys through in-app notifications after customer interactions.

Given a customer interacts with the app, when an in-app survey notification is triggered, then the survey should receive at least a 50% response rate within 48 hours.

Sharing surveys on social media platforms after engagement events.

Given a retailer shares a survey link on their social media page, when customers view the post, then the survey should garner at least 100 unique responses within one week.

Customizable survey options for different demographics.

Given a retailer is setting up a survey, when they customize the survey options based on customer demographics, then at least 3 different survey formats must successfully be sent to different demographic segments.

Integration of survey results into the retailer's CRM tools.

Given survey responses are collected, when the data is integrated into CRM tools, then the CRM must display the latest survey results and metrics without any data loss or delay.

Tracking engagement rate across multiple distribution channels.

Given a retailer uses multiple channels for survey distribution, when engagement metrics are evaluated, then the system should report engagement rates for each channel separately, highlighting which channel has the highest response rate.

Analyzing feedback trends over time.

Given surveys have been distributed over a month, when the feedback data is analyzed, then trends should be identifiable in customer satisfaction ratings with actionable insights provided for each channel used.

Sentiment Analysis Tool

Utilizing advanced sentiment analysis technology, this feature automatically interprets customer feedback to gauge overall sentiment and satisfaction levels. By categorizing feedback into positive, negative, or neutral sentiments, retailers can quickly understand customer sentiments and react accordingly, enhancing overall service quality.

Requirements

Real-Time Sentiment Analysis

"As a retailer, I want to receive real-time insights on customer sentiment from various feedback channels so that I can quickly address concerns and improve service quality."

Description

The Real-Time Sentiment Analysis requirement focuses on implementing a system that continuously monitors customer feedback from various sources, including social media, reviews, and surveys. This capability will enable RetailRevive to categorize feedback into positive, negative, or neutral sentiments instantly, providing retailers with timely insights into customer satisfaction levels. The benefits include proactive management of customer relationships, enhanced service quality, and the ability to address issues before they escalate. This feature is critical for empowering retailers to react swiftly to customer sentiments and optimize their operations accordingly.

Acceptance Criteria

Real-time Customer Feedback Collection from Social Media.

Given that a customer posts feedback on social media, when the sentiment analysis tool processes the data, then it should categorize the feedback as positive, negative, or neutral within 5 minutes of the post being made.

Monitoring Customer Reviews from E-commerce Platforms.

Given that a new review is added to an e-commerce platform, when the sentiment analysis tool scans the review, then it should accurately classify the sentiment within 10 minutes.

Snowball Effect of Customer Feedback in Surveys and Polls.

Given that a customer completes a post-purchase survey, when the sentiment analysis tool accesses the survey response, then it should provide sentiment insights that reflect at least 85% accuracy compared to manual classification by a human reviewer.

Integrating Feedback from Multiple Sources into a Unified Dashboard.

Given that feedback is collected from social media, reviews, and surveys, when the system displays this data on the dashboard, then it should provide a unified sentiment score that incorporates all feedback types within real-time metrics.

Alerts and Notifications for Significant Negative Sentiment.

Given that the sentiment analysis detects a spike in negative sentiment (e.g., 30% increase in negative feedback in one hour), when this occurs, then the system should send automated alerts to the retailer's management team within 5 minutes.

Sentiment Trend Analysis

"As a marketing manager, I want to analyze trends in customer sentiment over time so that I can adjust our marketing strategies based on shifting customer preferences and feedback."

Description

The Sentiment Trend Analysis requirement involves the creation of a tool that not only categorizes customer feedback but also tracks sentiment trends over time. This feature allows retailers to analyze how customer sentiments vary across different periods, products, or marketing campaigns. By identifying trends, retailers can make informed decisions about product offerings, marketing strategies, and customer engagement actions. This requirement enhances the depth of insights provided by the sentiment analysis tool, enabling retailers to anticipate changes in customer attitudes and adapt proactively.

Acceptance Criteria

Sentiment Trend Analysis for identifying product feedback trends over a quarter.

Given customer feedback data is collected over a quarter, when the sentiment analysis tool processes this data, then it should generate a visual report showing trends in sentiment categorized by product for each month.

Tracking customer sentiment across different marketing campaigns launched within the same month.

Given feedback is collected from customers who interacted with different marketing campaigns, when the sentiment analysis tool analyzes this data, then it should identify the sentiment for each campaign and provide a comparative analysis report.

Analyzing sentiment trends before and after a specific product launch to gauge customer reactions.

Given feedback is collected before and after a product launch, when the sentiment analysis tool reviews this historical data, then it should display variations in sentiment over time, clearly indicating positive, negative, or neutral shifts related to the product.

Evaluating sentiment trends during seasonal promotional events, such as Black Friday.

Given feedback from customers during a seasonal event, when the sentiment analysis tool processes the data, then it should categorize sentiment into during and post-event periods, allowing retailers to measure the impact of the promotional event.

Integrating sentiment trend analysis with real-time inventory data to forecast stock needs based on customer sentiment.

Given inventory and sentiment data from the sentiment analysis tool, when the system analyzes this combined data, then it should provide actionable insights on stock levels needed for products based on positive and negative sentiment trends.

Customizable Sentiment Reports

"As a business owner, I want to create customizable reports on customer sentiment so that I can present relevant data to my team and make informed strategic decisions."

Description

The Customizable Sentiment Reports requirement ensures the development of a reporting feature that allows retailers to create personalized reports based on sentiment analysis data. Retailers will have the option to select specific timeframes, sentiment categories, and feedback channels to generate tailored reports. This flexibility aids in deeper analysis and presentation of relevant data to stakeholders, ultimately fostering data-driven decision-making. Enhancing reporting capabilities will empower retailers to effectively communicate customer sentiments to their teams and align their strategies accordingly.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailers want to generate a report at the end of each month to analyze customer feedback from various channels such as emails, social media, and in-store surveys. They need to specify the time frame of the previous month and categories of sentiment to better understand customer satisfaction trends.

Given the user selects a specific month and time frame for reporting,When they specify sentiment categories (positive, negative, neutral),Then the system should generate a report that accurately reflects customer sentiments by the specified parameters, including feedback from selected channels.

A retailer needs to create a custom report to assess the sentiment of feedback collected during a promotional event. They should be able to choose the event's dates and include feedback from social media and email responses in their report.

Given the user selects a date range corresponding to the promotional event, When they opt to include specific channels (social media and email), Then the report should include detailed sentiment analysis data for the selected timeframe and channels.

A store manager wants to visualize sentiment trends over the past quarter to inform strategic planning. They need to filter their report for negative feedback to understand areas that require improvement.

Given the user selects the last quarter as the reporting period,When they filter for negative sentiments,Then the system should generate a report that highlights all instances of negative feedback received over that period.

A customer service director wants to present insights on customer satisfaction from various locations. They should be able to customize reports based on store location and time frame to present in the next team meeting.

Given the user specifies a particular store location and a custom timeframe,When they generate the report,Then it should display sentiment data specifically for the chosen location and period of analysis.

The marketing team aims to assess the effectiveness of a recent campaign by analyzing customer feedback gathered before and after the campaign launch to measure sentiment changes.

Given the user selects dates before and after the campaign launch,When they generate the report,Then the output should clearly differentiate sentiment data collected pre-launch and post-launch, demonstrating any shifts in customer perception.

An executive wants to create a report summarizing overall sentiment for the last six months to aid in strategic decision-making. The report should be customizable to highlight key insights relevant to senior management.

Given the user selects a six-month range for the report,When they customize what insights to highlight,Then the report should succinctly summarize key sentiment trends and insights relevant for executive review.

Integration with CRM Tools

"As a customer service representative, I want to access customer sentiment data within our CRM so that I can personalize my interactions and improve customer satisfaction."

Description

The Integration with CRM Tools requirement focuses on linking the sentiment analysis tool with existing customer relationship management (CRM) systems. This integration will allow retailers to merge sentiment data with customer profiles, enhancing personalized marketing and customer service initiatives. By leveraging sentiment analysis alongside CRM data, retailers can develop tailored engagement strategies that resonate with individual customer preferences, leading to improved satisfaction and loyalty. This requirement is essential for creating a holistic view of customer interactions and enriching the overall retail experience.

Acceptance Criteria

Integration of sentiment analysis data into the CRM system for personalized marketing campaigns.

Given a retailer uses the sentiment analysis tool, when a customer feedback entry is processed, then the sentiment data should be automatically linked to the corresponding customer profile in the CRM system.

Real-time updates of sentiment data for customer interactions in the CRM system.

Given the sentiment analysis tool processes customer feedback, when the sentiment changes from neutral to negative, then the CRM should reflect this change in real-time for the specific customer profile.

Categorization and reporting of sentiment data in the CRM for trend analysis.

Given the sentiment analysis tool is integrated, when reports are generated in the CRM, then sentiment categories (positive, negative, neutral) should be accurately represented in the reports for the selected time period.

User access to sentiment data within the CRM for customer service agents.

Given that a customer service agent is logged into the CRM, when they view a customer profile, then they should be able to see the current sentiment score and feedback summary provided by the sentiment analysis tool.

Automation of alerts for score changes in customer sentiment linked to CRM actions.

Given a customer's sentiment score changes to negative, when this occurs, then an automatic alert should be generated and sent to the assigned customer service representative within the CRM.

Historical tracking of sentiment changes in customer profiles for CRM analytics.

Given that sentiment analysis data is integrated, when a customer profile is reviewed, then the history of sentiment changes should be viewable alongside the customer’s interaction history in the CRM.

Alert System for Negative Sentiments

"As a customer service manager, I want to receive alerts for negative customer sentiments so that I can take immediate action to resolve issues and safeguard our brand's reputation."

Description

The Alert System for Negative Sentiments requirement entails the development of an automated notification system that triggers alerts whenever negative sentiments are detected in customer feedback. This proactive feature ensures that retailers can react immediately to emerging issues, whether related to products or services, thereby minimizing potential damage to their reputation. The system should allow customization of alert parameters, enabling retailers to set thresholds that align with their operational tactics. This capability is crucial for risk management and enhancing overall customer experience.

Acceptance Criteria

Alert System for Negative Sentiments Activation

Given a retailer has set up the alert system with defined thresholds for negative sentiments, when customer feedback is processed, then an alert must trigger if the processed feedback includes a negative sentiment that meets or exceeds the specified threshold.

Customization of Alert Parameters

Given a retailer accesses the alert system settings, when they adjust the thresholds for negative sentiment alerts, then the system must save the new parameters and reflect the changes in subsequent feedback evaluations.

Notification Delivery for Negative Sentiments

Given an alert is triggered due to detected negative sentiment, when the alert is sent, then the retailer must receive the notification via the chosen delivery method (email, SMS, in-app), acknowledging the specifics of the negative feedback.

Historical Data Analysis for Alert Effectiveness

Given the alert system has been in operation for over a month, when a retailer reviews the historical data of triggered alerts, then they must be able to see a report showing the correlation between alerts and subsequent actions taken, along with customer sentiment changes post-intervention.

Real-Time Feedback Monitoring

Given a retailer is actively using the sentiment analysis tool, when customer feedback is submitted, then the alert system must continuously monitor this feedback in real-time and trigger alerts as necessary based on the current operational thresholds.

User Access Control for Alert Settings

Given multiple users within a retail organization, when an admin sets up user roles, then only authorized users should have the ability to modify alert parameters and access the alert history, ensuring sensitive settings are protected.

Multiple Channel Alert Configuration

Given a retailer chooses to configure the alert system, when they set up notifications, then alerts should be deliverable through multiple channels, including email and SMS, to ensure accessibility and prompt response.

Feedback Dashboard

An interactive dashboard that consolidates real-time customer feedback data, presenting insights through visual analytics and summaries. Retailers can easily track trends, identify common pain points, and evaluate customer perceptions to refine their strategies and improve the overall customer experience.

Requirements

Real-time Feedback Integration

"As a store manager, I want to receive real-time feedback from customers so that I can quickly address any emerging issues and improve their overall experience."

Description

The requirement involves integrating a system that collects real-time customer feedback from various channels, including online reviews, social media, and in-store surveys. This integration is essential for aggregating data in one central location, enabling retailers to monitor customer sentiments promptly. By providing timely insights into customer feedback, businesses can adapt strategies quickly, address issues proactively, and enhance customer satisfaction. The integration should seamlessly connect with existing CRM tools and the RetailRevive platform to ensure comprehensive data analysis and reporting capabilities.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer Feedback is Collected from Multiple Channels

Given that the integration is live, when a customer leaves feedback via an online review platform, then the feedback should be automatically collected and displayed in the Feedback Dashboard within 5 minutes.

Real-time Data Aggregation

Given that feedback from multiple sources is being collected, when a retailer accesses the dashboard, then the feedback from all channels should be aggregated and available in real-time, showing up-to-date insights.

Seamless Integration with CRM Tools

Given that the system is integrated with CRM tools, when customer feedback is collected, then the information should be automatically linked to the customer profiles in the CRM for personalized follow-up.

Visual Analytics Representation

Given that customer feedback data is available, when a retailer views the Feedback Dashboard, then they should see visual representations (charts and graphs) of customer sentiments categorized by feedback type (positive, negative, neutral).

Alerts for Negative Feedback

Given that feedback is constantly being monitored, when a customer leaves negative feedback, then the system should send an alert to the retailer's dashboard immediately for prompt action.

Historical Data Analysis

Given that feedback integration is operational, when a retailer requests historical data analysis, then they should be able to generate reports comparing sentiment trends over specified periods.

User Access and Permissions

Given that multiple users will access the Feedback Dashboard, when a user logs in, then they should have permissions based on their role, ensuring data privacy and security of sensitive customer information.

Visual Analytics Representation

"As a marketer, I want to view customer feedback trends visually so that I can quickly identify areas needing improvement and adapt marketing strategies accordingly."

Description

This requirement focuses on creating visual representations of customer feedback data through interactive charts and graphs within the dashboard. By converting raw feedback into visual insights, retailers can easily identify trends and patterns over time. The visual analytics feature will enhance data interpretation, allowing users to spot anomalies and common customer pain points efficiently. This functionality should support customizable views and filters, enabling retailers to focus on specific areas of interest.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the Feedback Dashboard to visualize customer feedback data for the last quarter to identify trends and patterns in customer sentiments.

Given the user is on the Feedback Dashboard, when they select the 'Last Quarter' option from the date filter, then the system displays visual analytics, including bar charts and line graphs that represent customer feedback trends over the selected period.

Retail staff need to identify common pain points from customer feedback during the peak shopping season to enhance customer service strategies.

Given the user has selected the 'Common Pain Points' filter on the dashboard, when the dashboard updates, then it shows a prioritized list of customer feedback themes along with corresponding visual representation highlighting the frequency of each pain point.

A retailer wants to customize the view of feedback data to focus on specific product categories that received recent customer reviews.

Given the user is on the Feedback Dashboard, when they apply a custom filter for a specific product category, then the system updates the visual analytics to only display customer feedback related to that selected category.

A retailer's management team is reviewing the performance of their customer service response based on feedback provided by customers.

Given the management team is viewing the dashboard, when they request visual representation comparing feedback before and after implementing new customer service policies, then the dashboard displays comparative bar graphs illustrating feedback sentiment changes over the specified timeframe.

The user needs to export the visual analytics from the Feedback Dashboard to present at a staff meeting.

Given the user is viewing the visual analytics on the dashboard, when they select the 'Export' option, then the system successfully generates a downloadable report in PDF format containing all displayed charts and graphs.

A retailer requires a quick assessment of the net promoter score (NPS) based on recent customer feedback.

Given the user accesses the NPS section on the dashboard, when they view the visual representation, then the NPS is displayed as a gauge showing the current score along with historical trend data for the last month.

Feedback Categorization and Tagging

"As a customer experience manager, I want to categorize customer feedback into themes so that I can prioritize issues that matter most to our customers."

Description

This requirement emphasizes the need for automated categorization and tagging of customer feedback based on predefined themes, such as product quality, service efficiency, or store ambiance. By systematically organizing feedback into relevant categories, retailers can prioritize responses and strategies more effectively. The categorization system should enable users to customize tags, ensuring it aligns with individual business goals and customer experience focus areas.

Acceptance Criteria

Automated categorization of customer feedback based on predefined themes.

Given a set of customer feedback inputs, When the feedback is analyzed, Then the system should categorize each piece of feedback into at least one predefined theme such as product quality, service efficiency, or store ambiance automatically.

Custom tag creation for feedback categorization.

Given the feedback categorization interface, When a user inputs a new tag based on specific business needs, Then the system should allow the creation and saving of that tag to be used for future feedback categorization.

Displaying categorized feedback on the dashboard.

Given the categorized customer feedback, When a retailer accesses the feedback dashboard, Then all feedback should be displayed grouped by categories with the ability to expand each category to view individual feedback entries.

Identifying common pain points from customer feedback.

Given a selection of categorized feedback, When the system analyzes the data over a defined period, Then at least three common pain points should be identified and displayed clearly on the dashboard.

User customization of themes for feedback categorization.

Given the settings menu, When a user edits the predefined themes for feedback categorization, Then the system should allow changes and conform the changes to apply to future feedback entries.

Integration of feedback tagging with reporting tools.

Given the tagged feedback data, When a user generates a report, Then the report should reflect the categorization and tagging information accurately, showing the impact of specific tags on overall customer satisfaction.

Custom Alerts and Notifications

"As a business owner, I want to set custom alerts for significant changes in customer feedback so that I can take immediate action to address potential issues."

Description

The requirement entails developing a custom alert system that notifies users of significant feedback shifts or thresholds that have been crossed, such as a sudden increase in negative feedback. Alerts should be customizable based on user-defined parameters, ensuring retailers receive notifications promptly and can react swiftly. This feature is crucial for maintaining a proactive approach to customer satisfaction and retention.

Acceptance Criteria

User wants to configure custom alerts for their store's feedback dashboard to notify them of sudden shifts in customer satisfaction levels.

Given that the user is on the Feedback Dashboard page, when they navigate to the 'Custom Alerts' section and set a threshold for negative feedback, then the system should allow them to receive notifications via email when the threshold is crossed.

The retailer expects to receive alerts when customer feedback changes significantly, ensuring they are aware of any trends that may impact customer satisfaction.

Given the user has defined an alert for an increase in negative feedback, when the negative feedback rises above the defined threshold, then the system should send a notification to the user within 5 minutes of the feedback being submitted.

A user wants to test the alert system to ensure they receive notifications for positive feedback trends and not just negative shifts.

Given that the user has set a threshold for an increase in positive feedback, when the feedback ratings exceed that threshold, then the user should receive a notification confirming the positive shift.

A retailer is reviewing their alert history to ensure that they were notified of all significant feedback changes in the past week.

Given that the user accesses the alert history within the Feedback Dashboard, when they view the alerts for the past week, then they should see a list of notifications corresponding to all thresholds they have set and crossed during that time period.

A user wants to customize the delivery method for their alerts to ensure they prefer push notifications rather than emails.

Given the user is in the 'Notification Settings' section, when they change their preferred alert delivery method to 'Push Notifications', then the system should update their settings accordingly and confirm the change with a success message.

A retailer expects to stop receiving alerts once they have resolved a particular issue related to customer feedback.

Given that the user has resolved the issue that triggered the alert, when they mark the issue as 'Resolved' in the feedback dashboard, then the system should remove related notifications and cease further alerts for that specific feedback concern.

Reporting and Exporting Capabilities

"As an analyst, I want to generate and export detailed reports on customer feedback so that I can present actionable insights to the management team."

Description

This requirement highlights the need for comprehensive reporting tools that allow retailers to generate reports on customer feedback analysis easily. Users should be able to export these reports in multiple formats for sharing and presentation purposes. Reporting capabilities should be flexible, offering various metrics, date ranges, and visual formats to cater to different business needs and stakeholders.

Acceptance Criteria

User generates a monthly report summarizing customer feedback and trends from the Feedback Dashboard.

Given the user navigates to the Reporting section, when they select the month from the date range dropdown and click 'Generate Report', then a report is created summarizing the feedback data for the selected month, including metrics like overall satisfaction and common feedback themes.

User exports the generated report in PDF format for a presentation to stakeholders.

Given the user has generated a report, when they click the 'Export' button and select PDF format, then the report should download in PDF format without errors.

User wishes to customize the report by selecting specific metrics to include.

Given the user selects the 'Customize Report' option, when they choose specific metrics, then the generated report reflects only the selected metrics accurately represented in visual formats.

User needs to view the report in different visual formats before exporting.

Given the user views the generated report, when they toggle between visual formats (e.g., chart, table, infographic), then the report displays correctly in the selected visual format without data loss.

User generates a report for customer feedback received over the last quarter.

Given the user selects the last quarter from the date range options, when they click 'Generate Report', then a report is created that accurately reflects all feedback collected during that quarter.

User wants to share the report via email directly from the dashboard.

Given the user has generated a report, when they click the 'Share via Email' button and enter recipient details, then the email should be sent with the report attached and confirmation should be displayed.

Response Management System

This system allows retailers to track and manage customer responses efficiently, organizing feedback for easy follow-up. By ensuring that retailers have a structured way to address customer concerns or suggestions, it helps in building stronger customer relationships and promoting loyalty.

Requirements

Customer Feedback Collection

"As a retailer, I want to collect customer feedback through tailored surveys and forms so that I can understand their needs and improve my services accordingly."

Description

The Customer Feedback Collection requirement enables retailers to gather and manage customer responses effectively through structured forms and surveys. This feature allows retailers to create customizable feedback channels, including regular satisfaction surveys, product reviews, and direct feedback forms. It helps in organizing feedback for easy follow-ups, ensuring that retailers can promptly address customer concerns and suggestions. By systematically capturing and analyzing feedback, retailers can enhance customer satisfaction and loyalty, driving sales and improving service quality. This functionality is essential for understanding customer needs and preferences, thereby fostering better relationships and reducing churn.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailer can create and distribute customer feedback surveys via the RetailRevive platform.

Given a retailer is logged into the RetailRevive platform, when they navigate to the feedback management section and create a new survey, then the retailer should be able to publish the survey for customers to respond.

Customers can receive and submit feedback through multiple channels.

Given a survey is live, when a customer accesses the feedback link (via email or website), then they should be able to fill out the survey and submit their responses successfully.

Retailers can view aggregated feedback results in a structured format.

Given the survey collection period has ended, when a retailer views the feedback results, then they should see an overview of customer responses displayed in charts or graphs for easy analysis.

Retailers receive real-time notifications of significant customer feedback.

Given a customer submits feedback, when the feedback is tagged as urgent or requires immediate attention, then the retailer should receive a notification via the RetailRevive platform or email.

Retailers can follow up with customers based on their feedback.

Given the retailer has accessed the feedback management system, when they select a specific customer response, then they should have the option to initiate a follow-up communication directly from the platform.

Retailers can customize the design and format of feedback surveys.

Given a retailer is creating a new feedback survey, when they access the customization options, then they should be able to modify the colors, questions, and layout to match their brand.

Response Tracking System

"As a customer service manager, I want a system to track responses to customer feedback so that I can ensure timely follow-ups and improve customer satisfaction."

Description

The Response Tracking System requirement allows retailers to monitor and manage responses to customer feedback systematically. This feature tracks the status of customer inquiries and feedback, providing a dashboard for retailers to view, prioritize, and assign responses to team members. By establishing clear workflows and timelines for addressing customer feedback, retailers can ensure that no query goes unanswered and enhance accountability throughout the organization. This capability is vital for building trust and understanding customer expectations, and it aids in maintaining effective communication with customers. Ultimately, it helps retailers turn feedback into actionable insights for continuous improvement.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailer is accessing the Response Tracking System dashboard to view all incoming customer feedback for the day.

Given the retailer is logged into the Response Tracking System, When they navigate to the dashboard, Then they should see a real-time list of all customer feedback received, including timestamps and status of each response.

A retailer wants to assign customer feedback to a team member for response handling.

Given a retailer is viewing customer feedback on the Response Tracking System dashboard, When they select a specific feedback item and choose to assign it to a team member, Then the system should update the feedback status to 'Assigned' and notify the assigned team member.

The retailer is monitoring the status of customer queries to ensure timely responses.

Given the retailer is on the Response Tracking System dashboard, When they filter the feedback items by status, Then they should be able to see all queries that are still 'Pending' or 'In Progress' clearly labeled, along with the elapsed time since each feedback was received.

A retailer wants to track the effectiveness of the response management process over a specified period.

Given the retailer accesses the reporting section of the Response Tracking System, When they select a date range for which they want to view the response metrics, Then they should receive a report that includes the number of responses completed, along with average response time and feedback resolution rate.

The retailer needs to categorize customer feedback for more effective management.

Given the retailer is viewing a feedback item in the Response Tracking System, When they select a category from a predefined list and save it, Then the feedback item should reflect the selected category and be filterable by that category in future views.

The retailer wishes to follow up on customer feedback after it has been addressed.

Given the retailer marks a feedback response as 'Resolved', When they select the option to send a follow-up message, Then a follow-up email should be automatically generated and sent to the customer, confirming the resolution and inviting further comments.

A retailer wants to ensure all feedback is acknowledged upon receipt to build trust with customers.

Given that a customer submits feedback through the platform, When the feedback is logged in the Response Tracking System, Then an automated acknowledgement message should be sent to the customer confirming their submission was received successfully.

Feedback Analytics Dashboard

"As a business owner, I want an analytics dashboard to analyze customer feedback trends so that I can make informed decisions that could improve customer satisfaction and loyalty."

Description

The Feedback Analytics Dashboard requirement provides retailers with a comprehensive analytics engine that aggregates customer feedback data for insightful analysis. This dashboard visualizes trends, themes, and common issues arising from customer feedback, enabling retailers to identify areas for improvement and make data-driven decisions. By leveraging advanced analytics, retailers can gain actionable insights into customer preferences and pain points, allowing them to prioritize developments and enhancements effectively. The analytics dashboard is crucial for measuring customer satisfaction over time and assessing the impact of changes made in response to feedback, making it an invaluable tool for strategic planning and enhancement of customer experience.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer Feedback Trends Visualization

Given that the retailer has collected customer feedback, when accessing the Feedback Analytics Dashboard, then the dashboard should display trends and visualizations of customer feedback over a specified time period, allowing the retailer to identify peaks and troughs in feedback volume and sentiment.

Theme Analysis of Feedback

Given a dataset of collected feedback, when the retailer views the Feedback Analytics Dashboard, then the dashboard must categorize feedback into at least five distinct themes, providing the retailer with a clear understanding of common topics or issues raised by customers.

Actionable Insights Generation

Given that customer feedback is aggregated and analyzed, when the retailer reviews the insights section of the Feedback Analytics Dashboard, then it should present a summary of at least three actionable insights based on the data, prioritizing areas for improvement based on customer sentiment and frequency of feedback.

Historical Comparison of Customer Satisfaction

Given historical customer feedback data is available, when the retailer accesses the Feedback Analytics Dashboard, then it should allow for a comparison of customer satisfaction scores over different time periods, providing visual indicators of improvement or decline in customer satisfaction.

User Access Control and Security

Given the need for role-based access, when the retailer sets up user accounts for the Feedback Analytics Dashboard, then it must provide options for defining user roles and permissions, ensuring sensitive data is protected and only accessible to authorized users.

Real-time Data Update

Given ongoing customer feedback submissions, when a retailer accesses the Feedback Analytics Dashboard, then it should display real-time updates reflecting the latest feedback data within five minutes of submission to ensure timely analysis and response.

Custom Reporting Features

Given varied retailer needs, when accessing the Feedback Analytics Dashboard, then it must offer the capability to create custom reports based on feedback categories, timeframes, and specific metrics, ensuring the retailer can tailor insights to their strategy.

Automated Response Generation

"As a customer service representative, I want to automate responses to frequently asked questions so that I can focus on more complex customer issues and speed up response times."

Description

The Automated Response Generation requirement allows retailers to create and send automated responses to commonly received customer feedback or inquiries. This feature employs predefined templates and machine learning to ensure that responses are relevant and helpful, reducing the burden on customer service teams. By automating routine responses, retailers can improve response times and customer experience, providing immediate acknowledgment of their feedback or inquiry. This feature is essential for enhancing operational efficiency, allowing teams to focus on more complex customer interactions. Additionally, it contributes to creating a streamlined customer communication strategy, reinforcing brand reliability and responsiveness.

Acceptance Criteria

Automated Response Generation for Common Customer Inquiries

Given a customer submits a common inquiry through the feedback system, when the inquiry is received, then an automated response is generated and sent to the customer within 5 seconds, using the relevant predefined template.

Customization of Response Templates

Given that a retailer wants to modify response templates, when they access the template management interface, then they should be able to edit existing templates and save changes successfully without errors.

Analytics on Automated Responses Effectiveness

Given that automated responses are being sent, when the retailer reviews customer feedback in the analytics dashboard, then the retailer should see a 30% decrease in follow-up inquiries related to topics covered by automated responses within one month of implementation.

Multi-language Support for Automated Responses

Given that customers may speak different languages, when an inquiry is received, then the automated response should accurately reflect the customer's language preference, utilizing the correct translated template based on the language selected by the customer.

Integration with Customer Feedback Loop

Given an automated response is sent, when a customer replies to that automated response, then their feedback should be logged in the system for further analysis and action by customer service teams.

User Training for Response Management System

Given that the response management system is implemented, when the training session is conducted for retail staff, then at least 90% of staff should demonstrate proficiency in creating, modifying, and reviewing automated responses by the end of the training session.

Customer Segmentation for Feedback

"As a marketer, I want to segment customer feedback by demographics so that I can tailor our marketing efforts and improve engagement with specific customer groups."

Description

The Customer Segmentation for Feedback requirement allows retailers to categorize customer feedback based on various demographics and purchasing behaviors. This feature enables the analysis of feedback tailored to specific customer segments, providing deeper insights into the needs and preferences of different customer groups. By understanding which segments are most satisfied or dissatisfied, retailers can customize their marketing strategies and operational efforts to better serve these segments. This functionality is essential for enhancing targeted communication and product offerings, ensuring that retailers can deliver personalized experiences that lead to increased engagement and loyalty.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer feedback is collected through multiple channels such as surveys, emails, and social media. Retailers need to categorize this feedback to identify trends among different customer segments, such as age, gender, and purchase history.

Given that customer feedback is collected, when a retailer accesses the Response Management System, then they must be able to filter the feedback by defined customer segments including demographics and purchasing behaviors.

A retailer wants to analyze feedback from a specific segment of customers after a new product launch. They need to ensure they can easily access and view this segmented feedback for targeted analysis.

Given that feedback has been collected post-launch, when the retailer selects the 'New Product Feedback' segment, then they should see a clear summary of feedback categorized by the age group and purchase history of the responding customers.

Customer satisfaction surveys are being sent out to various segments. The retailer expects to see their feedback categorized and visualized in reports that are easy to interpret and analyze.

Given that customer satisfaction surveys have been distributed, when the retailer generates a report on feedback, then the report must display categorized feedback clearly for at least five different customer segments with corresponding satisfaction scores.

The marketing team wants to create a targeted campaign based on the feedback from customers categorized by their previous purchasing behavior. They require access to this information in the Response Management System.

Given that feedback has been categorized, when the marketing team queries the system, then they should be able to retrieve segments of customers who have made specific purchases and their respective feedback ratings easily.

A retailer is preparing for a product recall and needs to quickly identify and notify customers who belong to a specific feedback segment that reported dissatisfaction with the product.

Given that a product recall is imminent, when the retailer accesses the system, then they must be able to filter and retrieve a list of customers from the dissatisfied segment related to the specific product within one minute.

The retailer wants to track changes in customer sentiment over time by comparing feedback segments from different periods, such as quarterly reviews.

Given that feedback data is available for multiple periods, when the retailer runs a sentiment analysis report, then it must provide a clear comparison of feedback across at least two different time periods for each customer segment.

A retailer gathers feedback from loyalty program members and non-members to assess the effectiveness of their loyalty initiatives. They need to categorize and evaluate the feedback based on membership status.

Given that feedback from both loyalty members and non-members has been collected, when the retailer accesses the segmentation features, then they should be able to view the results differentiated clearly by membership status, including satisfaction ratings and comments.

Automated Response Follow-up

An automation feature that triggers personalized follow-up emails or notifications based on the feedback received. By acknowledging customer feedback and showing that their opinions matter, retailers can enhance customer satisfaction and foster a positive shopping experience.

Requirements

Feedback Acknowledgment Trigger

"As a retailer, I want to automatically send personalized follow-up emails after receiving customer feedback so that customers feel appreciated and are more likely to return for future purchases."

Description

The requirement mandates the implementation of an automated system to recognize and respond to customer feedback. This system will trigger personalized follow-up emails or notifications whenever feedback is received from customers, ensuring that their opinions are acknowledged and valued. The primary benefit of this feature is to enhance customer satisfaction by providing timely and relevant communication, ultimately fostering a positive shopping experience. This requirement is critical for integrating customer engagement within the RetailRevive platform, as it allows retailers to maintain a relationship with customers post-purchase, encouraging repeat business and customer loyalty.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer submits feedback about their purchase through a designated platform feature.

Given that a customer has submitted feedback, when the feedback is received, then a personalized follow-up email is triggered acknowledging their feedback within 24 hours.

Retailer views the automation system for managing responses to customer feedback.

Given that the retailer is logged into the RetailRevive platform, when they access the feedback management section, then they should see all feedback submissions with their corresponding status of acknowledgment displayed.

Customer checks their email after submitting feedback regarding their shopping experience.

Given that a customer has provided feedback, when they check their email, then they should find a personalized follow-up email with a thank you message and an outline of how their feedback will be used.

Retail manager utilizes analytics to review customer satisfaction after feedback acknowledgement implementation.

Given that the retailer has implemented the feedback acknowledgment system, when reviewing customer satisfaction metrics, then there should be an observable increase in satisfaction ratings compared to previous periods.

Customer submits a suggestion on improving product offerings.

Given that a suggestion has been submitted by the customer, when the automated response system processes the feedback, then the customer should receive a notification confirming receipt of their suggestion and outlining how it will be considered.

Retailer configures automated response settings for different types of feedback.

Given that the retailer is setting up the automated response system, when they select different types of feedback triggers, then they should be able to configure unique response templates for each feedback type.

Customizable Email Templates

"As a retailer, I want to customize email templates for follow-up communications so that I can maintain my brand voice and engage my customers more effectively."

Description

This requirement entails the development of customizable email templates that retailers can use to respond to customer feedback. These templates will allow retailers to tailor their messages according to their brand voice and customer segment, thus personalizing the communication process. By providing a variety of templates and customization options, this feature will enable retailers to enhance the effectiveness of their follow-up communications, resulting in higher engagement rates and improved customer satisfaction. This functionality also seamlessly integrates with the automated response system, ensuring consistent branding and messaging across all customer communications.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailers want to use customizable email templates to respond to customer feedback received after a purchase, ensuring their responses are personalized and in line with their brand voice.

Given a retailer has access to the email template feature, when they select a template, then they must be able to customize text, images, and the overall layout in a user-friendly interface before sending it.

A retailer receives various types of customer feedback and wants to ensure that the customizable email templates can cater to different feedback types (positive, negative, neutral).

Given a retailer selects a feedback type, when they choose an email template designed for that type, then the template should auto-populate with relevant messaging and suggested wording tailored to the feedback.

Retailers aim to maintain brand consistency across communications with customers while using customizable email templates for feedback responses.

Given a retailer customizes an email template, when they preview the email, then the email must reflect their brand colors, logos, and overall style as defined in their account settings.

Retailers wish to personalize their follow-up emails by integrating customer-specific data from the CRM when using customizable email templates.

Given a retailer selects a customizable email template, when they input customer-specific data fields (such as name and recent purchase), then the email must dynamically display the correct personalized information in the final sent email.

The automated response feature triggers follow-up emails after feedback submission, and retailers want to ensure that the customizable templates are used correctly.

Given the automated response feature is activated, when a customer submits feedback, then the system must automatically select and send the appropriate customizable email template without errors.

Feedback Analytics Dashboard

"As a retailer, I want an analytics dashboard that displays customer feedback trends so that I can make data-driven decisions to improve my products and services."

Description

The requirement calls for an interactive analytics dashboard that aggregates and visualizes customer feedback data. This dashboard will provide retailers with insights into customer satisfaction trends and feedback performance, facilitating informed decision-making. Retailers will be able to track metrics such as response rates, feedback types, and customer sentiments over time. The analytics feature is designed to enhance the feedback loop, allowing retailers to adapt their strategies based on real-time customer input. Integrating this dashboard with the current CRM and analytics tools will ensure a comprehensive view of customer interactions and satisfaction levels.

Acceptance Criteria

Feedback Analytics Dashboard displays customer satisfaction trends clearly based on recent feedback submissions.

Given the dashboard is loaded, when I navigate to the 'Customer Satisfaction Trends' section, then I should see a line graph depicting satisfaction scores over the last six months, with data points for each month clearly labeled.

The feedback analytics dashboard integrates seamlessly with existing CRM tools to fetch data.

Given the CRM integration is enabled, when I view the 'Customer Feedback Overview' section, then I should see real-time data from the CRM reflecting customer sentiments categorized by recent feedback.

Retailers can filter feedback data based on specific date ranges and customer demographics.

Given the feedback data is displayed, when I apply a filter for a specific date range and select demographic parameters, then the dashboard should update to only show feedback data that matches the selected criteria.

The dashboard allows retailers to analyze different types of customer feedback.

Given the feedback data is displayed, when I select the 'Feedback Type' filter, then I should be able to view options such as 'Compliments', 'Complaints', and 'Suggestions', and the data should refresh accordingly upon selection.

The feedback analytics dashboard provides an export feature for detailed reports.

Given the dashboard is displaying feedback data, when I click the 'Export' button, then I should receive a detailed report in CSV format that includes all visible metrics and trends.

Retailers receive alert notifications for significant changes in customer feedback metrics.

Given I’m monitoring feedback metrics, when there is a notable drop in customer satisfaction score by 20% or more within a week, then I should receive an automatic email notification detailing the change.

Customer Feedback Trends

This analytical feature tracks and highlights trends in customer feedback over time, allowing retailers to identify recurring issues or opportunities. By understanding persistent customer sentiments, retailers can make informed operational or strategic adjustments to enhance product offerings and services.

Requirements

Feedback Data Collection

"As a store manager, I want to collect customer feedback through multiple channels so that I can understand their needs and improve our product offerings accordingly."

Description

This requirement focuses on the implementation of a systematic approach to collect customer feedback across various channels such as surveys, reviews, social media, and direct comments. It involves creating user-friendly feedback forms and integrating various data sources to ensure comprehensive feedback collection. This functionality is crucial for capturing a broad spectrum of customer sentiments and translating them into actionable insights, thereby enhancing the retailers' ability to respond effectively to customer needs and preferences.

Acceptance Criteria

User submits feedback via an online survey about their recent shopping experience.

Given the user accesses the feedback survey, when they fill out the required fields and submit, then a confirmation message is displayed, and the feedback is recorded in the database.

Customer leaves a review on the retailer's website for a purchased product.

Given a customer writes a review for a product, when the review contains valid content, then it is stored in the feedback database and linked to the correct product ID.

Social media mentions about the retailer are aggregated for sentiment analysis.

Given the system retrieves mentions of the retailer from social media platforms, when analysis is conducted, then sentiment scores are calculated and trends are generated within the dashboard.

Retailer analyzes feedback trends over a specified period (monthly, quarterly).

Given a retailer requests trend analysis in the dashboard, when the analysis is completed, then a report showing positive and negative trends over the specified period is generated and downloadable.

Customer submits feedback through direct comments on the retailer's mobile app.

Given a customer navigates to the feedback section of the app, when they submit a comment, then it is recorded in the feedback database, and the user receives an acknowledgment within the app.

Retailer implements quick surveys at checkout to gather immediate feedback post-purchase.

Given the survey is displayed after the purchase, when customers interact with the survey, then their responses are collected in real-time and stored for analysis.

Notifications sent to management when positive or negative feedback trends occur.

Given a feedback trend exceeds set thresholds, when this occurs, then a notification is sent to the management team via email and in-app alerts to take action.

Sentiment Analysis Engine

"As a data analyst, I want an automated sentiment analysis tool that categorizes customer feedback, so that I can quickly identify and address both issues and opportunities."

Description

This requirement entails developing a robust sentiment analysis engine that processes and analyzes the collected customer feedback data to identify trends, patterns, and recurring sentiments. The engine should use natural language processing techniques to classify feedback into categories such as positive, negative, and neutral, providing retailers with a clear overview of customer sentiment over time. By effectively analyzing customer sentiments, retailers can make informed decisions on product improvements and customer service strategies.

Acceptance Criteria

Sentiment Analysis engine will be used by retailers to analyze feedback received from customers after purchasing products for a week. Retailers will access the platform to see visual representations of feedback trends, allowing them to address issues quickly and make product adjustments as necessary.

Given that retailer has received at least 100 pieces of feedback within a week, When the sentiment analysis engine processes the feedback, Then it should categorize the feedback into positive, negative, and neutral sentiments with an accuracy rate of at least 85%.

The sentiment analysis engine will be utilized by a marketing team to identify periods of negative sentiment over the last quarter. This information will be used to strategize marketing campaigns aimed at addressing customer concerns and improving brand reputation.

Given that the sentiment analysis engine has access to customer feedback data from the last quarter, When trends are analyzed, Then it should highlight at least three significant periods of negative sentiment and provide insights into the associated feedback themes.

Retail managers will use the sentiment analysis engine to assess customer sentiment trends over a six-month period in order to prepare for quarterly reviews and discuss potential product improvements based on customer opinions.

Given that the sentiment analysis engine is analyzing feedback from the last six months, When the reports are generated, Then they should include at least five actionable insights based on positive and negative sentiment trends, supported by visual data representations.

Customer service teams will rely on the sentiment analysis engine to analyze real-time feedback collected over the last 24 hours during a promotional campaign. The feedback will indicate immediate customer responses to the promotion.

Given that customer feedback is continuously collected, When the sentiment analysis engine is executed, Then it should provide real-time sentiment results within 15 minutes of feedback collection, highlighting key areas of customer satisfaction or dissatisfaction.

A retail executive will present the results from the sentiment analysis engine at a stakeholder meeting to justify changes to product lines based on customer opinions collected over the past year.

Given the sentiment analysis engine has processed a year's worth of feedback, When the executive accesses the summary report, Then it should present an executive summary highlighting key sentiment trends and support at least three recommendations for product line changes.

Retailers will use a dashboard that integrates the sentiment analysis engine to track ongoing customer sentiment related to new products launched in the last month and their associated feedback.

Given the dashboard is updated daily, When new customer feedback is submitted regarding new products, Then the sentiment analysis engine should categorize the feedback and display updates within the dashboard within 24 hours.

Trend Visualization Dashboard

"As a retailer, I want a dashboard to visualize customer feedback trends so that I can quickly identify changes in customer sentiment and improve our business strategies accordingly."

Description

The requirement is for a dashboard that visually represents the analyzed customer feedback trends over time. This dashboard will provide insightful graphs, charts, and heat maps that highlight key patterns and shifts in customer sentiment. By having a visual representation of feedback trends, retailers can easily identify problem areas, monitor the impact of changes in products or services, and measure customer satisfaction. This tool empowers retailers to make data-driven decisions that enhance customer engagement and loyalty.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the Trend Visualization Dashboard to analyze customer feedback trends for the past month.

Given the user is logged in and has access to the dashboard, when they select the date range for the last month, then the dashboard should display customer feedback trends in graphical formats, including at least one bar chart and one line graph.

User wants to drill down into specific categories of feedback to identify issues in product offerings.

Given the user is viewing the Trend Visualization Dashboard, when they click on a specific category in the feedback trends, then the dashboard should reveal detailed statistics and sentiments related to that category within five seconds.

User checks the impact of a recent promotional campaign on customer sentiment regarding specific products.

Given the user has set the date range to include the promotional period, when they select the product associated with the campaign, then the dashboard should show a comparative visual of feedback sentiment before and after the campaign.

User needs to export trend data for further analysis.

Given the user is on the Trend Visualization Dashboard, when they click the export button, then the system should generate and download a CSV file of the displayed trends with all relevant data including timestamps and sentiment scores.

User wants to view aggregated customer sentiment over time to assess overall satisfaction levels.

Given the user accesses the Trend Visualization Dashboard, when they select the view option for 'Overall Sentiment', then the dashboard should display an aggregated sentiment score and a corresponding trend line over the selected date range.

User seeks insights on the effectiveness of recent changes to product offerings based on feedback.

Given the user is analyzing past feedback trends, when they filter the data based on specific changes made, then the dashboard should provide visual feedback showing changes in customer sentiment correlating with those modifications.

Actionable Insights Report

"As a business owner, I want detailed reports of customer feedback trends so that I can prioritize improvements that will enhance customer experience and business performance."

Description

This requirement covers the creation of detailed reports that provide actionable insights derived from the analyzed customer feedback and trends. These reports will summarize critical findings and suggest specific operational or strategic adjustments that retailers can implement. By converting raw data into actionable recommendations, this feature will help retailers prioritize improvements based on customer needs, ultimately leading to enhanced customer satisfaction and retention.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer reviews on products are regularly collected and analyzed over a period of three months to identify recurring themes and sentiments.

Given that customer feedback data has been collected over three months, when the Actionable Insights Report is generated, then it should include a summary of at least five key trends identified in customer feedback.

A retailer accesses the Actionable Insights Report to understand customer sentiments related to a recent product launch.

Given that the Actionable Insights Report is generated post a product launch, when the retailer reviews the report, then it should provide at least three actionable recommendations based on customer sentiment analysis regarding that product.

The marketing team uses the Actionable Insights Report to inform their strategy for an upcoming promotional campaign.

Given an upcoming promotional campaign, when the marketing team utilizes the Actionable Insights Report, then they should identify at least two improvement areas supported by customer feedback data relevant to the promotion.

Retailers review the insights from the report to assess the effectiveness of operational changes made based on prior feedback.

Given that previous operational changes were made based on earlier customer feedback, when reviewing the latest Actionable Insights Report, then the impact of those changes should be measurable, with an identified improvement in customer satisfaction metrics by at least 10%.

A retail manager presents the Actionable Insights Report findings at a team meeting to prioritize next steps for product development.

Given that the Actionable Insights Report is ready for review, when the retail manager presents the report, then the presentation should detail at least three critical insights that directly impact product development priorities identified from customer feedback.

Customers provide feedback post-purchase, which is then analyzed for sentiment and trends over time.

Given that customer feedback is collected through multiple channels (e.g., surveys, reviews), when the Actionable Insights Report is generated, then it should consolidate feedback from at least three distinct channels to show a comprehensive customer sentiment analysis.

After implementing changes based on the Actionable Insights Report, the effectiveness of those changes needs to be evaluated after one quarter.

Given that changes were implemented based on insights from the Actionable Insights Report, when evaluating outcomes after three months, then at least a 15% increase in net promoter score (NPS) should be documented as a result of those changes.

Feedback Closure Mechanism

"As a customer service manager, I want a system to track and respond to customer feedback so that I can ensure customers feel valued and heard, fostering a strong relationship with them."

Description

This requirement involves implementing a mechanism to ensure that the feedback gathered from customers is acknowledged and addressed appropriately. This feature will allow retailers to respond to feedback, provide updates on actions taken, and close the feedback loop with customers. By acknowledging customer feedback and demonstrating responsiveness, retailers can build trust and strengthen customer relationships, ultimately improving brand loyalty.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer submits feedback on a recent purchase via the RetailRevive platform.

Given a customer has submitted feedback, when the retailer reviews the feedback, then the retailer must acknowledge the feedback within 24 hours and inform the customer of the next steps.

Retailer addresses a complaint made by a customer through feedback and takes corrective action.

Given a retailer has taken corrective action based on customer feedback, when the retailer closes the feedback loop, then the customer should receive an update detailing the actions taken within 72 hours.

A customer receives a follow-up message after providing positive feedback about a product.

Given a customer has provided positive feedback, when the retailer sends a follow-up message, then the message should include a thank you note and a discount code for future purchases.

Retailer analyzes recurring feedback trends over the last month to inform product strategy.

Given the retailer reviews customer feedback data, when feedback is analyzed, then trends must be identified and documented in a report that highlights at least three key areas for improvement or enhancement.

Features of the feedback mechanism are tested for response times and updates.

Given the feedback mechanism is being monitored, when a customer submits feedback, then the system should acknowledge the receipt of feedback within 5 minutes and provide an expected timeline for response.

A customer requests clarification regarding the resolution of their feedback.

Given a customer asks for more information on feedback resolution, when the retailer responds, then the response must include clear details about the steps taken and any future actions planned.

Retailer uses feedback to improve a specific service offering.

Given feedback indicated customer dissatisfaction with a service, when the retailer implements changes based on that feedback, then at least 70% of customers surveyed after the changes should report an improvement in satisfaction.

Incentivized Feedback Options

Introduce options for customers to provide feedback in exchange for incentives like discounts or rewards. This approach encourages more customers to share their experiences, providing retailers with richer data on customer satisfaction while simultaneously enhancing customer engagement and loyalty.

Requirements

Incentive Program Setup

"As a retailer, I want to set up an incentivized feedback program so that I can encourage more customers to provide feedback, leading to improved customer insights and engagement."

Description

The Incentive Program Setup requirement involves creating a user-friendly interface that allows retailers to configure various feedback incentives such as discounts, loyalty points, or gift cards. This feature must integrate seamlessly with the existing CRM and e-commerce components of the RetailRevive platform. It should support customization options for retailers to define the type and value of incentives based on customer behavior analytics. The implementation will encourage more customers to submit feedback, thereby enriching the data available on customer satisfaction and driving overall engagement and loyalty to the brand.

Acceptance Criteria

Incentive Program Configuration by Retailers

Given that a retailer is logged into the RetailRevive platform, when they access the Incentive Program Setup section, then they should be able to create, edit, and delete incentive options such as discounts, loyalty points, and gift cards with clear labeling and guidance for each option.

Integration with Existing CRM and E-commerce Systems

Given that the retailer has set up their incentive options, when they activate the Incentive Program, then the new incentives should automatically reflect in the existing CRM and e-commerce systems without manual intervention, ensuring data consistency and seamless functionality.

Customization of Incentive Values Based on Customer Data

Given that a retailer is customizing their incentive program, when they set different values for the incentives based on customer behavior analytics, then these values should be saved accurately and allow for review prior to program activation.

Customer Engagement through Feedback Submission

Given that customers are aware of the incentives, when they submit feedback through the designated platform section, then they should receive their respective rewards instantly, verified through their user account and transaction history.

Analytics Dashboard for Incentive Program Performance

Given that the retailer has launched the incentive program, when they access the analytics dashboard, then they should see real-time data reflecting the number of feedback submissions, incentive redemption rates, and overall customer satisfaction scores related to the program.

User-Friendly Interface for Setting Up Incentives

Given that a retailer is on the Incentive Program Setup page, when they are configuring incentives, then the interface must provide step-by-step prompts and tooltips to guide them through the setup process with minimal user errors.

Security and Compliance for Incentive Transactions

Given that the retailer is offering incentivized feedback, when incentives are issued to customers, then all transactions must comply with relevant data protection regulations, ensuring customer data is secure and incentives are tracked appropriately.

Feedback Collection Interface

"As a customer, I want an easy way to provide feedback and receive incentives so that I can share my experiences without hassle and get rewarded for it."

Description

The Feedback Collection Interface requirement focuses on creating an intuitive and accessible platform for customers to submit their feedback in exchange for incentives. This interface should be mobile-responsive and integrated into both the website and mobile app, allowing customers to easily navigate and provide their input. The feedback form must capture essential data while providing options for customers to choose their desired incentive. This not only facilitates customer participation but also improves the quality and quantity of feedback collected, enhancing retailers' ability to analyze customer satisfaction effectively.

Acceptance Criteria

Feedback Submission Through the Mobile App

Given a customer accesses the feedback collection interface through the mobile app, when they fill in the feedback form and select an incentive, then their feedback should be submitted successfully, and a confirmation message should be displayed within 2 seconds.

Feedback Submission Through the Website

Given a customer accesses the feedback collection interface on the website, when they complete the feedback form including all required fields and select an incentive, then their feedback should be saved successfully, and an email confirmation should be sent to the customer's registered email address.

Incentive Selection Visibility

Given the feedback collection interface is displayed on either the mobile app or website, when a customer navigates to the incentive selection section, then all available incentives must be clearly visible and selectable without any usability issues.

Data Capture Effectiveness

Given the feedback form is submitted by a customer, when the data is stored in the system, then the essential data fields (customer ID, feedback text, selected incentive) must be accurately captured and retrievable in the analytics dashboard.

Mobile Responsiveness of Feedback Form

Given the feedback collection interface is accessed on various mobile devices, when the feedback form is displayed, then it must be fully responsive and usable on all screen sizes and orientations without needing to scroll horizontally.

User Interface Consistency

Given the feedback collection interface is available on both the mobile app and website, when a user interacts with either platform, then the UI elements (buttons, form fields, typography) must maintain consistent design principles and branding across both platforms.

Error Handling for Feedback Submission

Given a customer attempts to submit the feedback form with incomplete required fields, when they click the submit button, then an error message should appear clearly indicating the missing fields without losing the previously entered data.

Incentive Tracking Module

"As a retailer, I want to track the performance of my incentive program so that I can make data-driven decisions on how to improve customer feedback and engagement."

Description

The Incentive Tracking Module requirement entails the development of a system that allows retailers to monitor and analyze the effectiveness of the incentives offered for feedback. This module should include analytics tools that track how many customers redeem their incentives, the types of feedback received, and the correlation between feedback and customer engagement metrics. By providing insight into the success of the incentive program, retailers can strategically adjust their offerings and improve customer interaction, ultimately driving better business outcomes.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer provides feedback through the incentivized feedback system after completing a purchase, selecting rewards from presented options.

Given a customer completes a purchase and is presented with feedback options, When the customer submits their feedback and selects a reward, Then the incentive should be successfully redeemed and recorded in the system.

Retailers review the analytics dashboard to measure the effectiveness of the incentive program over a month.

Given a retailer accesses the analytics dashboard, When they select the incentive tracking report for the past month, Then the report should display total incentives offered, total incentives redeemed, and customer feedback categories collected.

Retailers analyze the correlation between the type of feedback received and customer engagement metrics to refine their incentive strategy.

Given the retailer has feedback data and engagement metrics, When they generate a correlation analysis report, Then the report should clearly outline the relationship between feedback types and customer engagement scores such as repeat purchases and referral rates.

A customer views their incentives balance and available rewards in their account settings.

Given a customer logs into their account, When they navigate to their account settings page, Then they should see their current incentives balance along with the details of available rewards they can redeem.

The system captures the type of feedback submitted to classify it for further analysis.

Given a customer submits feedback, When the feedback is categorized by type (e.g., positive, negative, suggestion), Then the feedback should be stored in the correct category within the database for reporting purposes.

A retailer sets up a new incentive campaign targeting specific customer segments through the module.

Given a retailer creates an incentive campaign, When they specify the target customer segments and choice of rewards, Then the new campaign should be activated and visible to the specified customer groups.

Customers receive notifications about new incentives available for providing feedback.

Given a new incentive campaign is launched, When customers in the targeted segment log into their account or check their email, Then they should receive a notification detailing the new incentives and how to participate.

Feedback Analytics Dashboard

"As a retail manager, I want to view feedback analytics in a dashboard format so that I can easily understand customer satisfaction trends and adjust our strategies accordingly."

Description

The Feedback Analytics Dashboard requirement focuses on creating a robust analytics tool that aggregates customer feedback data and presents it in an easily digestible format. This dashboard should provide visual representations of feedback trends, customer satisfaction scores, and the effectiveness of different incentive types. By equipping retailers with actionable insights, this tool will empower them to respond quickly to customer needs and adapt their strategies to enhance satisfaction and loyalty effectively.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer submits feedback in exchange for a discount on their next purchase through the RetailRevive platform.

Given a customer has received a prompt for feedback and completed the feedback form, when they submit their feedback, then they should receive a confirmation message and a unique discount code within 5 minutes.

Retailers analyze feedback trends through the dashboard after one month of collecting feedback data.

Given the retailer accesses the Feedback Analytics Dashboard after one month, when they view the feedback trends, then the dashboard should display visual representations (graphs/charts) of customer satisfaction scores and the types of feedback received categorized by incentive type.

Retailers want to assess the effectiveness of different incentive types on customer feedback submission rates.

Given the retailer is on the Feedback Analytics Dashboard, when they filter feedback by incentive type, then the dashboard should show the number of feedback submissions for each incentive type alongside percentage increases in submissions.

Retailers need to monitor customer satisfaction scores over time to improve service.

Given the retailer has collected feedback for three consecutive months, when they access the customer satisfaction trends section of the dashboard, then it should display a monthly comparison of satisfaction scores with clear visual cues indicating trends.

A retailer evaluates the overall impact of incentivized feedback on their sales and customer loyalty metrics.

Given that the retailer compares sales data before and after implementing incentivized feedback, when they review the analysis results, they should see at least a 10% increase in sales and improved customer retention rates after three months.

Customers access their feedback history and rewards received through the RetailRevive platform.

Given the customer logs into their account on the RetailRevive platform, when they navigate to the feedback history section, then they should be able to view all feedback submitted along with the corresponding rewards earned for each submission.

Customer Notification System

"As a customer, I want to be notified about new feedback opportunities and incentives so that I can easily participate and potentially earn rewards."

Description

The Customer Notification System requirement involves developing an automated system to notify customers about new feedback incentives through various channels such as email, SMS, and push notifications. This feature should allow customization of messages to align with the brand's voice and timing, ensuring that customers are aware of opportunities to receive incentives for their feedback. An effective notification system will significantly increase customer participation in the feedback process, enhancing the overall engagement and satisfaction with the retailer's brand.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer opts in for feedback notifications after purchasing an item from the retailer's online store.

Given a customer has completed a purchase, when they opt in for feedback notifications, then they should receive a confirmation message that they will get notified about feedback incentives via their preferred channel (email/SMS/push notification).

A customer receives a notification of a new feedback incentive via email after opting in.

Given a customer has opted in for email notifications, when a new feedback incentive is created, then the customer should receive an email within 5 minutes of the incentive being activated with clear details about how to provide feedback and claim their reward.

A retailer customizes the message for feedback notification to align with their brand voice.

Given the retailer is setting up a feedback notification message, when they input their custom message, then the notification should display the customized message correctly across all notification channels without any formatting issues.

A customer receives a text message notification of a feedback incentive after a product review is submitted.

Given a customer has submitted a product review, when a feedback incentive for that review is established, then the customer should receive an SMS notification within 10 minutes detailing the incentive and how to redeem it.

The notification system effectively tracks customer feedback participation rates.

Given the customer notification system has been in operation for one month, when participation rates for feedback incentives are analyzed, then there should be a minimum of 30% increase in customer feedback submissions compared to the month prior to the system implementation.

A retailer sets up a push notification campaign for feedback incentives.

Given a retailer is planning a push notification campaign for feedback incentives, when the campaign is launched, then customers should receive push notifications in real-time according to their preferences without any delays or errors.

A retailer reviews the performance of the customer notification system.

Given the customer notification system has been active for three months, when the retailer reviews the system's performance metrics, then they should see detailed reports on customer engagement, incentive redemption rates, and overall feedback quality.

Product Details

Vision & Mission

Problem & Solution

Details & Audience

User Personas

Storefront Sarah

Background

Needs & Pain Points

Needs

Pain Points

Psychographics

Channels

Analytical Aaron

Background

Needs & Pain Points

Needs

Pain Points

Psychographics

Channels

Promotional Patricia

Background

Needs & Pain Points

Needs

Pain Points

Psychographics

Channels

Product Features

KPI Customization

Requirements

KPI Selection Interface

Description

Acceptance Criteria

KPI Visualization Options

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Real-time KPI Updates

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Custom KPI Alerts

Description

Acceptance Criteria

KPI Comparison Tool

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Dashboard Performance Analytics

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Visual Analytics Tools

Requirements

Real-time Data Visualization

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Customizable Dashboard

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Anomaly Detection Alerts

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Performance Trend Analysis

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Interactive Heatmaps for Customer Behavior

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Real-Time Alerts

Requirements

Performance Metric Monitoring

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Customizable Alert Settings

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Historical Data Analysis

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Instant Alert System

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Performance Dashboard Integration